JP7376116B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images,
A gaming machine capable of executing a symbol variation effect in which a plurality of symbol rows vary in a specific direction on the display screen,
After the symbols in a predetermined row of the plurality of symbol rows are temporarily stopped, a symbol movement display effect is executed in which the temporarily stopped symbols, which are the temporarily stopped symbols in the predetermined row, are moved and displayed in a direction different from the specific direction. It is possible and
At the same time that all the symbols including the temporarily stopped symbol are framed out of the display screen by the symbol movement display performance and no symbols are displayed on the display screen, the symbol change performance is executed again to change the symbol row. executing a pseudo-continuous effect that varies in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is an explanatory diagram of fluctuation pattern judgment table T6 in a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory diagram of the big prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a preliminary determination information storage area. It is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is an explanatory diagram of a basic performance pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance up performance pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of processing during a fluctuation performance. It is a flowchart of display control processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a symbol duplication movement effect A. It is a figure for explaining pattern duplication movement effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a symbol duplication movement effect C. It is a diagram for explaining symbol sequential variation effect A. It is a diagram for explaining symbol sequential variation performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a symbol sequential variation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern special effect A. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern special performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern special effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern alignment effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern alignment effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern alignment effect C. It is a diagram for explaining temporary stop symbol movement effect A. It is a diagram for explaining temporary stop symbol movement effect B. It is a diagram for explaining temporary stop symbol movement effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a variable display effect A through a transparent area. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a variable display effect B through a transparent area. It is a diagram for explaining a variable display effect C through a transparent area. It is a diagram for explaining rhythmic win/loss notification effect A. It is a diagram for explaining rhythmic win/lose notification effect B. It is a diagram for explaining rhythmic win/loss notification performance C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition performance B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition performance C. It is a diagram for explaining logo movement contact effect A. It is a diagram for explaining logo movement contact effect B. It is a diagram for explaining logo movement contact effect C. It is a diagram for explaining symbol count continuous performance A. It is a diagram for explaining symbol count continuous performance B. It is a diagram for explaining symbol count continuous performance C. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an image reversal expectation level suggestion effect A; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining image reversal expectation level suggestion effect B; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an image reversal expectation level suggestion effect C; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous performance A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous performance B; It is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous effect C. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining continuous performance A that straddles fluctuations. It is a diagram for explaining continuous performance B across fluctuations. It is a diagram for explaining continuous performance C across fluctuations. It is a figure for explaining pending icon interlocking performance A. It is a figure for explaining pending icon interlocking effect B. It is a figure for explaining pending icon interlocking performance C. It is a diagram for explaining special hold change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining special hold change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining special hold change effect C. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a suspension expectation performance A. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a suspension expectation performance B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a suspension expectation level production C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an operation means operation state notification effect A; It is a figure for explaining operation means operation state notification effect B. It is a figure for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect C. It is a diagram for explaining load imparting effect A. It is a diagram for explaining load imparting performance B. It is a diagram for explaining load imparting effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a gaming state continuation suggestion effect A. It is a diagram for explaining game state continuation suggestion performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a gaming state continuation suggestion performance C. It is a diagram for explaining mode change performance A during a game. It is a diagram for explaining mode change performance B during a game. It is a diagram for explaining mode change performance C during a game. It is a diagram for explaining group preview effect A. It is a diagram for explaining group preview performance B. It is a diagram for explaining group preview effect C.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, the production button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, A frame movable body 69 is provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A movable frame body 69 (also referred to as a movable frame accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided on the right and left sides of the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members disposed on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that its main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69 are normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) where they are distant from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, and move toward the handle 60 from the retracted positions so as to approach each other (advance). ) and can come to rest at the position where it touches the handle 60. When the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up and down and left and right depending on the performance and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged at paired positions on the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (belly button) 19. , a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first grand prize device (first attacker) 31, a second grand prize device (second attacker) 36, and a grand prize opening opening. It includes a starting opening 17, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and display devices 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the shape and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed. area, and a pending digested image display area (the pending display area) in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digested image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply called a hold icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss, such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Furthermore, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance displaying the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "variable performance of performance symbols", "fluctuation performance of decorative symbols", or simply "fluctuation performance" and "fluctuation display". It should be noted that the variation performance of this decorative pattern is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the stored number of first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digest image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the pending digest image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the first special symbol is displayed. 2. It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special figure reservation is extinguished ("extinguishment of special figure reservation" to be described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member is movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advanced position in front of the vehicle. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position.

A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the image display device 7. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 includes an inlet section through which game balls flow in and an outlet section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flowed in through the inlet section to flow out to the stage section 11 through the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located at a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains constant. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow a game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is made. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , a V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening/closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 30 can pass inside the first grand prize winning device 31. . The first big winning hole sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of a game ball into the first big winning hole 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotating state) in which it distributes to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in the second state (stopping state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes game balls to the non-V area 70. . In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state). In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity for transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. In other words, the V area 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a variable probability operation opening. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged at the upper right of the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35 It is equipped with The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The grand prize opening starting hole 17 is arranged above the first grand prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the first grand prize opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not need to include the big winning opening opening opening 17.

The general winning hole 27 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning hole 29 is located in the lower right part of the gaming area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first big winning hole 30.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information). , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are 4 pieces. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (fluctuatingly displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) acquired for the passage is stored as a normal symbol in the normal symbol retention storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of general figure reservations that can be stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing of the game ball, in other words, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings may be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of the symbols, up to a predetermined number. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The general figure reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of ordinary figures held by lighting up the LEDs for the number of ordinary figures held.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, and the first starting opening sensor 21a. Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a is provided inside the big winning opening starting opening 17, and detects the game ball that has entered the big winning opening starting opening 17. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The normal winning hole sensor 29a detects the game ball that has passed into the normal winning hole 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols. etc. (including performance patterns), background images, and other image data are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the production control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and a frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and performs the operations according to the motion pattern data. The operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are controlled. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button detection switch 63a and a selection button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the production button detection switch 63a, and can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the production button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Additionally, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a fluctuation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 86 stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. In addition, in the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information do not change their status even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Furthermore, as the initial state of the counters, the ceiling counter is set to "500" and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a basic performance pattern determination table T52, a chance up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). It is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a fluctuation before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, fixed change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight presentation counter is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the evening performance counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the gaming machine 1, and is set to 0 as an initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 and the other counters are set to 0 as the initial state of the counters.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7(A) shows the random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7(B) shows the random number obtained by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "fluctuation pattern random number," and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at timings described later. It is configured as follows. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255. The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-read performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at timings to be described later. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the fluctuating performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the regular symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

In the jackpot determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the obtained jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to for determination. In FIG. 8(A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number value is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65,535 )”, it is shown that it is determined to be a “lose”. In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it will be judged as a "jackpot". It is shown that this is determined to be a "loss". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach in the event of a loss in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the processing speed of special symbol reservations.

The normal symbol winning determination table T3 indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 255)", it is determined that the result is a "loss". In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is shown that it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. In FIG. 8(D), when in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and when in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". It has been shown that

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is composed of "jackpot type" and "special symbol This is a table that is referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special pattern stop pattern data" corresponding to the special pattern stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game can be determined. "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not planned passing jackpot" This will be explained later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, a player enters the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines that he has lost, the reach determination table T2 determines that he has a reach, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is between "0 and 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in the time saving state, it is determined as a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined as a "jackpot due to pass through 16 RV" in the jackpot type determination table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different variation times are set. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 12(A), in the "non-time saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". It has been shown that FIG. 12(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T8. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9), in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21". ”, and when the special pattern stop symbol data is “14H”, “15H”, or “22H”, the release pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special pattern stop pattern data is “13H”, the release pattern is It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23." FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is performed once, The second big prize opening 35 is opened for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th R, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in the 16th R, open the second grand prize opening 35 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and the special figure stopping symbol data is determined to be "opening pattern 33". It is shown that when it is "15H" or "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and the second prize is won. When this happens, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. .
Open the port.

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of jackpot drawings (special symbol drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When you win a jackpot, the jackpot game opens the jackpot (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-not-passing planned jackpot." "V passing planned jackpot" operates the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 (V passing scheduled opening pattern) during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpot where the special pattern stop symbol data is 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the "V passing expected jackpot (probable variable jackpot)". The combinations of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33) ) or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. "V non-passing expected jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (opening pattern not expected to pass V) in which the game ball cannot pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, This is a jackpot that activates the V opening/closing member 71. Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area is 39 becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. The actual total number of rounds in the "16 RV expected jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass expected jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: Opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" and the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is scheduled to pass V" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, in the case of "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass V" and "16R (actually 13R) jackpot scheduled to pass V", the time-saving game (100 times in this example) will be performed after the jackpot game ends. It has become. In other words, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass" and a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass", and the gaming state after the jackpot is uncertain. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-saving state (low-accuracy/high-base state) or the high-accuracy/time-saving state (high-accuracy/high-base state) will occur. In addition, after the end of the time-saving game, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) for "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass V", and the gaming state becomes "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass V". appears to be in a normal high-accuracy-low base state. That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state will be as follows. Being in a high probability low base state but with a high probability becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state), and this latent probability variable state is difficult for the player to discern. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability (high base state) and the high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game of "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot", and the time saving end of "16R (actually 13R) V not planned jackpot" The subsequent low-probability, low-base state and the high-probability, low-base state after the end of the time saving of "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V and 60/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V not. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass through V, and 45/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass through V. 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)", and the probability fluctuation An uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. A high probability state is achieved by making a jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the variation pattern used. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 81 may perform probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control simultaneously, or only one of them, for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability fluctuation control by creating a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (where the number of normal symbol random numbers (random winning numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8(C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning the V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the player passes to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." Specifically, jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a high-probability, high-base state are of the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot.” "16RV jackpot expected to pass" and "16R (actually 15R) V pass planned jackpot" are in a high probability high base state, after playing a jackpot game, winning the next jackpot (next jackpot) and executing that jackpot game. Ends with. "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is a high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), and a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning a jackpot scheduled to not pass V will be a normal probability state (non-high probability (that is, a state of low probability), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state." Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability-high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low-probability-high base state means that after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as a non-time-saving state)." Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the validity determining means (FIG. 23) and the preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial values of the flags are "1", that is, "ON" for the ceiling flag, and the initial values of the other flags are "0", that is, "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial values of the counters are "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal symbol random number value) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and during other periods (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting port sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and hold ball detection processing. The numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-H), and stores the obtained random value in the first to Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbols reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: Value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-AS value), -TRND-RC value) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for special figure 2 advance determination processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 advance determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for special figure 1 advance determination processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: Step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Refer to this to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "649", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, a preliminary determination table T1 different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the preliminary jackpot determination is "lose" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number is any one of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance that it is a "16RV passing planned jackpot". In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later; however, in other embodiments, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot type determination table T5 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a fluctuating pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by the special drawing 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And obtain the reach random value. Next, since the time-saving state is here (the time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state, and determines the jackpot preliminary determination result in step S304. A fluctuation pattern is identified from the preliminary judgment result of reach/absence obtained from the reach random value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches are selected. For example, if a loss with a reach is determined in advance from the jackpot preliminary determination result and the preliminary determination result of the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, the variation pattern “P64” is selected, and the number of reserved pitches is “3 to 4”, the variation pattern “P68” is selected. Note that in this embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later; however, as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 may be used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 advance determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401: NO). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. ”) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot in advance. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "164", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". Note that the preliminary jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special drawing 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", in step S203 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "1". ", and then, in this step S504, the reservation is extinguished and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes "0" immediately. This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of pending special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first inputs the normal symbol random number value ( Read out the winning random value). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in a non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be a "lose". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)) . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start variable display of the normal symbols (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "loss", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and determines the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 using the gaming state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. Select. Here, in the non-time-saving state, "open pattern 11" is selected, and in the time-saving state, "open pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation according to the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 6 pieces), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 is reached. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (occlusions) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are respectively on the left side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side where they are read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) are respectively on the right side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation is a jackpot that provides a greater profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation (V-passing expected jackpot) It has become easier to win.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is made with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Determine whether or not.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special figure 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special figure 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the jackpot determination result is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). A determination as to whether or not the time saving state is established is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process moves to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is the special drawing 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type will definitely be a V-passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state among the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3” (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is “P21” to “P23”) are referenced (addresses are set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" for special drawing 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, we will use the portions ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ) is referred to. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time-saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607: YES), that is, when there is a reach and there is a loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time-saving state, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The "P14" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of balls on hold, a shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold. In other words, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More and more short fluctuation patterns are being selected. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

If the reach random value is not a reach established random value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-reach loss (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state no reach loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P16" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so the shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 that is referenced is different from. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. is referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63". From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" for special drawing 2 is selected. For example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44 ” to “P46”) are referenced. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: Step S108). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saving times, and the details will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the jackpot and the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning hole. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. Together with the setting of the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V opening/closing member, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the won jackpot. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, the round counter is set to "16" (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The gaming state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag (returning them to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the present process ends.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability change counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time saving state, the time saving counter is set to "100". As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state specification command includes information regarding the current gaming state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not it is in a variable probability state, the variable variable counter value, whether or not it is in a time saving state, and the time saving counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the specified rotation speed. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the counter value has become "0" (step S2012). In other words, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has elapsed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched on (step S2013), and "700" is set in the time saving counter as the number of time saving times (number of times of granting). Then, the ceiling flag is turned off (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: Step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in a low base state during a non-time saving state, it is in a low base state while a jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: Step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big prize opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, it is operated according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. When a game ball of a predetermined number wins, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the grand prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the grand prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the big winning hole may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big winning hole that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. This includes the time when it is time to start opening again after the interval time (closed time) has elapsed. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning hole (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning hole opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) depending on the type of jackpot. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the opening of the big winning opening during one round. It is also possible to determine whether it is the first opening or not, and to set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the grand prize opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since closing the big prize opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" is "16R (actually 13R) V-not-passing planned jackpot". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass into the V area 39 in "Jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 with a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass through V" will occur to the player. ”, it can be recognized that no game ball has passed into the V area 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V area 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed and the present process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter values are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in this round.

If it is an opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball won in the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process moves to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first big prize opening 30 in this round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V opening/closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed when the first ball wins, regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to allow the short circuit to be opened (in this case, for 0.1 seconds) at the same time. In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, for 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and while the V opening/closing member 71 is open. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when a jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (described later in the V area sensor detection processing (see Figure 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball that enters the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned ON when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is assumed that it will not be turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). This prevents the V flag from being turned on and set to a high probability state based on V passing due to fraudulent activity. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first grand prize opening 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process moves to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process moves to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process moves to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long when the second ball wins (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (29.5 seconds maximum opening time of the grand prize opening + 2 seconds interval closing time), generally speaking, the second ball will win the prize. The time from the end of the round to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, in the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S2550). As mentioned above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the big prize opening. Make a judgment.

If the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2551), and performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after several seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period starts. Make the settings and finish this process.

If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short-circuit opening, the condition for closing the V opening/closing member 71 may include that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and the present processing ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned OFF (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets the time saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy, high-base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of revolutions until b time saving (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the probability change flag is OFF, when the game is hit 500 times, the game enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information regarding the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. be done. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Held pitch count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending pitch count process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of regular symbol reserved balls. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable performance (step S4305). The process during variable performance is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance, and the details will be described later. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading effect. The details of the pre-read effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub-RAM 94 information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data that is included in the opening command and is set at the time of jackpot winning determination. Then, the opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is selected in the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94 by selecting the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, an ending performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the production control microcomputer 91 inputs information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag). , ceiling counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving effect counter, probability-changing effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) in time saving is set in a time saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations in probability changing is set in a probability variable performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in a ceiling performance counter. Thereby, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to hold information about passing the V when receiving the V passing command. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Ahead production decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs advance determination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot preliminary judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type preliminary judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, the advance judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that the jackpot judgment information “Lose” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third pieces as the preliminary judgment results corresponding to the first to third pieces of special drawing 2 pending. A state is shown in which the data is stored in a storage area, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that from the state of FIG. 39(A), special drawing 2 has won, and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is added to the fourth special drawing 2 pending. A state in which the data is stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, jackpot judgment information "jackpot", jackpot type information "21H", and fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as advance judgment information. In addition, "Pattern A" is added as pre-reading performance pattern information to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawings 2 pending and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. " is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to this area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. 4. Pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: Step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, if the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-read effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with reach" (step S4603). Whether it is a "big hit" or "a hit with a reach" can be determined, for example, based on the variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach loss" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-judgment command is "Jackpot" or "Lose with reach" (step S4603: YES), a pre-read effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-read effect; Then, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Jackpot" and the pre-read effect random number is "0-55", the pre-read effect is "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "56-67", the pre-read effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. In addition, if the pre-judgment result is "reach and loss" and the pre-read effect random number is "0 to 107", the pre-read effect will be "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "108 to 114", the pre-read effect will be When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. Note that the type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-read effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-judgment command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area are stored. A prefetch effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Set "Pattern A" to "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effects that are executed before the variable effects corresponding to the fourth storage area (variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). . Note that whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing to execute the pre-read effect has already passed, the pre-read effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-read effect, it will be executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current gaming status, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the winning determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs basic performance pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic performance pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display of predetermined characters and their movements, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67) , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up production and look-ahead production on top of this basic production. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the basic performance pattern by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic performance patterns are set to perform no-reach, no-lose performance. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic performance pattern for performing the SP1 performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs a no-reach performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and the chance up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 includes a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". You may or may not be prepared.

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " 4-NO,” “4-SP1,” “4-SP2,” “4-SP3,” and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a count performance pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count performance pattern determination process includes the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the probability change, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time saving, the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations, etc. on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability variations on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation production counter at the time of probability variation. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability changes based on the value of the time-saving performance counter when time is shortened.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the number of changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight effect counter records the number of changes since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter each time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2 (for example, TH2=200) when the value of the evening effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1=10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. Thereby, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the ram has not been cleared. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 may erase the display and chance image representing the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the evening performance counter is TH4 (for example, TH4=100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The production control microcomputer 91 may decide whether or not to display the value of the ceiling production counter based on the value of the evening production counter as described above, or may decide based on the value of the ceiling production counter. Good too. For example, the production control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH6 (for example, TH6=100), and displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH7 (for example, TH7=70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be erased, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count performance pattern determination process, the combination of performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined by referring to the performance control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the variable effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a variable production timer (step S5030) and ends this process. A variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation performance (FIG. 36: Step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer has reached zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable production is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is the timing to set the command before variation end to the production command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the production control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 etc. that it is a specific timing during the variation production, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. According to the information included in the pre-variation end command, the content of the presentation is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc.

If it is not the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-read effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command that does not include pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variable effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect that displays a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect to fade the preview image.

9. Operation of the movable body and display effect of the sub-display screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effect of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during game performance (display performance), initial operation when power is turned on, etc. will be carried out. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during a game performance (display performance) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, and has an upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and a lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the center is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored so that the remaining part is visible, or may be completely stored and difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to be able to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction in front of the display screen 7a. Moreover, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be set arbitrarily. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed in at least a portion thereof, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode) . In this second aspect, the decoration part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stop there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is constituted by a pair of flat members arranged on both the left and right sides of the handle 60, and is configured to be movable in the left and right directions, respectively. The two members are made of flexible members and are configured such that one main surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) far from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively (first mode) . As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 each move (advance) from the retracted position in a direction approaching the handle 60, that is, move close to each other, and each move toward the handle 60. It can stand still at the position where it is touched (second mode). When the movable frame accessory 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60. The frame movable accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two members are separated from each other so that the second mode changes to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display images. Further, it is possible to perform effects linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. Furthermore, examples of effects, modifications, and aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, preliminary determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following example of display effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. Further, in the display performance example, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted.

The symbol duplication movement effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 51 to 53. This symbol duplication movement performance is executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pattern copy movement effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Design duplication movement effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect A. In the symbol duplication movement effect, after one of a set of decorative symbols stops during special symbol fluctuation, another symbol appears as a duplicate from the stopped symbol and moves toward the stop position of the other symbol. It is a moving performance. In the symbol duplication movement performance A, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a during the special symbol variation. The fluctuating display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible while moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved at high speed and cannot be visually recognized.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the display is stopped in the second area A2. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the left decorative pattern 8L after the change, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the middle decorative pattern 8C after the change. The second area A2 of the screen 7a is the stop position of the right decorative pattern 8R after the change. Further, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is being executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 51(A). Here, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first area A1.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), a right decorative pattern 8R appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is performed in which "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is duplicated to "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 51(C), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is transferred to the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move towards the right. In FIG. 51(C), a state in which "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2 is shown. The right decorative pattern 8R "3" maintains a translucent state while moving rightward.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R that is moving rightward does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and is displayed on the display screen. Frame out from 7a. Thereby, it is notified that the right decorative pattern 8R will not be stopped and displayed at this "3".

A new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "4", which is different from the previous pattern "3", appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, a fluctuating effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is generated from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and successively moves to the right.

As shown in FIG. 51(E), the "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, is transferred to the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move towards the right. In FIG. 51(E), a state in which "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2 is shown. "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a translucent state while moving rightward.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "5", which is different from the previous pattern "4", appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is generated from the left decorative pattern 8L of the first area A1 and is copied to the right. A fluctuating effect that moves in one direction after another is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(F), the "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is moving rightward, does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and is displayed on the display screen. Frame out from 7a. Thereby, it is notified that the right decorative pattern 8R will not be stopped and displayed at this "4". The "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 51(F), a state in which "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2 is shown.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is different from the previous pattern "5", appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is generated from the left decorative pattern 8L of the first area A1 and is copied to the right. A fluctuating effect that moves in one direction after another is executed. In addition, in this way, the right decorative pattern 8R that appears from the left decorative pattern 8L does not appear in a preset numerical order such as "3", "4", "5", and "6", but in a random numerical order. May appear in

As shown in FIG. 51(G), the "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R that is moving rightward does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and is displayed on the display screen. Frame out from 7a. Thereby, it is notified that the right decorative pattern 8R will not be stopped and displayed at this "5". The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 51(G), a state in which "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2 is shown.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "6", which is different from the previous pattern "3", appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is generated from the left decorative pattern 8L of the first area A1 and is copied to the right. A fluctuating effect that moves in one direction after another is executed. Moreover, in this way, the right decorative pattern 8R that appears from the left decorative pattern 8L may appear in a random numerical order.

As shown in FIG. 51(H), the right decorative symbol 8R "3" that is moving rightward stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is fixedly stopped at "3", and it is reported that the player is in a ready-to-reach state. The "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 51(H), a state in which "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2 is shown.

On the other hand, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "2", which is different from the previous pattern "6", appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is generated from the left decorative pattern 8L of the first area A1 and is copied to the right. A fluctuating effect that moves in one direction after another is executed. Moreover, in this way, the right decorative pattern 8R that appears from the left decorative pattern 8L may appear in a random numerical order.

As shown in FIG. 51(I), in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped, and "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R is moving rightward. does not stop at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and frames out from the display screen 7a. Similarly, the "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. , passes through the second area A2, and exits the frame from the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51(J), a middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the medium decorative pattern 8C of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is performed in which "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is duplicated to "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C.

As shown in FIG. 51(K), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is transferred to the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. Move towards the right. Here, the "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C passes through the third area A3 while moving to the right, and further passes through the second area A2 to frame out. The medium decorative pattern 8R "3" maintains a translucent state while moving rightward.

On the other hand, a new medium decorative pattern 8C appears from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", a medium decorative pattern 8C of "4", which is different from the previous pattern "3", appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, an effect is executed in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is reproduced one after another from "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the medium decorative pattern 8C is generated from the left decorative pattern 8L of the first area A1 and then reproduced from the right decorative pattern 8L. A fluctuating effect that moves in one direction after another is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(L), the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is transferred to the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. It moves to the right and stops in the third area A3. Thereby, it is reported that the medium decorative pattern 8C has been fixed and stopped at "4". Furthermore, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is confirmed and stopped, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped with a losing number of "343", and the success or failure result is notified. In addition, when "3" stops on the medium decorative pattern 8C, a jackpot of "333" is notified.

[Design duplication movement effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect B. In the symbol duplication movement effect, after one of a set of decorative symbols stops during special symbol fluctuation, another symbol appears as a duplicate from the stopped symbol and moves toward the stop position of the other symbol. It is a moving performance. In the symbol duplication movement performance B, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a during the special symbol variation. The fluctuating display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible while moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved at high speed and cannot be visually recognized.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the display is stopped in the second area A2. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the left decorative pattern 8L after the change, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the middle decorative pattern 8C after the change. The second area A2 of the screen 7a is the stop position of the right decorative pattern 8R after the change. Further, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is being executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 52(A). Here, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first area A1.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), a right decorative pattern 8R appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is performed in which "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is duplicated to "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 52(C), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is transferred to the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move towards the right. As shown in FIGS. 52(C) to (E), the right decorative pattern 8R "3" changes from "3" to another pattern (number) while rotating horizontally. Here, each time it rotates horizontally, the pattern (number) changes. The right decorative pattern 8R changes the pattern in the order of "3", "2", "1", etc. while rotating horizontally, and moves to the second region A2 through the third region A3. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right while changing the pattern. Note that the right decorative pattern 8R changes from translucent to normal color when it starts moving rightward, and maintains the normal color state while horizontally rotating (fluctuating).

As shown in FIG. 52(F), the right decorative pattern 8R, which is moving rightward while horizontally rotating (fluctuating), stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R stops at the pattern (number) displayed when it stops in the second area A2. Here, it stops at "3". As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is fixedly stopped at "3", and it is reported that the player is in a ready-to-reach state.

As shown in FIG. 52(G), a middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the medium decorative pattern 8C of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is performed in which "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is duplicated to "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C.

As shown in FIG. 52(H), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is transferred to the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. Move towards the right. As shown in FIGS. 52(H) to (I), the medium decorative pattern 8C "3" changes from "3" to another pattern (number) while rotating horizontally. Here, each time it rotates horizontally, the pattern (number) changes. The medium decorative pattern 8C randomly changes the pattern to "3", "8", "5", etc. while rotating horizontally, and moves to the third area A3. That is, the medium decorative pattern 8C moves to the right while changing the pattern. It should be noted that the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from translucent to normal color when it starts moving rightward, and maintains the normal color state while horizontally rotating (fluctuation).

As shown in FIG. 52(J), the medium decoration pattern 8C, which is moving rightward while horizontally rotating (fluctuating), stops in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C stops at the pattern (number) displayed when it stops in the third area A3. Here, it stops at "5". Thereby, it is reported that the medium decorative pattern 8C has been fixed and stopped at "5". Further, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is confirmed and stopped, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped with a losing number of "353", and the success or failure result is notified. In addition, when "3" stops on the medium decorative pattern 8C, a jackpot of "333" is notified.

52(K) to (L) are modified examples of FIGS. 52(C) to (E). In FIGS. 52(C) to (E), the right decorative pattern 8R is assumed to change its pattern (number) from "3" to another pattern (number) while rotating horizontally. However, the variation mode of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the above. In FIGS. 52(K) to (L), the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates in the vertical direction while moving rightward. Such an embodiment may be adopted.

[Design duplication movement effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect C. In the symbol duplication movement effect, after one of a set of decorative symbols stops during special symbol fluctuation, another symbol appears as a duplicate from the stopped symbol and moves toward the stop position of the other symbol. It is a moving performance. In the symbol duplication movement performance C, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a during the special symbol variation. The fluctuating display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible while moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved at high speed and cannot be visually recognized.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the display is stopped in the second area A2. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the left decorative pattern 8L after the change, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the middle decorative pattern 8C after the change. The second area A2 of the screen 7a is the stop position of the right decorative pattern 8R after the change. Further, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is being executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 53(A). Here, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first area A1.

As shown in FIG. 53(B), a right decorative pattern 8R appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is performed in which "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is duplicated to "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 53(C), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is transferred to the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move towards the right. In FIG. 53(C), a state in which "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2 is shown. When the right decorative pattern 8R "3" starts moving rightward, it changes from translucent to normal color and moves while maintaining the normal color state.

As shown in FIG. 53(D), the right decorative symbol 8R "3" that is moving rightward stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. When the right decorative pattern 8R stops in the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed overlapping the stopped right decorative pattern 8R. The button image BTN is an image imitating the outer shape of the performance button 63, and urges the player to operate (press) the performance button 63.

When the player operates the production button 63, as shown in FIG. 53(E), the button image BTN disappears and the right decorative pattern 8R stops fixed at "3", and as shown in FIGS. 53(J) to (K). As shown in FIG. 3, the right decorative pattern 8R may rotate horizontally as the button image BTN disappears, and may be fixed and stopped at a pattern (number) other than "3". FIGS. 53(J) to (K) show a state in which the right decorative pattern 8R rotates horizontally and is fixedly stopped at "4". In FIG. 53(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "3", and it is reported that the ready-to-reach state is reached.

After FIG. 53(E) or FIG. 53(K), as shown in FIG. 53(F), a middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. . Specifically, from the left decorative pattern 8L "3", the medium decorative pattern 8C of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, an effect is performed in which "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is duplicated to "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C.

As shown in FIG. 53(G), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is transferred to the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. Move towards the right. When the middle decorative pattern 8C "3" starts moving rightward, it changes from translucent to normal color and moves while maintaining the normal color state.

As shown in FIG. 53(H), the moving middle decorative pattern 8C "3" stops in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. When the medium decorative pattern 8C stops in the third area A3, the button image BTN is displayed overlapping the stopped medium decorative pattern 8C. The button image BTN is an image imitating the outer shape of the performance button 63, and urges the player to operate (press) the performance button 63.

When the player operates the production button 63, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the button image BTN disappears and the medium decorative pattern 8C is fixed at "3" and stops, and as shown in FIG. 53(L). , when the button image BTN disappears, the medium decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally, and there are cases where it is fixed and stopped at a pattern (number) other than "3". In FIG. 53(I), the medium decorative pattern 8C stops at "3" and a jackpot is announced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53(L), when the button image BTN disappears and the medium decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally and stops at a pattern (number) other than "3", a loss is reported.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the symbol duplication movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, which is one of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, is located in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIGS. 51(F) to (H), after the first effect, the right decorative pattern 8R appears and is displayed from the left decorative pattern 8L that has stopped in the first area A1. A second effect in which the user moves toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a and stops at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(L), after the second performance, the middle decorative pattern 8 stops in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L stops. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can inform you of the correctness. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the second performance, when the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the left decorative pattern 8L, it is the same as the stopped left decorative pattern 8L. It represents a pattern. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, in the second performance, a plurality of right decorative symbols 8R appear consecutively from the left decorative symbol 8L, and each moves toward the second area A2. However, one stops at the second area A2, and the remaining ones pass through the second area A2. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, in the second performance, when the right decorative pattern 8R that has appeared from the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed, and the game When the person operates the production button 63, the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as when it appeared, or the pattern may be different. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, in the second performance, the right decorative pattern 8R changes the pattern when it appears from the left decorative pattern 8L and moves toward the second area A2. Move while moving. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pattern duplication movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pattern duplication movement effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which are duplicated from the left decorative pattern 8L, are assumed to have their (numbers) unchanged after duplication. However, after duplication, the symbols (numbers) may change and be displayed in a variable manner while moving to the right.
In the pattern duplication movement performances B and C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C copied from the left decorative pattern 8L are assumed to have the same pattern (number) as the left decorative pattern 8L. However, the duplicated right decorative pattern 8R and middle decorative pattern 8C may have different designs (numbers) from the left decorative pattern 8L. For example, "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R may appear from "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L.

[Modification 2]
In pattern duplication movement effects B and C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are duplicated one by one from the left decorative pattern 8L, and the one right decorative pattern 8R and one middle decorative pattern 8C that are duplicated are always It is assumed that the vehicle stops in the second area A2 and the third area A3. However, as in the pattern duplication movement performance A, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C may each be duplicated in plural numbers from the left decorative pattern 8L. For example, in the pattern duplication movement effect B, a plurality of right decorative patterns 8R appear consecutively from the left decorative pattern 8L, each moves to the right while rotating horizontally, one stops in the second area A2, and the rest may pass through the second area A2 and frame out. The same applies to the medium decorative pattern 8C.

[Modification 3]
In the pattern duplication movement effects A and C, the right decorative pattern 8R and middle decorative pattern 8C, which were copied from the left decorative pattern 8L, did not change their patterns (numbers) while moving to the right, but the pattern duplication movement effects As in B, the symbol (number) may change while moving in the right direction.

[Modification 4]
In the pattern duplication movement effects A to C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are duplicated (appear) from the left decorative pattern 8L. However, other patterns than the left decorative pattern 8L may be copied. For example, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L may be copied from the right decorative pattern 8R, or the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be copied from the middle decorative pattern 8C.

[Modification 5]
In the pattern duplication movement performances A to C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C may move while maintaining translucence while moving to the right, or may change color, shape, and size. It's okay.

[Modification 6]
In pattern duplication movement effects A and B, similarly to pattern duplication movement effect C, when the right decorative pattern 8R that has appeared from the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed, and when operated, the pattern ( A performance may be performed in which the numbers) change. The same applies when the middle decorative pattern 8C that has appeared from the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the third area A3.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether the image is correct or not;
a first effect in which a first pattern that is one of the set of decorative patterns stops in a first area of the display means;
After the first effect, a second symbol appears from the first symbol stopped in the first area and moves toward the second area of the display means, and the second symbol of the display means appears. A second performance that stops in the area of
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
After the second performance, a third symbol stops in the third area of the display means, and a result is displayed depending on the stopped first symbol, second symbol, and third symbol. to notify,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
In the second performance, when the second symbol appears from the first symbol, it represents the same symbol as the stopped first symbol;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
In the second performance, a plurality of the second symbols appear consecutively from the first symbol, each moves toward the second area, and one stops in the second area. and the rest passes through the second region,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operating means image that imitates the appearance of the operating means,
In the second performance, when the second symbol appearing from the first symbol reaches the second area, the operating means image is displayed;
When the player operates the operating means, the second symbol may be the same symbol as when it appeared, or the symbol may be different.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
In the second performance, when the second symbol appears from the first symbol and moves toward the second area, the second symbol moves while changing the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol sequential variation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 54 to 56. This symbol sequential variation performance is executed during the variation production of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol sequential variation effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). Further, the corresponding sound data is read from the ROM 103 and the sound is output from the speaker 67.

[Symbol sequential variation effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect A. In the symbol sequential variation performance, a set of decorative symbols are displayed with the previous stopped symbols during the special symbol variation, and one of the symbols is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining symbols maintain the stopped state with the previous stopped symbols. After that, the remaining symbols begin to change in sequence. In the symbol sequential variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. has been done.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 54(A) and 54(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special symbol changes. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears). Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display "356" in a stopped state without changing their display positions.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a changing manner. When starting the variable display, the medium decorative pattern 8C moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the "5" that was displayed in a stopped state moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and from above, other patterns (numbers) enter the frame. The next performance will be performed. Note that the fluctuating display here refers to a display in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is visible moving at high speed, a state in which the pattern is not visible, and a state in which the fluctuating display is not visible. Also includes. Here, it is assumed that the variable display is not visible. The remaining decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) maintain a stationary display without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the ``6'' that had been stopped and displayed moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and from above, other patterns (numbers) enter the frame. The next performance will be performed. The variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R is also not visible. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) maintain a stationary display without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, "3", which was displayed in a stopped state, moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and from above, other designs (numbers) enter the frame. The next performance will be performed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also not visible. As a result, the variable display of all decorative patterns becomes invisible.

In this way, here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner in the order of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Generally, the order in which the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop is the reverse order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Generally, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing, they all start changing at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Even when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to move in order, the right decorative pattern 8R always starts moving before the left decorative pattern 8L goes out of frame. In this embodiment, when the first symbol goes out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

As shown in FIG. 54(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a static display mode of "689" all at once from a state where they are displayed in a variable manner and cannot be visually recognized. This can surprise the player. As shown in FIGS. 54(F) and (G), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "689" without changing their display positions.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 54(H). When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the "9" that had been stopped and displayed moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and from above, other patterns (numbers) enter the frame. The next performance will be performed. Note that the fluctuating display here refers to a display in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is visible moving at high speed, a state in which the pattern is not visible, and a state in which the fluctuating display is not visible. Also includes. Here, it is assumed that the variable display is not visible. The remaining decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) maintain a stationary display without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the medium decorative pattern 8C moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the "8" that was displayed in a stopped state moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and from above, other patterns (numbers) enter the frame. The next performance will be performed. The fluctuating display of the medium decorative pattern 8C is also not visible. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) maintain a stationary display without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the ``6'' that had been stopped and displayed moves downward and out of the frame without changing its color or shape, and from above, other patterns (numbers) enter the frame. The next performance will be performed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also not visible. As a result, the variable display of all decorative patterns becomes invisible.

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, they all start to fluctuate at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols begin to fluctuate is reversed from the general order. In addition, in general, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start changing in order, the right decorative pattern always changes before the left decorative pattern 8L goes out of frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when the first symbol goes out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

Further, in this embodiment, since the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change changes each time the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change, the player cannot predict which symbol will disappear, and can enjoy the variable performance. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the first symbol goes out of frame and the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display, the timing at which the second symbol goes out of frame and the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display, and the timing at which the second symbol goes out of frame and the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display; The timing when the symbols that were displayed in a stopped frame go out of frame is executed with a certain rhythm. Here, they are executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 when each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to fluctuate. As described above, in this embodiment, when the first symbol goes out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each symbol is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, if a short sound is generated at the start timing of each symbol's variation, the sound will be rhythmically generated three times, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

As shown in FIG. 54(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a static display mode of "234" all at once from a state where they are displayed in a variable manner and cannot be visually recognized. This can surprise the player. As shown in FIGS. 54(K) and (L), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display "234" in a stopped state without changing their display positions.

[Symbol sequential variation effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect B. In the symbol sequential variation performance, a set of decorative symbols are displayed with the previous stopped symbols during the special symbol variation, and one of the symbols is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining symbols maintain the stopped state with the previous stopped symbols. After that, the remaining symbols begin to change in sequence. In the symbol sequential variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. has been done.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 55(A) and 55(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special symbol changes. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears). Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "356" while moving upward for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in a direction (upward) that is different from the direction of movement (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 55(C). When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the ``6'' that had been stopped and displayed stops moving upward without changing its color or shape, moves downward, and goes out of the frame, and from above, other patterns (numbers) appear. The effect that comes in the frame is executed. Note that the variable display here includes not only a display in which the right decorative pattern 8R is visible in a state in which it is moving at high speed, but also a state in which the pattern is not visible. Here, it is assumed that the state in which symbols with different numbers move rapidly from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) maintain movement and stop display in a direction (upward) that is different from the direction of movement (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the medium decorative pattern 8C moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the number "5" that had been stopped and displayed stops moving upward without changing its color or shape, moves downward, and goes out of the frame, and other patterns (numbers) appear from above. The effect that comes in the frame is executed. The fluctuating display of the medium decorative pattern 8C is also such that the state in which the symbols with different numbers move rapidly from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) maintain movement and stop display in a direction (upward) that is different from the direction of movement (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the number "3" that was stopped and displayed stops moving upward without changing its color or shape, moves downward, and goes out of the frame, and from above, other patterns (numbers) appear. The effect that comes in the frame is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L also allows the state in which the symbols with different numbers move rapidly from the top to the bottom to be visually recognized. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. As a result, all the decorative patterns become visible in a variable display.

In this way, here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, they all start to fluctuate at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols begin to fluctuate is reversed from the general order. In addition, in general, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start changing in order, the right decorative pattern always changes before the left decorative pattern 8L goes out of frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when the first symbol goes out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

After a predetermined period of variation, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 55(F). Here, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) of "9". The left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(G), the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) of "8". The left decorative pattern 8L continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the pattern (number) of "6". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable manner to a state in which they are stopped and displayed at "689".

As shown in FIGS. 55(H) and (I), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "689" while moving downward for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the direction of variation (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 55(J), the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C move downward and go out of frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C, "89", which had been stopped and displayed, greatly speeds up its downward movement without changing its color or shape and moves out of the frame, and from above, other symbols ( A production in which the number ) enters the frame is performed. Note that the fluctuating display here refers to a state in which symbols with different numbers can be visually recognized as moving from the top to the bottom at high speed. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) maintain movement and stop display in the same direction (downward) as the movement direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(K), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the ``6'' that had been stopped and displayed greatly increases the speed of downward movement without changing its color or shape and moves out of the frame, and from above, other patterns (numbers) are placed in the frame. The incoming performance is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L also allows the state in which the symbols with different numbers move rapidly from the top to the bottom to be visually recognized. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. As a result, all the decorative patterns become visible in a variable display.

Here, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and the left decorative pattern 8L is subsequently displayed in a variable manner. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, they all start to fluctuate at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, after a plurality of symbols change simultaneously, one symbol starts changing. In addition, in general, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start changing in order, the right decorative pattern always changes before the left decorative pattern 8L goes out of frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when two symbols go out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the manner in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate changes each time they change, the player cannot predict which symbol will disappear, and can enjoy the fluctuating effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the timing at which each symbol goes out of frame due to the start of variation is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, they are executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 when each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to fluctuate. As described above, in this embodiment, when some of the symbols go out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each symbol is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, if a short sound is generated at the start timing of each symbol's variation, the sound will be generated rhythmically, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

As shown in FIG. 55(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in the static display mode of "234" from the variable display state. This can surprise the player. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears). Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display "234" in a stopped state without changing their display positions.

[Symbol sequential variation production C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect C. In the symbol sequential variation performance, a set of decorative symbols are displayed with the previous stopped symbols during the special symbol variation, and one of the symbols is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining symbols maintain the stopped state with the previous stopped symbols. After that, the remaining symbols begin to change in sequence. In the symbol sequential variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. has been done.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 56(A) and 56(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special symbol changes. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears). Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop displaying "356" while moving upward for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in a direction (upward) that is different from the direction of movement (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 56(C). When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the ``6'' that had been stopped and displayed stops moving upward without changing its color or shape, moves downward, and goes out of the frame, and from above, other patterns (numbers) appear. The effect that comes in the frame is executed. Note that the variable display here includes not only a display in which the right decorative pattern 8R is visible in a state in which it is moving at high speed, but also a state in which the pattern is not visible. Here, it is assumed that the state in which symbols with different numbers move rapidly from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. The remaining decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) maintain movement and stop display in a direction (upward) that is different from the direction of movement (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(D), the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the medium decorative pattern 8C moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the number "5" that had been stopped and displayed stops moving upward without changing its color or shape, moves downward, and goes out of the frame, and other patterns (numbers) appear from above. A performance that does not come in the frame is executed. The fluctuating display of the medium decorative pattern 8C is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized. That is, here, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are configured to have different variable display modes. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) maintain movement and stop display in a direction (upward) that is different from the direction of movement (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the number "3" that was stopped and displayed stops moving upward without changing its color or shape, moves downward, and goes out of the frame, and from above, other patterns (numbers) appear. The effect that comes in the frame is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is similar to the variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R, so that the state in which the symbols with different numbers move rapidly from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. As a result, all decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner.

In this way, here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, they all start to fluctuate at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols begin to fluctuate is reversed from the general order. In addition, in general, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start changing in order, the right decorative pattern always changes before the left decorative pattern 8L goes out of frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when the first symbol goes out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Moreover, in this embodiment, the manner of variable display of each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R is configured to be different. Thereby, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

After the fluctuation for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R perform an effect in which the manner of fluctuation display changes. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L switch from a state where the fluctuating display is visible to a state where it is not visible, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is switched from a state where the fluctuating display is not visible to a state where it is visible. In this manner, in this embodiment, the manner of the variable display changes during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the manner of the variable display changes randomly with the passage of time, with each symbol being different. This prevents the variable display from being monotonous, making it possible to entertain the player.

After a predetermined period of variation, as shown in FIG. 56(G), the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed at the same time. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "9", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "8". The left decorative pattern 8L continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the pattern (number) of "6". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable manner to a state in which they are stopped and displayed at "689".

As shown in FIG. 56(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the same position without changing their positions for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the stop display, and then, as shown in FIG. 56(I). As shown in , the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display "689" while moving downward. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the direction of variation (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This notifies the user that the pseudo-association will start.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move downward for a predetermined period, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are simultaneously re-variably displayed as shown in FIG. 56(J). When starting the variable display, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C move downward and go out of frame. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C, "89", which had been stopped and displayed, greatly speeds up its downward movement without changing its color or shape and moves out of the frame, and from above, other symbols ( An effect is executed in which the numbers ( ) do not come into the frame. Note that the fluctuating display here refers to a display in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is visible moving at high speed, a state in which the pattern is not visible, and a state in which the fluctuating display is not visible. Also includes. Here, it is assumed that the variable display is not visible. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) maintain movement and stop display in the same direction (downward) as the movement direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56(K), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When starting the variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and goes out of frame. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the ``6'' that had been stopped and displayed greatly increases the speed of downward movement without changing its color or shape and moves out of the frame, and from above, other patterns (numbers) are placed in the frame. The incoming performance is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L also allows the state in which the symbols with different numbers move rapidly from the top to the bottom to be visually recognized. It should be noted that a mode may also be adopted in which the symbols (numbers thereof) cannot be visually recognized and only the vertical lines caused by the symbols moving at high speed from the top to the bottom can be visually recognized. In accordance with the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C changes in the same manner as the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, the variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from being invisible to being visible like the left decorative pattern 8L. As a result, all the decorative patterns become visible in a variable display.

Here, among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and the left decorative pattern 8L is subsequently displayed in a variable manner. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, they all start to fluctuate at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, after a plurality of symbols change simultaneously, one symbol starts changing. In addition, in general, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start changing in order, the right decorative pattern always changes before the left decorative pattern 8L goes out of frame. 8R starts moving. In this embodiment, when two symbols go out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. By doing so, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the manner in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate changes each time they change, the player cannot predict which symbol will disappear, and can enjoy the fluctuating performance. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the timing at which each symbol goes out of frame due to the start of variation is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, they are executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 when each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to fluctuate. As described above, in this embodiment, when some of the symbols go out of frame, the remaining symbols maintain a stopped display. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each symbol is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, if a short sound is generated at the start timing of each symbol's variation, the sound will be generated rhythmically, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

As shown in FIG. 56(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in the static display mode of "234" from the variable display state. This can surprise the player. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested (disappears). Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Then, the next special figure variation starts. After the next special figure variation is started, for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display "234" in a stopped state without changing their display positions.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the symbol sequential variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the first effect is that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and the first effect is as shown in FIG. 54(B). After the next variation of the special symbol variation for which the production was executed starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed with the same symbol “356” as the symbol that was stopped and displayed in the first production are displayed. As shown in FIG. 54(C), after the second effect, the medium decorative pattern 8C, which is one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining patterns ( A third performance in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) maintain a stopped display can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(D), one of the symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) that maintains the stop display after the third performance It is possible to perform a fourth effect in which the right decorative pattern 8R is further displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining symbols (left decorative pattern 8L) are maintained in a stationary display. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(E), after the fourth performance, the remaining symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L) that are maintained in a stopped display are further displayed in a variable manner. can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54(H) to 54(J), a set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern. 8R, in the third performance, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L maintain a stationary display, and in the fourth performance, the middle decorative pattern 8C is further displayed. is displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L maintains a stationary display, and in the fifth performance, the left decorative pattern 8L is further displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, in the second performance, the third performance, the fourth performance, and the fifth performance, one symbol that is displayed in a static manner is displayed in a variable manner. When switching to , the corresponding sound is output from the speaker 67. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually and aurally entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the second performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are in the first direction different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the symbols. The remaining symbols (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that maintain the stop display in the third direction move in the first direction (upward). continues. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the symbol sequential variation effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol sequential variation performances A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are assumed to continue to be displayed even if the next variation starts after being stopped and displayed. However, it may be configured such that it disappears once at the start of the fluctuation and then is displayed again during the fluctuation.

[Modification 2]
In the symbol sequential variation performances A to C, the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start varying is random. However, the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate may be determined in advance.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol sequential variation effects A to C, a short sound is played when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary. The short tones may have different tones or lengths. Also, long sounds may be made and sounds may overlap.

[Modification 4]
In the symbol sequential variation performances B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed after the start of the special symbol variation are assumed to move upward, but the direction of movement can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may move to the right, left, or diagonally.

[Modification 5]
In the symbol sequential variation performance A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed after the start of the special symbol variation are not moved. However, the symbols may be moved in the same way as the sequential variation effects B and C.

[Modification 6]
In the symbol sequential variation effects B and C, the symbols whose variable display is visible may be in a form where the variable display is not visible.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether the image is correct or not;
a first performance in which the set of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed;
After the next variation of the special symbol variation in which the first production was performed is started, the set of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed in the same pattern as the symbol that was stopped and displayed in the first production. The second performance and
After the second performance, a third performance is performed in which one symbol of the set of decorative symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining symbols maintain a static display;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
After the third performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which one of the symbols maintaining the static display is further displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining symbols maintain the static display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
After the fourth performance, it is possible to execute a fifth performance in which the remaining symbols that are maintained in a static display are further displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-3,
The set of decorative patterns includes a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern,
In the third performance, the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the middle decorative pattern and the left decorative pattern maintain a stationary display,
In the fourth performance, the middle decorative pattern is further displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the left decorative pattern maintains a stationary display;
In the fifth performance, the left decorative pattern is further displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-3 or aspect A2-4 further includes:
Equipped with a sound output means for outputting sound,
In the second performance, the third performance, the fourth performance, and the fifth performance, when one symbol that is being displayed in a stopped state is switched to a variable display, the sound output means responds to the change. sound is output,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the second performance, the set of decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed move in a first direction different from the direction of variation of the symbols;
In the third performance, the remaining symbols that are maintained in a stopped display continue to move in the first direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, the decorative pattern special effects A to C will be explained using FIGS. 57 to 59. This decorative pattern special presentation is executed during the special pattern variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and, if it contains an instruction to execute a special decorative pattern effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative design special performance A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special effect A. The decorative pattern special performance A is a performance performed during one variation of the special design. In the decorative pattern special performance, as shown in FIG. 57(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production, the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the second decorative pattern group display area XBB, the pending icon XC1, the pending icon XC2, the pending icon XD1, the pending icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed. The character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three horizontally consecutive frames, and the decorative symbol XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative pattern XA is composed of a first decorative pattern XA1, a second decorative pattern XA2, and a third decorative pattern XA3. In the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the first decorative pattern XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative pattern XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative pattern XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The first decorative pattern XA1, the second decorative pattern XA2, and the third decorative pattern XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a loss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes two frames arranged in series horizontally, and a decorative symbol XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative pattern XB is composed of a fourth decorative pattern XB1 and a fifth decorative pattern XB2. In the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 is displayed in the left frame, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 is displayed in the right frame. The fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 each include a number as an identifier that can identify whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are vertically displayed immediately on the right side of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. Ru. The pending icon XC1 corresponds to the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The pending icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are vertically displayed immediately to the left of the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, that is, they are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The pending icon XD1 corresponds to the pending icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of pending icons XC1 is two, the number of pending icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in a circle, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in a diamond shape.
In the example of FIG. 57, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, indicating that the number of hold icons is four.

Further, in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, a first reach line LN1 is formed, and in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, a second reach line LN2 is formed. A jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is formed on each of these reach lines.

In the decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative pattern XA in the first decorative pattern group display area XAA and the decorative pattern XB in the second decorative pattern group display area XBB are each changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), decorative pattern stop performance 1 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 1, the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57(B), the first decorative pattern XA1 whose identifier is "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative pattern XA2, the third decorative pattern XA3, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(C), decorative pattern stop performance 2 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 2, the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57(C), the second decorative pattern XA2 whose identifier is "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative pattern XA3, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(D), decorative pattern stop performance 3 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 3, the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57(D), the third decorative pattern XA3 whose identifier is "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing. At this time, the outlier symbols "1", "7", and "5" are displayed on the first reach line LN1 by the decorative symbol XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(E), decorative pattern stop performance 4 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 of the decorative pattern XB are simultaneously stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57(E), a fourth decorative pattern XB1 whose identifier is "1" and a fifth decorative pattern XB2 whose identifier is "7" are stopped and displayed. At this time, outlier symbols "1" and "7" are displayed on the second reach line LN2 by the decorative symbol XB. Note that the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of the decorative pattern XB always stop at the decorative pattern having the same identifier, and the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of the decorative pattern The fifth decorative pattern XB2 of XB is configured to stop at a decorative pattern having the same identifier.

[Decorative design special performance B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special effect B. Decorative pattern special performance B is a performance performed during one variation of the special design. In the decorative pattern special performance B, as shown in FIG. 58(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production, the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the second decorative pattern group display area XBB, the pending icon XC1, the pending icon XC2, the pending icon XD1, the pending icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three horizontally consecutive frames, and the decorative symbol XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative pattern XA is composed of a first decorative pattern XA1, a second decorative pattern XA2, and a third decorative pattern XA3. In the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the first decorative pattern XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative pattern XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative pattern XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The first decorative pattern XA1, the second decorative pattern XA2, and the third decorative pattern XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a loss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes three frames arranged in succession laterally, and a decorative symbol XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative pattern XB is composed of a fourth decorative pattern XB1, a fifth decorative pattern XB2, and a sixth decorative pattern XB3. In the second decorative pattern group display area XBB, the fourth decorative pattern XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative pattern XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The fourth decorative pattern XB1, the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a loss.

The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are vertically displayed immediately on the right side of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. Ru. The pending icon XC1 corresponds to the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The pending icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are vertically displayed immediately to the left of the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, that is, they are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The pending icon XD1 corresponds to the pending icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of pending icons XC1 is two, the number of pending icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in a circle, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in a diamond shape.
In the example of FIG. 58, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, indicating that the number of hold icons is four.

Further, in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, a first reach line LN1 is formed, and in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, a second reach line LN2 is formed. A jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is formed on each of these reach lines.

In the decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative pattern XA in the first decorative pattern group display area XAA and the decorative pattern XB in the second decorative pattern group display area XBB are each changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(B), decorative pattern stop performance 1 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 1, the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58(B), the first decorative pattern XA1 whose identifier is "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative pattern XA2, the third decorative pattern XA3, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(C), decorative pattern stop performance 2 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 2, the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58(C), the second decorative pattern XA2 whose identifier is "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative pattern XA3, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(D), decorative pattern stop performance 3 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 3, the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58(D), the third decorative pattern XA3 whose identifier is "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing. At this time, the outlier symbols "1", "7", and "5" are displayed on the first reach line LN1 by the decorative symbol XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(E), decorative pattern stop performance 4 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 of the decorative pattern XB are simultaneously stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58(E), the fourth decorative pattern XB1 whose identifier is "1", the fifth decorative pattern XB2 whose identifier is "7", and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 whose identifier is "5" are stopped and displayed. has been done. At this time, outlier symbols "1", "7", and "5" are displayed on the second reach line LN2 by the decorative symbol XB. Note that the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of the decorative pattern XB always stop at the decorative pattern having the same identifier, and the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of the decorative pattern The fifth decorative pattern XB2 of XB is a decorative pattern that has the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 of the decorative pattern XB are decorative patterns that have the same identifier. It is configured to stop. That is, the manner in which the identifiers are stopped is the same in the decorative pattern XA and the decorative pattern XB.

[Decorative design special performance C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special performance C. The decorative pattern special performance C is a performance performed during one variation of the special design. In the decorative pattern special performance C, as shown in FIG. 59(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation production, the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the second decorative pattern group display area XBB, the pending icon XC1, the pending icon XC2, the pending icon XD1, the pending icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three horizontally consecutive frames, and the decorative symbol XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative pattern XA is composed of a first decorative pattern XA1, a second decorative pattern XA2, and a third decorative pattern XA3. In the first decorative pattern group display area XAA, the first decorative pattern XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative pattern XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative pattern XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The first decorative pattern XA1, the second decorative pattern XA2, and the third decorative pattern XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a loss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes three vertically consecutive frames, and a decorative symbol XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative pattern XB is composed of a fourth decorative pattern XB1, a fifth decorative pattern XB2, and a sixth decorative pattern XB3. In the second decorative pattern group display area XBB, the fourth decorative pattern XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative pattern XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The fourth decorative pattern XB1, the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a loss.

The pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are vertically displayed immediately on the right side of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the pending icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. Ru. The pending icon XC1 corresponds to the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The pending icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed horizontally and immediately below the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, that is, they are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The pending icon XD1 corresponds to the pending icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of pending icons XC1 is two, the number of pending icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in a circle, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in a diamond shape.
In the example of FIG. 59, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, indicating that the number of hold icons is four.

Further, in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, a first reach line LN1 is formed, and in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, a second reach line LN2 is formed. A jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is formed on each of these reach lines.

In the decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative pattern XA in the first decorative pattern group display area XAA and the decorative pattern XB in the second decorative pattern group display area XBB are each changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), decorative pattern stop performance 1 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 1, the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59(B), the first decorative pattern XA1 whose identifier is "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative pattern XA2, the third decorative pattern XA3, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), decorative pattern stop performance 2 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 2, the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59(C), the second decorative pattern XA2 whose identifier is "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative pattern XA3, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(D), decorative pattern stop performance 3 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 3, the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59(D), the third decorative pattern XA3 whose identifier is "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are changing. At this time, the outlier symbols "1", "7", and "5" are displayed on the first reach line LN1 by the decorative symbol XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), decorative pattern stop performance 4 is performed. In the decorative pattern stop performance 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 of the decorative pattern XB are simultaneously stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59(E), the fourth decorative pattern XB1 whose identifier is "1", the fifth decorative pattern XB2 whose identifier is "7", and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 whose identifier is "5" are stopped and displayed. has been done. At this time, outlier symbols "1", "7", and "5" are displayed on the second reach line LN2 by the decorative symbol XB. Note that the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of the decorative pattern XB always stop at the decorative pattern having the same identifier, and the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of the decorative pattern The fifth decorative pattern XB2 of XB is a decorative pattern that has the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 of the decorative pattern XB are decorative patterns that have the same identifier. It is configured to stop. That is, the manner in which the identifiers are stopped is the same in the decorative pattern XA and the decorative pattern XB.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern special performance, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon The icon XD1 may represent the number of pending icons using a method other than the number of pending icons (eg, a number).

In the above decorative pattern special performance, the pending icon XC1 is circular and the pending icon XD1 is diamond shaped, that is, the modes of the pending icons are different, but the mode is not limited to this and may be the same mode. For example, the hold icon XD1 may be circular. The hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 may be different in shape, color, coloring, etc.

In the above decorative pattern special performance, in decorative pattern stop performances 1 to 3, each decorative pattern of the decorative pattern XA (first decorative pattern XA1, second decorative pattern XA2, third decorative pattern XA3) is stopped and displayed at different times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each decorative pattern of the decorative pattern XA may be stopped and displayed at the same time. After each decorative pattern of the decorative pattern XA is stopped simultaneously, each decorative pattern of the decorative pattern XB is simultaneously stopped. In this way, a stop effect in which each decorative pattern of the decorative pattern XA stops simultaneously and then each decorative pattern of the decorative pattern XB simultaneously stops is also called a special simultaneous stop effect of decorative patterns.
In a predetermined situation, the decorative pattern special performance may be performed to perform a decorative pattern stop display performance, and in a situation different from the predetermined situation, a special simultaneous decorative pattern stop performance may be performed. For example, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned decorative symbol special performance is performed to perform the stop display performance of the decorative symbols, and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, the decorative symbol special performance is performed. A simultaneous stop effect may also be performed.

[Effect example]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern special performance, a decorative pattern stop performance 3 is performed to indicate whether it is a jackpot or not by stopping the decorative pattern XA including the decorative patterns XA1, XA2, and XA3, and then the decorative pattern stop performance 3 is performed. By stopping the decorative symbols XB including symbols XB1 and XB2, decorative symbol stop performance 4 is performed to indicate whether it is a jackpot or not. When the decorative symbol XA in decorative symbol stop performance 3 represents a jackpot, decorative symbol stop performance 4 is performed. The decorative pattern XB also represents a jackpot, and when the decorative pattern XA represents a loss, the decorative pattern XB also represents a loss. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the lottery result of whether or not it is a jackpot using the two decorative patterns XA and XB, and furthermore, the decorative patterns XA and XB are Since the same lottery result is announced for each, it is possible to emphasize the lottery result to the player without confusing the player, and the game is more convenient than when the lottery result is displayed only with the decorative symbol XA (or decorative symbol XB). It is possible to amplify people's interest in the lottery results. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern special performance, the decorative pattern XA has the first decorative pattern XA1, the second decorative pattern XA2, and the third decorative pattern XA3, and in the decorative pattern stop performance 3, the decorative pattern When XA stops, the first decorative pattern XA1 stops, then the second decorative pattern XA2 stops, and then the third decorative pattern XA3 stops. According to this configuration, it is possible to gradually disclose the lottery result as to whether it is a jackpot or not to the player using the decorative pattern XA, and it is possible to increase expectations for the lottery result. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern special performance A, the decorative pattern XB has the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and when the decorative pattern XB stops in the decorative pattern stop performance 4 , the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 stop simultaneously. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern XB differs from the decorative pattern XA in that the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 stop at the same time, so that the feeling of expectation gradually increases by stopping the decorative pattern XA. It can be raised to its climax by simultaneously stopping the decorative symbols XB. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern special performances B and C, the decorative pattern XB has a sixth decorative pattern XB3 in addition to the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the decorative pattern When the decorative pattern XB stops in the stop performance 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 stop simultaneously. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the peak of anticipation due to the simultaneous stop of the decorative symbols XB, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern special performances B and C, the decorative patterns included in the decorative pattern XA and the decorative pattern XB each have an identifier (for example, a number), and the decorative pattern XA and the decorative pattern In XB, it is possible to suggest a jackpot or a loss by a combination of identifiers of multiple decorative patterns, and the first decorative pattern XA1 in the decorative pattern XA is the same as the fourth decorative pattern XB1 in the decorative pattern XB. The second decorative pattern XA2 in the decorative pattern XA and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 in the decorative pattern XB are composed of the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern XA3 in the decorative pattern XA and the sixth decorative pattern XB in the decorative pattern It has the same identifier as the XB3. According to this configuration, since the corresponding decorative patterns XA and XB have the same identifier, the decorative patterns XA and XB can represent the same jackpot mode or miss mode, and the decorative pattern XA1 By having different stop timings between the game player and the decorative pattern XB, it is possible to provide the fun of notifying the same jackpot mode or miss mode depending on the time difference. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a display performance that indicates whether it is a jackpot or a loss by stopping a first symbol including a plurality of decorative symbols,
The second display performance is a display performance that indicates whether it is a jackpot or a loss by stopping the second symbol, which is a second symbol different from the first symbol and includes a plurality of decorative symbols,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and then the second display performance is performed, and when the first symbol in the first display performance represents a jackpot, the second display performance is performed. The second symbol in the display performance also represents a jackpot, and when the first symbol represents a loss, the second symbol also represents a loss,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
The first pattern includes the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern,
In the combination performance, when the first symbol stops in the first display performance, the first decorative symbol stops, then the second decorative symbol stops, and then the first decorative symbol stops. 3 decorative pattern stops,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The second pattern has a fourth decorative pattern and a fifth decorative pattern,
In the combination performance, when the second symbol stops in the second display performance, the fourth decorative symbol and the fifth decorative symbol stop simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
The second pattern further includes a sixth decorative pattern,
In the combination performance, when the second symbol stops in the second display performance, the fourth decorative symbol, the fifth decorative symbol, and the sixth decorative symbol stop simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
The decorative patterns included in the first pattern and the second pattern each have an identifier,
In the first symbol and the second symbol, it is possible to suggest a jackpot or a loss by a combination of identifiers of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The first decorative pattern in the first pattern and the fourth decorative pattern in the second pattern are configured with the same identifier, and the second decorative pattern in the first pattern and the second The fifth decorative pattern in the pattern is composed of the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern of the first pattern and the sixth decorative pattern of the second pattern are composed of the same identifier.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern alignment effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 60 to 62. This decorative pattern alignment performance is executed during the special pattern variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern alignment effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern alignment effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern alignment effect A. Decorative symbol arrangement performance A is a performance that is performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative pattern arrangement effect A, as shown in FIG. 60(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a jackpot or not. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when decorative patterns having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also referred to as a double-digit pattern. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the double-digit pattern, it becomes a missed pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), a left and right decorative pattern placement effect is performed. In this left-right decorative pattern placement effect, on the display screen 7a, a plurality of decorative patterns 8L are arranged in an area to the left from the center of the screen, and a plurality of decorative patterns 8R are arranged in an area to the right from the center of the screen. Ru. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "4" to number "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as first order). Further, the decorative patterns 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are lined up from the front side slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap. The decorative patterns 8R are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "1" to number "5" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as second order). Further, the decorative patterns 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are lined up from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap. The first order and the second order are permutations, but the starting identifiers (numbers) are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), decorative pattern selection performance 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern selection performance 1, an ally character CRA appears between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and a selection frame XB1 and a selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA displays the decorative pattern with the middle number "6" among the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L and the middle number "6" among the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R. It is located between the decorative pattern of "3". The selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are each rectangular frames, and their positions are manipulated by the ally character CRA. The ally character CRA randomly performs an operation of arranging the selection frame XB1 so that one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L fits within the frame, for the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L. In addition, the ally character CRA randomly arranges the selection frame XB2 so that one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R fits within the frame. Let's do it. As a result, the ally character CRA randomly selects one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L using the selection frame XB1, and selects one of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R. It is shown that the symbols are randomly selected using the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), decorative pattern selection performance 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern selection performance 2, the ally character CRA stops for a predetermined period of time in a state where the decorative pattern with the same number "4" is selected in the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed with the decorative pattern of the number "4" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative pattern of the number "4" selected in the selection frame XB2, and the button image BTNX and the ally The character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used to increase the chance, and the words "Super Hot" are displayed. The ally character CRA performs various movements to enliven the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to create a double-roll state to form a jackpot pattern.

[Decorative pattern alignment effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern alignment effect B. Decorative symbol alignment performance B is a performance that is performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative pattern arrangement performance B, as shown in FIG. 61(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a jackpot or not. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when decorative patterns having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also referred to as a double-digit pattern. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the double-digit pattern, it becomes a missed pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a left and right decorative pattern placement effect is performed. In this left-right decorative pattern placement effect, on the display screen 7a, a plurality of decorative patterns 8L are arranged in an area to the left from the center of the screen, and a plurality of decorative patterns 8R are arranged in an area to the right from the center of the screen. Ru. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "4" to number "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as first order). Further, the decorative patterns 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are lined up from the front side slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap. The decorative patterns 8R are arranged such that five decorative patterns from number "4" to number "8" are arranged in order of increasing numbers (hereinafter also referred to as third order). Further, the decorative patterns 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are lined up from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap. The first order is a permutation and the third order is a reverse order. The first order and the third order have different starting identifiers (numbers).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), decorative pattern selection performance 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern selection performance 1, an ally character CRA appears between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and selection frames XB1 and selection frames XB2 are displayed. In this case, the ally character CRA is between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern with the number "4" which is the closest among the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L, It appears between the decorative pattern with the number "8" at the front of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R, and then moves toward the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a). The ally character CRA decorates the number "4" which is the closest one of the five decorative symbols in the decorative pattern 8L, and the number "8" which is the closest one among the five decorative symbols in the decorative pattern 8R. When appearing between the symbols, the selection frame XB1 selects the decorative symbol with the number "4" at the front of the decorative symbol 8L, and the selection frame XB2 selects the decorative symbol with the number "8" at the forefront of the decorative symbol 8R. Select a decorative pattern. Then, as the ally character CRA moves to the depth side (from the bottom to the top on the display screen 7a), the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 select the decorative pattern at the position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of FIG. 61(C), the ally character CRA is located between the decorative pattern with the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern with the number "7" in the decorative pattern 8R, so the selection frame XB1 represents the state in which the decorative pattern with the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8L is selected, and the selection frame XB2 represents the state in which the decorative pattern with the number "7" in the decorative pattern 8R is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), decorative pattern selection performance 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern selection performance 2, the ally character CRA moves and stops for a predetermined time with the decorative pattern of the same number "6" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed with the decorative pattern of the number "6" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative pattern of the number "6" selected in the selection frame XB2, and the button image BTNX and the ally The character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used to increase the chance, and the words "Super Hot" are displayed. The ally character CRA performs various movements to enliven the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to create a double-roll state to form a jackpot pattern.

[Decorative pattern alignment production C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern alignment effect C. The decorative pattern arrangement performance C is a performance performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative pattern arrangement performance C, as shown in FIG. 62(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a jackpot or not. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when decorative patterns having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also referred to as a double-digit pattern. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the double-digit pattern, it becomes a missed pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a left and right decorative pattern placement effect is performed. In this left-right decorative pattern placement effect, on the display screen 7a, a plurality of decorative patterns 8L are arranged in an area to the left from the center of the screen, and a plurality of decorative patterns 8R are arranged in an area to the right from the center of the screen. Ru. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged such that five decorative patterns of the numbers "4", "5", "5", "5", and "8" are lined up in descending numerical order (hereinafter also referred to as the fourth order). Further, the decorative patterns 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are lined up from the front side slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap. The decorative patterns 8R are arranged such that five decorative patterns of numbers "4", "5", "5", "5", and "8" are arranged in descending order of numbers (hereinafter also referred to as fifth order). Further, the decorative patterns 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative patterns are lined up from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap. In this way, in the arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, there are sections in which the same numbers are consecutively arranged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), decorative pattern selection performance 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern selection performance 1, an ally character CRA appears between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and selection frames XB1 and selection frames XB2 are displayed. In this case, the ally character CRA is between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern with the number "4" which is the closest among the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8L, It appears between the decorative pattern with the number "8" at the front of the five decorative patterns of the decorative pattern 8R, and then moves toward the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a). The ally character CRA decorates the number "4" which is the closest one of the five decorative symbols in the decorative pattern 8L, and the number "8" which is the closest one among the five decorative symbols in the decorative pattern 8R. When appearing between the symbols, the selection frame XB1 selects the decorative symbol with the number "4" at the front of the decorative symbol 8L, and the selection frame XB2 selects the decorative symbol with the number "8" at the forefront of the decorative symbol 8R. Select a decorative pattern. Then, as the ally character CRA moves to the depth side (from the bottom to the top on the display screen 7a), the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 select the decorative pattern at the position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of FIG. 62(C), the ally character CRA is located between the decorative pattern with the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern with the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8R, so the selection frame XB1 represents the state in which the decorative pattern with the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8L is selected, and the selection frame XB2 represents the state in which the decorative pattern with the number "5" in the decorative pattern 8R is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), decorative pattern selection performance 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern selection performance 2, the ally character CRA moves and stops for a predetermined time with the decorative pattern of the same number "5" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed with the decorative pattern of the number "5" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative pattern of the number "5" selected in the selection frame XB2, and the button image BTNX and the ally The character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used to increase the chance, and the words "Super Hot" are displayed. The ally character CRA performs various movements to enliven the performance. In this way, in the decorative pattern selection performance of the decorative pattern arrangement performance C, the decorative symbols selected in the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are more likely to have the same number than in the decorative pattern selection performance of the decorative pattern arrangement performance B, i.e. , the structure is such that it is easy to reach a reach state. This functions as a chance increase, and the decorative symbol arrangement performance C has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the decorative symbol arrangement performance B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to create a double-roll state to form a jackpot pattern.

[Modified example]
In the decorative symbol arrangement effects B and C described above, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 also move as the ally character CRA moves, and the decorative symbols to be selected change. Instead of the CRA, a configuration may be adopted in which the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 also move as a predetermined object or a predetermined image moves, and the decorative pattern to be selected changes.
In addition, in the decorative pattern alignment effects B and C, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, but is not limited to this. It may be moved behind the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, or it may be moved beside the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, as the ally character CRA moves, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 also move.

In the decorative pattern arrangement performance described above, the arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement performance may have a random arrangement of numbers. Further, in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement performance, the number of each of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R may not be five, but may be six or more, for example. Furthermore, in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement performance, if each of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are decorative patterns with the same number, it becomes a premium performance, that is, it may be a guaranteed jackpot performance that always hits the jackpot.

In the decorative pattern alignment effects B and C, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and in the decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops is selected by the selection frame XB1. In the selected decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stopped was selected by the selection frame XB2, and when the selected decorative pattern had the same number, the reach state was established. The invention is not limited to this, and the ally character CRA moves between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and in the decorative pattern 8L, a decorative pattern at a different position from the position where the ally character CRA stopped is selected by the selection frame XB1, In the decorative symbols 8L, a decorative symbol corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops may be selected by the selection frame XB2, and a ready-to-reach state may be established when the selected decorative symbols have the same number.

[Effect example]
In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment performance, a left and right decorative pattern arrangement performance is performed in which a decorative pattern 8L having a plurality of decorative patterns and a decorative pattern 8R having a plurality of decorative patterns are arranged, and then the decorative pattern 8L is arranged. Decorative pattern selection performances 1 and 2 are performed in which a predetermined decorative pattern among them and a predetermined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern 8R are selected at the same time. According to this configuration, the two groups of decorative symbols are arranged in a visible manner, and predetermined decorative symbols are simultaneously selected from them, so that the process of reaching the reach can be visually shown to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment performance, when the decorative pattern selected from the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern selected from the decorative pattern 8R are the same in the decorative pattern selection performances 1 and 2 (in other words, the same If the player has an identifier), the player is in a reach state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually show off the ready-to-win state to the player, and it is possible to improve expectations for a jackpot in the ready-to-win performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative pattern arrangement performance A, in the decorative pattern selection performances 1 and 2, the decorative patterns 8L are arranged in order from the decorative pattern with the identifier "4" to the decorative pattern with the identifier "8". The decorative patterns 8R are arranged in a second order in which the decorative patterns from the decorative pattern with the identifier "1" to the decorative pattern with the identifier "5" are arranged in order. According to this configuration, predetermined decorative symbols are selected at the same time from two groups of decorative symbols having different orders of decorative symbols, so that the process of reaching reach can be more visually appealing to the player. can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative pattern arrangement performance B, in the decorative pattern selection performances 1 and 2, the decorative symbols 8L are arranged in order from the decorative symbol with the identifier "4" to the decorative symbol with the identifier "8". The decorative patterns 8R are arranged in a third order in which the decorative patterns from the decorative pattern with the identifier "8" to the decorative pattern with the identifier "4" are arranged in order. According to this configuration, predetermined decorative symbols are simultaneously selected from two groups of decorative symbols in which the order of the decorative symbols is reversed, so that the process of reaching the reach can be more visually appealing to the player. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative pattern alignment performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are respectively arranged from the front direction to the depth direction of the display screen 7a in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement performance. According to this configuration, the two decorative pattern groups (decorative pattern 8L, decorative pattern 8R) can be expressed three-dimensionally, and the decorative pattern alignment performance can be acrobatic. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect that arranges a first decorative pattern group having a plurality of decorative patterns and a second decorative pattern group having a plurality of decorative patterns,
The second display effect is a display effect that simultaneously selects a decorative pattern in the first decorative pattern group and a decorative pattern in the second decorative pattern group,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the second display performance, if the decorative pattern selected from the first decorative pattern group and the decorative pattern selected from the second decorative pattern group are the same, a ready-to-win state is reached;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
In the first display performance, the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group are arranged in a first order, and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group are arranged in a first order. arranged and arranged in a different second order;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the first display performance, the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group are arranged in the first order, and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group are arranged in the first order. are arranged and arranged in the second order which is the reverse order,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the first display performance, the first decorative pattern group and the second decorative pattern group are each arranged from the front direction to the depth direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Temporary stop symbol movement effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 63 to 65. This temporary stop symbol moving performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a temporary stop symbol movement performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The temporary stop symbol movement performance C will be explained assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the fluctuation, they are displayed moving in a specific direction (fluctuating display) at least when the fluctuation is started and when the fluctuation is stopped. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left presentation pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. In particular, the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R move in a specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and then stop. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Further, the pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement performance is a performance in which temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L and 8R are moved and displayed in the direction shown by arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction shown by arrow Y. Here, a state in which the "1" symbol of the left performance symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right performance symbol 8R are displayed moving toward the lower right direction is shown. In addition, here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol, which are new symbols different from the temporarily stopped "1" symbol of the left performance symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right performance symbol 8R, are displayed in the frame on the display device 7a. I'm in. The "5" symbol and the "6" symbol that have entered the frame are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, similar to the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(D) to (F), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and the performance symbols that have entered the frame are moved and displayed and then framed out.

In FIG. 63(D), a part of the "1" symbol and "2" symbol, which are temporarily stopped production symbols 8L and 8R, are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z and are out of frame. . At this time, the new symbols "5" symbol and "6" symbol are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In FIG. 63(E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z. This showed that part of the "6" symbol was out of frame. Also, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbol "4" and "9" enter the frame and similarly move in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Is displayed.

In Figure 63(F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are completely out of frame, and the new symbols "4" and "9" are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. has been done. Here, a part of the "9" symbol is shown to be out of frame. After this, the "4" symbol will frame out following the "9" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop in a reach mode. The ready-to-reach mode is generally a mode in which the left and right production symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the production symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R temporarily stop at the "3" symbol. Note that the direction of variation in this case is a specific direction indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the fluctuation, they are displayed moving in a specific direction (fluctuating display) at least when the fluctuation is started and when the fluctuation is stopped. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left presentation pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. In particular, the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R move in a specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and then stop. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is a "NEXT" pattern. The "NEXT" symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol that foretells the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect. Further, the pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement performance is a performance in which temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L and 8R are moved and displayed in the direction shown by arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction shown by arrow Y. Here, a state in which the "1" symbol of the left performance symbol 8L and the "NEXT" symbol of the right performance symbol 8R are displayed moving toward the lower right direction is shown. In addition, here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol, which are new symbols different from the temporarily stopped "1" symbol of the left performance symbol 8L and the "NEXT" symbol of the right performance symbol 8R, are displayed in the frame on the display device 7a. I'm in. The "5" symbol and the "6" symbol that have entered the frame are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, similar to the "1" symbol and the "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64(D) to 64(F), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and the performance symbols that have entered the frame are moved and displayed and then framed out.

In FIG. 64(D), a part of the "1" symbol and "NEXT" symbol, which are temporarily stopped production symbols 8L and 8R, are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z and are out of frame. . At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In FIG. 64(E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z. This showed that part of the "6" symbol was out of frame. Further, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbol "NEXT" large symbol enters the frame and is similarly displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. This "NEXT" large symbol is a horizontally long symbol composed of a different image from the temporarily stopped "NEXT" symbol. The "NEXT" large symbol is also a pseudo-continuous pattern that foretells the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect.

In FIG. 64(F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are out of frame, and the new "NEXT" large symbol is displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Here, a part of the large "NEXT" design is shown out of frame. After this, the "NEXT" large pattern will completely go out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation performance is a performance in which the temporarily stopped performance symbols start changing again, and is a performance included in the pseudo continuous performance. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the variation, they are displayed moving in a specific direction (variation display) at least when the variation is started and when the variation is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left presentation symbol 8L, middle presentation symbol 8C, and right presentation symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

Although it is decided that the re-fluctuation effect will be executed as shown in FIG. 64(G), after the frame-out effect, the effect will be continued assuming that the re-fluctuation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have already been re-fluctuated. A pseudo-continuous performance like this is also possible. In this case, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the reach formation effect may be executed following the frame-out effect without performing the re-fluctuation effect.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect C. Here, it is assumed that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.
First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, on the display screen 7a, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Although the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the fluctuation, they are displayed moving in a specific direction (fluctuating display) at least when the fluctuation is started and when the fluctuation is stopped. On the display screen 7b, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The symbol temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left presentation pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. In particular, the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R move in a specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and then stop. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Further, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed on the display screen 7b at the time of the start of the fluctuation are no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement performance is a performance in which temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L and 8R are moved and displayed in the direction shown by arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction shown by arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol of the left presentation symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right presentation symbol 8R are moved and displayed in the lower right direction, a part of the "1" symbol is out of frame, and the "2" symbol is It is displayed across display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the "2" symbol is framed out of the display screen 7a and framed into another display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, a part of the "2" symbol is displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. In addition, here, the "5" and "6" symbols, which are new symbols different from the "1" symbol of the temporarily stopped left production symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right production symbol 8R, are in the frame. . The "5" symbol and the "6" symbol that have entered the frame are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, similar to the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65(D) to (F), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and the performance symbols that have entered the frame are moved and displayed and then framed out.

In FIG. 65(D), the "1" symbol, which is the temporary stopped production symbol 8L, goes out of the frame, and the "2" symbol moves in the direction shown by the arrow Z, and a part of the "2" symbol goes out of the frame. ing. At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In FIG. 65(E), the new symbols "5" symbol and "6" symbol are further moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z. As a result, a part of the "5" symbol and a part of the "6" symbol are out of frame. In particular, a part of the "6" symbol is framed out of the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, a part of the "6" symbol is displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Also, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbol "4" and "9" enter the frame and similarly move in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Is displayed.

In Figure 65(F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are completely out of frame, and the new symbols "4" and "9" are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. has been done. Here, a part of the "4" symbol and a part of the "9" symbol are out of frame. In particular, a part of the "9" symbol is framed out of the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, a part of the "9" symbol is displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. After this, the "4" symbol and the "9" symbol are completely out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), a reach formation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop in a reach mode. The ready-to-reach mode is generally a mode in which the left and right production symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the production symbols) are the same. Here, a state where both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol is shown. Note that the direction of variation in this case is a specific direction indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left presentation symbol 8L, middle presentation symbol 8C, and right presentation symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the temporary stop symbol movement effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the performance symbols 8L, 8R among the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, the performance symbols 8L, 8R are different from the direction of fluctuation (the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y). It is displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z (Fig. 63 (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 64 (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 65 (C) (D) ( E) (F)). According to this configuration, since the temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L and 8R move in a direction different from the direction of movement (specific direction), it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, fluctuation start effect (Fig. 63 (A), Fig. 64 (A), Fig. 65 (A)), pattern temporary stop effect (Fig. 63 (B), Fig. 64 (B), Fig. 65 (B)), reach The formation effect (Fig. 63 (G), Fig. 65 (G)) and the re-fluctuation effect (Fig. 64 (G)) correspond to the "symbol variation effect", and the symbol movement effect (Fig. 63 (C), Fig. 64 ( C), Fig. 65(C)), frame-out effect (Fig. 63(D) to (F), Fig. 64(D) to (F), Fig. 65(D) to (F)) is "Symbol moving display effect" ”.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, new symbols ("5" symbol, "6" symbol, "4" symbol, "9" symbol, "NEXT" large 63(C)(E), FIG. 64(C)(E), FIG. 65(C)(E)). According to this configuration, a new symbol different from the temporarily stopped symbol comes into the frame, which can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the new symbols (the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, the "4" symbol, the "9" symbol, and the "NEXT" large symbol) are framed in the display screen 7a, a temporary stop is made. It is displayed moving in the same direction as the symbol (the direction indicated by arrow Z) (FIGS. 63(C) to (F), FIGS. 64(C) to (F), and FIGS. 65(C) to (F)). According to this configuration, the new symbols that have entered the frame are also moved and displayed in the same direction as the temporarily stopped symbols, so the moving display becomes powerful and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance symbols 8L and 8R, which are temporary stop symbols, and new symbols ("5" symbol, "6" symbol, "4" symbol, "9" symbol, "NEXT" large symbol) are used. ) is moved and displayed and then frames out from the display screen 7a (7b) (Fig. 64(D) to (F), Fig. 64(D) to (F), Fig. 65(D) to (F)) . According to this configuration, after the moving display, the temporarily stopped symbols and the new symbols disappear off the screen, so by moving and displaying them at high speed, for example, it becomes a powerful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the "2" symbol which is a temporary stop symbol, a part of a "6" symbol which is a new symbol, and a part of a "9" symbol are frame-out from the display screen 7a. , has entered the frame on the display screen 7b (FIGS. 65(C), (E), and (F)). According to this configuration, the effect of moving the symbols across the display screens 7a and 7b becomes even more impressive, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the "2" symbol framed in the display screen 7b, a part of the "6" symbol which is a new symbol, and a part of the "9" symbol are also displayed on the display screen 7b. It is displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. According to this configuration, the movement effect of the symbols across the display screens 7a and 7b becomes even more powerful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol, which foretells the execution of the pseudo continuous performance, is temporarily stopped and moved as the performance pattern 8R (FIGS. 64(B) to 64(D)). In addition, a large "NEXT" symbol that foretells the execution of a pseudo-sequence effect as a new symbol is moved and displayed and goes out of frame (FIGS. 64(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, for example, the preview of the execution of the pseudo-series performance becomes powerful, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the "NEXT" symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) as a temporary stop symbol is moved and displayed and out of frame (FIGS. 64(B) to (D)), the "NEXT" symbol as a new symbol is displayed as a new symbol. ” The large pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern) is moved and displayed and moves in and out of the frame (FIGS. 64(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, since the large ``NEXT'' symbol enters the frame after the ``NEXT'' symbol goes out of frame, the preview of the pseudo-continuous performance becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the temporary stop symbol movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol and the "NEXT" large symbol are used as symbols to foretell the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance, but for example, the "NEXT" large symbol may be used as a symbol to notify that a pseudo-continuous performance has been executed. It is possible that Specifically, instead of executing the re-fluctuation effect of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the effect in which the temporarily stopped effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again), the "NEXT" large pattern is brought into the frame and the frame is moved. It is like letting it go out.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the configuration includes the display screens 7a and 7b, but the configuration may include three or more display screens. In this case, if the three display screens are arranged in a straight line and the temporarily stopped symbols and new symbols are moved in the direction of the display screens, the moving display of the temporarily stopped symbols and new symbols will be more impressive. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has been described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the sub display screen 64 may be used to perform similar effects. By using the sub-display screen 64, the moving display of temporarily stopped symbols and new symbols becomes more powerful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and are moved and displayed in a direction (direction shown by arrow Z) different from the direction of variation (direction shown by arrow Y). Ta. In this regard, the performance symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed while moving are not particularly limited. For example, the left effect pattern 8L and the middle effect pattern 8C may be temporarily stopped and displayed while moving, or the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Alternatively, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right may be temporarily stopped and displayed in a moving manner.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the direction in which the temporarily stopped symbols and new symbols are moved and displayed is the lower right direction (direction indicated by arrow Z) of the display screen 7a (7b). On the other hand, the direction of moving display is not particularly limited. For example, when the direction of change is the up and down direction, the display may be moved in the left and right directions.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are displayed moving in the same direction (the direction indicated by arrow Z). On the other hand, the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol may be displayed moving in different directions.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are displayed moving at the same speed. On the other hand, the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol may be displayed moving at different speeds.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images,
A gaming machine capable of executing a symbol variation effect in which a plurality of symbol rows vary in a specific direction on the display screen,
After the symbols in a predetermined row of the plurality of symbol rows are temporarily stopped, a symbol movement display effect is executed in which the temporarily stopped symbols, which are the temporarily stopped symbols in the predetermined row, are moved and displayed in a direction different from the specific direction. It is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the symbol movement display performance, a new symbol different from the temporarily stopped symbol is framed on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the symbol movement display performance, after the new symbol is framed on the display screen, the new symbol is displayed moving in the same direction as the temporarily stopped symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2 or aspect A5-3,
The temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are moved and displayed on the display screen, and then frame out from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
The temporary stop symbol and the new symbol frame out from the display screen and then frame into another display screen different from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5,
The temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are moved and displayed on the separate display screen after being framed in the separate display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
At least one of the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol includes a pseudo-continuous symbol related to the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-7,
After the pseudo continuous pattern as the temporary stop pattern frames out from the display screen, the pseudo continuous pattern as the new pattern frames in on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display effects A to C through the transparent area will be explained below using FIGS. 66 to 68. In FIGS. 66 to 68, the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. In addition, when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are activated, the fluctuating effects of the plurality of decorative patterns ( The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable When the accessory 15 is activated during a temporary stop display with multiple decorative symbols arranged in the same pattern, the number of winnings that exist is greater than when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated. Among these types, it is suggested to the player that there is a higher expectation that the winning result will give the player a profit. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15.

This variable display performance through the transparent area is performed after starting the variable display (fluctuating display) of a plurality of decorative symbols and before ending (stop display) (that is, during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols) the image display device 7. The display screen 7a is darkened to make a part of at least one decorative pattern or a part of each of at least two decorative patterns among the plurality of decorative patterns visible together with the background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. It is possible to perform a fluctuating display effect. In other words, the area other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape is darkened, and only through this transparent area, at least a part of the decorative pattern (part of one decorative pattern or two decorative patterns) that is being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to perform a variable display effect in which each part of the symbol is made visible. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute a variable display effect through a transparent area is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute a variable display effect through a transparent area is included, the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 The position of the light and the mode of light emission may be changed. The fluctuating display performance through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead performances, but whether or not the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 executes the fluctuating display performance through the transparent area during the performance. is decided by lottery.

In addition, various background images for the variation presentation (variation display) of decorative patterns include, for example, background images such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an ocean floor image, and an underground image. These various background images may be still images or moving images. Here, the background image is an underground image of the video.

Here, first, a variable display effect A through a transparent area will be explained, followed by a variable display effect B through a transparent area, and a variable display effect C through a transparent area.

[Fluctuating display effect A through transparent area]
First, the variable display effect A through the transparent area will be explained with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the variable display effect A through the transparent area. The variable display performance A through the transparent area is performed on the image display device 7 after starting the variable display (fluctuating display) of a plurality of decorative symbols and before ending (stop display) (that is, during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols). It is possible to perform a variable display effect in which the display screen 7a is darkened and at least a part of a plurality of decorative patterns is made visible together with a background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. be. In other words, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the area other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape is darkened, and only through this transparent area, a part of at least one decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to perform a variable display effect that makes it visible.

The variable display performance A through the transparent area in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the "right-handed" image does not change at all and can be visually recognized. In addition, if the image "Right-handed hit" becomes an eyesore in the various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "Right-handed hit" is started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stationary display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode in which it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low to downward, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed.Furthermore, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variation area (the opaque small size that is the content displayed in the sub-variation area) (The display mode of the left decorative pattern, the display mode of the small opaque middle decorative pattern, and the display mode of the small opaque right decorative pattern) can be visually recognized without any change. A background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that in the sub-variation area, an opaque small left decorative pattern, a small opaque middle decorative pattern, Only the variation effect (variation display) of the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even when the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the expiry of the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 66(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special symbol reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the fluctuation areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, other effect images is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. Furthermore, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd do not change at all and can be visually recognized. It is now possible to do so.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from now on.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a (that is, the frontmost side). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in the variable display effect A through the transparent area. In addition, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the color of the number of the first special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20) Blue numbers) and the color of the number of second special symbols reserved (red numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 do not change at all and can be visually recognized.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2.The number of reserved special drawings (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that they do not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation level is high, and the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation level of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation level of winning.

Next, to briefly explain the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, the second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, and has character figures (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ") is formed three-dimensionally, and has a character area 15a in which a character figure is formed, and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, there are a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that cause the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) that are capable of emitting multicolor light that causes the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A decorative board (not shown) having a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) that can emit multicolor light and mounted on the front surface thereof is accommodated. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the front side of the decorative board. In other words, the front side of the decorative board is the LED mounting surface. On the back side of this decorative board (the surface opposite to the front side of the decorative board), there is a dedicated LED drive IC (not shown) for controlling the gradation of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs. ), a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), and a connector (not shown) are mounted. The LED driving IC, resistor, capacitor, and connector are also surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the back side of the decorative board. In other words, the back side of the decorative board is a non-LED mounting surface. The LED drive IC is controlled by a control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs light up in gradation (lighting, flashing, gradation) and emit light, thereby controlling the character area. 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner, and the rectangular area 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner.

The second movable accessory 15 is able to stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a during normal times (first mode), and remains stationary at the retracted position (home position). From this state, it is possible to move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployment position) (second mode). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the second movable accessory 15 starts operating from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can indicate to the player that the expectation of winning is high. In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily recognized visually.

As shown in FIG. 66(A), when the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is finished, the left The decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. It is in a state where it disappears from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern ends. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. Note that when the power to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. is lit white. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 is normally in a state where the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow, and a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in white. .

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow light state and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory object 15 is maintained in a white light state. As shown in 66(B), a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns is started. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd started moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and was placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. This brings the three pending icons into stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and changes at high speed, the variable display effect A through the transparent area is started, and in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, As the brightly displayed state gradually changes to the darkly displayed state, a transparent closed specific area in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C) is displayed as a planar and circular colorless area. This is a display mode in which a transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, gradually appears. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc clearly shines from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect A through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the second movable While the character area 15a of the accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it is lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from a state in which it is lit in white to a state in which it is lit in blue. . At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. In other words, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the brightness is maintained at the same level as at the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern. In other words, when the variable display effect A through the transparent area is started, the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker as the background image except for the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a becomes darkened. .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(D), when the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) is moved to the inside of the transparent area HR. The state becomes such that it can be visually recognized through the region HRa, and the medium decorative pattern 8C that moves at high speed in front of the background image THG1 can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which move at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a blue lighting state, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the same as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

When the display screen 7a remains darkened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the medium decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuates at high speed, decelerates and changes from a translucent state to a translucent state. A part of the medium decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "2", the central part and the upper part can be seen gradually, and the number The lower part of the number "3" following "2" is visible).

Note that even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd. There is no change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern and it can be visually recognized. There is no change in the color of the number of first special drawings held based on the ball entering (blue numbers) or the color of the number of second special drawings holding based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (red numbers). It can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the image "right-handed hit". As mentioned above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. , the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged so that they are the closest to the front, that is, the background image THG1 is used as a background image. On the front side are a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a hold icon 9B, a hold display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second This is because the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and just before a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is changed from the darkened state to the background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display mode is such that the blue glow at the boundary line HRc shines indistinctly from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. It is blue, which is the same color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

From the state where the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image, and at the same time, it appears in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C). When the displayed transparent area HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), the middle Decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before being temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(F), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) returns to the state where it is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the transparent region HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1." Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 comes to rest at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in blue to the original white lighting state. It is designed to change depending on the state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is in a white-lit state, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(G), when the movement starts toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image. (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue. , the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. As a result, the two pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(H), a variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and changes at high speed, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display mode gradually changes from bright to dark. At the same time, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent closed specific region near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L). This is the display mode that appears. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 66(C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc clearly shines from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. In other words, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in red.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the brightness is maintained at the same level as at the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern. In other words, the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a becomes dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(I), when the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) is moved to the inside of the transparent area HR. The left decorative pattern 8L, which moves at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be visually recognized through the region HRa, and the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) cannot be visually recognized. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, which move at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is kept lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the same as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the left decorative pattern 8L, which changes at high speed, decelerates and changes from its translucent state to A part of the left decorative pattern 8L that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "2", the center part and the upper part can be seen gradually, and the number The lower part of the number "3" following "2" is visible).

Note that even if the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker as a background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd will change as described above. There is no change at all in the display mode of the small decorative pattern and it is now visible. The color of the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the ball (blue numbers) and the color of the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (red number) It is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change at all, and it is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change in the display mode of the "right-handed hit" image. As mentioned above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. , the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged so that they are the closest to the front, that is, the background image THG1 is used as a background image. On the front side are a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a hold icon 9B, a hold display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second This is because the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(J), the display screen 7a is darkened, and just before a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is changed from the darkened state to the background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display mode is such that the red glow at the boundary line HRc shines indistinctly from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. It is red, which is the same color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in red continues.

From the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image, and the area near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L) ), when the display mode changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2") , middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9"), right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") '') has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before being temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(K), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) returns to the state where it is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the transparent region HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2." Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 comes to rest at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in red to the original white lighting state. It is designed to change depending on the state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is in a white-lit state, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state. As a result, the variable display performance A through the transparent area, which is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), ends.

After the variable display effect A through the transparent area is completed, as shown in FIG. When the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 starts to move toward the target object, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow while the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a. While the rectangular area 15b remains illuminated in white, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position. As a result, one pending icon is kept in stock.

Variation (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns is started, and then, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the decoration will be out of alignment. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the symbols ends, if the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are all the same and are temporarily stopped and displayed, it becomes a hit. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols ends, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts.

In this way, the variable display performance A through the transparent area is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), and in FIGS. 66(C) to 66(E), A transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the border of the transparent region HR appears. The display mode was such that the line HRc glowed in red and emitted light. This means that in the variable display performance A through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless transparent area with a planar shape as a transparent closed specific area, is expected to hit in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because the degree is set in advance to be high. As a result, as the variable display effect A progresses through the transparent area, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from a circular shape to a triangular shape, giving the player a sense of expectation of winning. , it is possible to contribute to reducing monotony caused by variations in decorative patterns.

Furthermore, regarding the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15, the winning order is white (normally lit color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color), and rainbow color (rainbow color (strong jackpot)). The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is highly expected and has been set in advance and is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color). This is because the expectation of winning is high and is preset in the following order: ) and rainbow color (high probability of jackpot). As a result, as the variable display effect A progresses through the transparent area, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from blue to red, giving the player a sense of expectation of winning. This can contribute to reducing monotony caused by variations in symbols.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), and in FIGS. 66(C) to 66(E), the transparent area A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a closed specific region, and is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. ), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and is stationary at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a ( The display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red, which is the same color as that of the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 maintained in the first mode). In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the rectangular area of the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the second movable accessory 15b lights up, even if the second movable accessory 15 has not started moving, the second movable accessory 15 It is possible to provide the player with a winning expectation that is commensurate with (corresponding to) the winning expectation given to the operation of the player, and can contribute to providing a sense of expectation regarding the variable display.

In addition, in the variable display performance A through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), and in FIGS. 66(C) to 66(E), the transparent area While the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a closed specific region, appeared in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C), FIG. 66(H) to FIG. 66(J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is located near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, the left decorative pattern 8L fluctuation region). This is because the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect A through the transparent area during the effect, so execute the variable display effect A through the transparent area. The position where the transparent region HR appears at this time is also determined to be a random position. For this reason, there is no relationship between the position where the transparent region HR appears and the expectation of winning. However, in this embodiment, since the position where the transparent region HR appears can be set to a random position, the player can find out the expected winning degree for the position where the transparent region HR appears based on his or her own ideas. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by variations in decorative patterns.

Further, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, as described above, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow as the normal state, and the second movable accessory 15 rectangular areas 15b are illuminated in white. In the variable display effect A through the transparent area, although it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), the second variable display in FIGS. The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the white lighting state to the blue lighting state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the blue lighting state to the original white lighting state. 66(G) to FIG. 66(K), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in red, and then the second The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in red to the original state where it lights up in white. The fluctuating display performance A through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead performances, but the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the fluctuating display performance through the transparent area during the performance. The decision is made by lottery. In other words, since the variable display effect A through the transparent area is actually performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K) by only one lottery, it appears as if the decorative pattern For each variation, a variable display performance A can be performed through the transparent area as if determined by lottery by the performance control microcomputer 91. This allows the player to feel as if there are multiple variations to the variable display performance A through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 66(C) to 66(E), first, a colorless transparent area having a planar shape and a circular shape is used as a transparent closed specific area. 66(B) to 66(B) to FIG. 66(B). In 66(K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining the planar and circular shape.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIG. Although the color changes from blue, for example, it may change from one of red, green, and purple. In FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), first, the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is changed from blue to other colors multiple times. (for example, blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.), or in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), transparent While maintaining the color of the region HR as yellow (gold color) or rainbow color (rich jackpot), you can change the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a transparent closed specific region (for example, circular shape, triangle, square, star, circle, triangle, square, circle, triangle, triangle, square, star, triangle, square, etc.) , maintain the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a specific closed transparent region (for example, maintain a circular shape, maintain a triangular shape, maintain a square shape, maintain a star shape). You can.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, although it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), it is performed as one effect of the so-called pre-read effect. Instead, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display performance A through the transparent area during the performance. However, the variable display effect A through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the pre-read effects. In this case, since the variable display effect A through the transparent area was performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), The shape and color of the pending icon 9B to be placed as a pre-reading result is actually a blue spherical pending icon 9B as a pre-reading result, which matches (corresponds to) the expectation level of the blue spherical pending icon 9B. By performing the variable display effect A through the transparent area, which is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd is displayed. , a white spherical hold icon 9B may be used.

In addition, in the variable display performance A through the transparent area in this embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in the sub variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a. There was a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display). However, the player misunderstood the numbers formed by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern as a countdown started by the variable display effect A through the transparent area, and this countdown resulted in a win. Since there is a possibility that the player will expect a highly anticipated performance to be executed subsequently, the sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R to create a small size. The left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern may be variably produced (variably displayed).

In addition, in the variable display performance A through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special symbols held (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 and the number of the first special symbols held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21 The number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls (red numbers) was placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and was always displayed. However, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbols pending based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (Red numbers), the player misunderstands that it is a countdown that starts with the variable display effect A through the transparent area, and the player expects that this countdown will cause a performance with a high expectation of winning to be executed afterwards. Therefore, the number of first special symbols on hold (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and the second special chart based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The number of pending items (red numbers) may be displayed at all times by being placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 66(C) to 66(E), a colorless transparent area having a planar shape and a circular shape is used as a transparent closed specific area. When the transparent region HR appears at the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. In addition, in FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a flat and triangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is located near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a ( In other words, when it appears in the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the transparent area HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the display mode is such that the transparent region HR repeatedly moves up and down in small steps (vertical vibration) or moves left and right in small steps (horizontal vibration) centering on the position where the transparent region HR appears. ), a display mode that repeatedly rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode that combines these. In this way, since the area that becomes visible through the transparent area HR changes, it is possible to increase the variations in the presentation by the transparent area HR, and contributes to reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern. be able to.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, for example, in FIGS. 66(C) to 66(E), the transparent closed specific area is colorless and transparent which has a planar shape and a circular shape. A transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, appeared at the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region, the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C is used as a transparent region HR which is a planar shape and a colorless and transparent region. Good too. In other words, the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R gradually change from a bright state to a dark state, the display screen 7a becomes dark, and finally only the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes bright. By maintaining this, the background image and the medium decorative pattern 8C that displays the front of the background image in a variable manner may be visible only through the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. In this way, the variations of the transparent region HR can be increased, making it difficult for the player to lose the freshness of the variable display performance A through the transparent region.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), and in FIG. 66(C) to FIG. 66(E), In this case, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), a transparent region HR which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region. The display mode was such that the boundary line HRc glowed red and emitted light. This means that in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the probability of winning increases in the order that the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, is circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appearing as a closed specific region in a circular shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, and a star shape, character 1's silhouette, character 2's silhouette, and character 3's silhouette appear. Silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the order of the silhouette of character 4 and the silhouette of character 4. The outline of each character's silhouette becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, the inner region of each character's silhouette becomes the inner region HRa of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, and the outer region of the outline of each character's silhouette becomes the above-mentioned inner region HRa. This becomes an outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the expectation of winning is set in advance in the order of character 1 silhouette, character 2 silhouette, character 3 silhouette, and character 4 silhouette. In addition, instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent closed specific region, appearing in a circular, triangular, square, or star shape, the posture of the silhouette of a single specific character ( poses) may appear in a manner that changes gradually. For example, a series of silhouettes of a specific character from holding a sword to setting it up can be made to appear in sequence. In this case, it is set in advance so that the degree of expectation of a hit increases as the silhouette of a series of actions from the specific character holding the sword to holding the sword progresses.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 66(B) to 66(K), and in FIG. 66(C) to FIG. 66(E), In this case, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66(H) to 66(J), a transparent region HR which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region. The display mode was such that the boundary line HRc glowed red and emitted light. This means that in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the probability of winning increases in the order that the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, is circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appearing as a closed specific region in a circular, triangular, square, or star shape, a countdown may be performed using a numerical image. The outline of the number image becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, the inner region of the number image becomes the inner region HRa of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, and the outer region of the outline of the number image becomes the outside of the above-mentioned transparent region HR. This becomes the area HRb. In this case, a countdown is performed using number images in the order of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)", and the image of the number "3", It is set in advance so that the expectation of winning increases as the countdown using the number images progresses in the order of the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image.

In addition, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 66(D) and 66(I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent area HR is The background image was a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image). However, in FIGS. 66(D) and 66(I), when the background image is darkened, the background image that is visible through the transparent area HR seems to switch (change) from the background image before the darkening to another background image. You may also do so. In this way, the background image can be switched before and after FIG. 66(D) and FIG. 66(I), that is, by switching the background image at the time of the change, the background image switched due to the change and the winning/losing result can be changed. It is possible to discover relationships (laws) for each player and contribute to suppressing a decline in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any of the above-mentioned city image, forest image, ocean image, seabed image, and underground image, or may be changed in the variable display effect A through the transparent area. It may be possible to switch (change) to one image from among a plurality of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, . . . . In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, etc. may be set in advance to have a high probability of winning in the order of the dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, etc. .

[Fluctuating display effect B through transparent area]
Next, the variable display effect B through the transparent area will be explained with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the variable display effect B through the transparent area. The variable display performance B through the transparent area is performed by changing the image display device 7 after starting the variable display (fluctuating display) of a plurality of decorative symbols and before ending (stop display) (that is, during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols). It is possible to perform a variable display effect in which the display screen 7a is darkened and parts of at least two of the plurality of decorative patterns are made visible together with the background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. be. In other words, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, the area other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape is darkened, and only through this transparent area, parts of at least two decorative patterns that are being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to perform a fluctuating display effect that makes it visible.

The variable display performance B through the transparent area in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the "right-handed" image does not change at all and can be visually recognized. In addition, if the image "Right-handed hit" becomes an eyesore in the various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "Right-handed hit" is started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design is number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ” → number “8” → number “9” → number “1” → number “2” → etc. The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuation display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stationary display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode in which it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low to downward, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed.Furthermore, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variation area (the opaque small size that is the content displayed in the sub-variation area) (The display mode of the left decorative pattern, the display mode of the small opaque middle decorative pattern, and the display mode of the small opaque right decorative pattern) can be visually recognized without any change. A background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that the sub-variation area has an opaque small left decorative pattern, an opaque small middle decorative pattern, Only the variation performance (variation display) of the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even when the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 67(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special symbol reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that although both the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the fluctuation areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, other effect images is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. Furthermore, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd do not change at all and can be visually recognized. It is now possible to do so.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from now on.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a (that is, the frontmost side). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in the variable display effect B through the transparent area. In addition, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the color of the number of the first special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20) Blue numbers) and the color of the number of second special symbols reserved (red numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 do not change at all and can be visually recognized.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2.The number of reserved special drawings (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that they do not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the fluctuating icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in shape and color can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling globe icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectations are high, with the blue spherical icon having the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon having the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, to briefly explain the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, the second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, and has character figures (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ") is formed three-dimensionally, and has a character area 15a in which a character figure is formed, and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, there are a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that cause the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) that are capable of emitting multicolor light that causes the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A decorative board (not shown) having a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) that can emit multicolor light and mounted on the front surface thereof is accommodated. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the front side of the decorative board. In other words, the front side of the decorative board is the LED mounting surface. On the back side of this decorative board (the surface opposite to the front side of the decorative board), there is a dedicated LED drive IC (not shown) for controlling the gradation of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs. ), a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), and a connector (not shown) are mounted. The LED driving IC, resistor, capacitor, and connector are also surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the back side of the decorative board. In other words, the back side of the decorative board is a non-LED mounting surface. The LED drive IC is controlled by a control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs light up in gradation (lighting, flashing, gradation) and emit light, thereby controlling the character area. 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner, and the rectangular area 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner.

The second movable accessory 15 is able to stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a during normal times (first mode), and remains stationary at the retracted position (home position). From this state, it is possible to move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployment position) (second mode). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the second movable accessory 15 starts operating from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can indicate to the player that the expectation of winning is high. In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily recognized visually.

As shown in FIG. 67(A), when the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is finished, the left The decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. It is in a state where it disappears from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern ends. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. Note that when the power to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. is lit white. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 is normally in a state where the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow, and a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in white. .

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow light state and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory object 15 is maintained in a white light state. As shown in 67(B), a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns is started. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd started moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and was placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and changes at high speed, the variable display effect B through the transparent area is started, and in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, The brightly displayed state gradually changes to the darkly displayed state, and the range from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) The display mode is such that a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent closed specific region in the range that straddles the variation region of . The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc clearly shines from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect B through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the second movable While the character area 15a of the accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it is lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from a state in which it is lit in white to a state in which it is lit in blue. . At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. In other words, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the brightness is maintained at the same level as at the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern. In other words, when the variable display effect B through the transparent area is started, the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker as a background image except for the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a becomes darkened. .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(D), when the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) is moved to the inside of the transparent area HR. The left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which move at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be visually recognized through the area HRa of the transparent area HR. Become. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) cannot be visually recognized. The right decorative pattern 8R, which moves at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a blue lighting state, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the same as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which fluctuate at high speed, slow down during this predetermined period. A part of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and slows down (here, the lower part of the number "1" can be gradually seen from the lower part to the center part and then the upper part, and the number "1" (the lower part of the number "2" following the number "1" can be visually recognized) and a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized (here, the lower part of the number "2" gradually moves from the lower part to the center part). The upper part can be seen, and the lower part of the number "3" following the number "2" can be seen).

Note that even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd. There is no change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern and it can be seen, and the game ball is not thrown into the first starting port 20. There is no change in the color of the number of first special drawings held based on the ball entering (blue numbers) or the color of the number of second special drawings holding based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (red numbers). It can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the image "right-handed hit". As mentioned above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. , the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged so that they are the closest to the front, that is, the background image THG1 is used as a background image. On the front side are a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a hold icon 9B, a hold display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second This is because the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and just before a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is changed from the darkened state to the background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) gradually becomes brighter and reappears, and the area extending from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L) The display mode is such that the transparent region HR displayed in the range that straddles the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display mode is such that the blue glow at the boundary line HRc shines indistinctly from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. It is blue, which is the same color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

From the state where the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image, and from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a. When the display mode is such that the transparent area HR displayed in the range spanning the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C changes gradually from a bright state to a dark state, all the left Decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), medium decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2") , the right decorative pattern 8R (in this case, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the center are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) returns to the state where it is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the transparent region HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1." Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 comes to rest at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in blue to the original white lighting state. It is designed to change depending on the state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is in a white-lit state, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(G), when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image. (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue. , the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. As a result, the two pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and changes at high speed, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display mode gradually changes from bright to dark. At the same time, a transparent closed area extends from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range spanning the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). The display mode is such that a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape, gradually appears as the specific region. The shape of the transparent region HR here is the same as the transparent region HR shown in FIG. 67(C) (that is, the shape is the same as the transparent region HR shown in FIG. 67(C)). ). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc clearly shines from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. In other words, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in red.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the brightness is maintained at the same level as at the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern. In other words, the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a becomes dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(I), when the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) is moved to the inside of the transparent area HR. The state is such that the medium decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, which move at high speed in front of the background image THG1, can be visually recognized through the region HRa of the transparent region HR. Become. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L, which moves at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is kept lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the same as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in red continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the medium decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, slow down during this predetermined period. A part of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and slows down (here, the lower part of the number "9" can be gradually seen from the lower part to the central part and then the upper part, and the number "9" (the lower part of the number "1" that follows 9 can be visually recognized) and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R (here, from the lower part of the number "1" gradually the central part and then The upper part is visible and the lower part of the number "2" following the number "1" is visible).

Note that even if the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker as a background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd will change as described above. There is no change at all in the display mode of the small decorative pattern and it is now visible. The color of the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the (blue numbers) and the color of the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entrance of game balls into the second starting port 21 (red numbers) It is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change at all, and it is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change in the display mode of the "right-handed hit" image. As mentioned above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. , the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged so that they are the closest to the front, that is, the background image THG1 is used as a background image. On the front side are a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a hold icon 9B, a hold display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second This is because the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(J), the display screen 7a is darkened, and just before a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is changed from the darkened state to the background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) gradually becomes brighter and reappears, and the area extending from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R) The display mode is such that the transparent region HR displayed in the range that straddles the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display mode is such that the red glow at the boundary line HRc shines indistinctly from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. It is red, which is the same color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in red continues.

From the state where the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image, and from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a. When the transparent area HR displayed in the range spanning the range (that is, the range spanning the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left Decorative pattern 8L (here, the number “2” and the number “3” following the number “2”), medium decorative pattern 8C (here, the number “9” and the number “1” following the number “9”) , the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67(K), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) returns to the state where it is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the transparent region HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2." Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 comes to rest at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in red to the original white lighting state. It is designed to change depending on the state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is in a white-lit state, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state. This completes the variable display effect B through the transparent area, which is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K).

After the variable display effect B through the transparent area is completed, as shown in FIG. When the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 starts to move towards the target, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it is lit in yellow while the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a. While the rectangular area 15b remains illuminated in white, a variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position. As a result, one pending icon is kept in stock.

Variation (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns is started, and then, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the decoration will be out of alignment. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the symbols ends, if the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and temporarily stop and display, then it becomes a hit. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is finished, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started.

In this way, the variable display effect B through the transparent area is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), and in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E), A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, appeared as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR was in a display mode in which it glowed in blue and emitted light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), the transparent area HR (FIG. 67( C) to the same transparent region HR that appeared in FIG. 67(E)) appeared, and the display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR glowed in red and emitted light. In the variable display performance B through the transparent area, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is colored white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color), and rainbow color ( The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is also blue. , red, green, purple, yellow (gold color), and rainbow color (rainbow color (high probability of jackpot)), which have a high probability of winning and are preset in this order. As a result, as the variable display effect B progresses through the transparent area, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from blue to red, giving the player a sense of expectation of winning. This can contribute to reducing monotony caused by variations in symbols.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), and in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent The transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape as a closed specific region and a horizontally long rectangular shape, extends from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the left decorative pattern In contrast, in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), it appears in a planar shape as a transparent closed specific area. A transparent region HR (same as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E)), which is a colorless and transparent region having a horizontally long rectangular shape, extends from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to the display screen. It appeared in a range extending slightly to the left of the center of 7a (that is, a range spanning the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). This is because the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect B through the transparent area during the effect, so execute the variable display effect B through the transparent area. The position where the transparent region HR appears at this time is also determined to be a random position. For this reason, there is no relationship between the position where the transparent region HR appears and the expectation of winning. However, in this embodiment, since the position where the transparent region HR appears can be set to a random position, the player can find out the expected winning degree for the position where the transparent region HR appears based on his or her own ideas. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by variations in decorative patterns.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), and in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent The transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape as a closed specific region and a horizontally long rectangular shape, extends from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the left decorative pattern A second movable combination that appears in the range spanning the variable area of 8L and the variable area of medium decorative pattern 8C) and is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue, which is the same color as that of the rectangular region 15b in the object 15, and in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), the transparent A transparent region HR (same as the transparent region HR shown in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E)), which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a closed specific region, is displayed on the display screen. Appears in a range extending from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly left of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, a range spanning the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and retreats to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, which is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the position (home position), lights up. The display mode was to emit light. In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the rectangular area of the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the second movable accessory 15b lights up, even if the second movable accessory 15 has not started moving, the second movable accessory 15 It is possible to provide the player with a winning expectation that is commensurate with (corresponding to) the winning expectation given to the operation of the player, and can contribute to providing a sense of expectation regarding the variable display.

Further, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, as described above, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow as the normal state, and the second movable accessory 15 rectangular areas 15b are illuminated in white. In the variable display effect B through the transparent area, although it is performed across two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), the second variable display in FIGS. The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the white lighting state to the blue lighting state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the blue lighting state to the original white lighting state. 67(G) to FIG. 67(K), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in red, and then the second The rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in red to the original state where it lights up in white. The fluctuating display performance B through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading performances, but the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the fluctuating display performance through the transparent area during the performance. The decision is made by lottery. In other words, since the variable display effect B through the transparent area is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K) by only one lottery, it appears as if the decorative pattern For each variation, a variation display effect B can be performed through the transparent area as if determined by lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91. Thereby, the player can be made to think that there are multiple variations to the variable display effect B through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent closed specific area is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape. The transparent area HR, which is a transparent area, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range that straddles the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). On the other hand, in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), a transparent area HR( 67(C) to 67(E)) extends from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly left of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R) and the variation area of medium decorative pattern 8C). However, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is used as an area that straddles the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R. It may be done as follows. In this case, although the left side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and the right side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR is a single closed area (specific area ) can be expressed as follows.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIG. Although the color of the HR changes from blue, it may also change from one of red, green, or purple, or it may change from one of red, green, or purple. ) or in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), first, the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is changed from blue to other colors. The color may change only multiple times (for example, change from blue to red, blue to red to green, blue to red to green to purple, etc.), or the colors shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K ), the color of the transparent region HR may be maintained at yellow (gold color) or rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, although it is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), it is performed as one effect of the so-called pre-read effect. Instead, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display performance B through the transparent area during the performance. However, the variable display effect B through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the pre-read effects. In this case, since the variable display effect B through the transparent area was performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), The shape and color of the pending icon 9B to be placed are actually the blue spherical pending icon 9B as the pre-reading result, which matches (corresponds to) the expectation level of the blue spherical pending icon 9B. By performing the variable display effect B through the transparent area, which is performed across the two variable displays shown in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd is displayed. , a white spherical hold icon 9B may be used.

In addition, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area in this embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in the sub variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a. There was a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display). However, the player misunderstood the numbers formed by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern as a countdown started by variable display effect B through the transparent area, and this countdown resulted in a win. Since there is a risk that the player may expect that a highly anticipated performance will be executed subsequently, the sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R to create a small size. The left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern may be variably produced (variably displayed).

In addition, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special symbols held (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 and the number of the first special symbols held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21, The number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls (red numbers) was placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and was always displayed. However, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbols pending based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (Red numbers), the player misunderstands that it is a countdown that starts with the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and the player expects that this countdown will cause a performance with a high expectation of winning to be executed afterwards. Therefore, the number of first special symbols on hold (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and the second special chart based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The number of pending items (red numbers) may be displayed at all times by being placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent closed specific area is a colorless transparent having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape. The transparent area HR, which is a transparent area, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range that straddles the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). When it appears, the transparent region HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. In addition, in FIGS. 67(H) to 67(J), the transparent region HR (FIGS. 67(C) to 67(J), which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape, is a transparent closed specific region. 67(E)) extends from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C). When the transparent region HR appears in the range that straddles the variable region), the transparent region HR is fixed without moving or rotating at this position. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the display mode is such that the transparent region HR repeatedly moves up and down in small steps (vertical vibration) or moves left and right in small steps (horizontal vibration) centering on the position where the transparent region HR appears. ), a display mode that repeatedly rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode that combines these. In this way, since the area that becomes visible through the transparent area HR changes, it is possible to increase the variations in the presentation by the transparent area HR, and contributes to reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern. be able to.

Further, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, for example, in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent closed specific area has a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape. The transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, extends from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range that spans the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C) ) appeared in However, instead of a colorless transparent area having a planar shape and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific area, a range spanning the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C is It may also be a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region. In other words, the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display screen 7a becomes dark, and finally the range straddles the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the medium decorative pattern 8C. The left decorative pattern 8L and the medium decoration display the background image and the front of the background image in a variable manner only through the range spanning the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The symbol 8C may be made visible. In this way, variations in the transparent region HR can be increased, making it difficult for the player to lose the freshness of the variable display effect B through the transparent region.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display is performed across two variable displays shown in FIG. 67(B) to FIG. 67(K), and in FIG. 67(C) to FIG. 67(E), The transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, appeared at different positions. However, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape, may appear at a single predetermined position as a transparent closed specific region. The single predetermined position is a position where a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C are visible (that is, a variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and a variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). a position where a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C and a part of the left decorative pattern 8L are visible (that is, a range that straddles the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R) ), a position where a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R are visible (that is, a position where the range straddles the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R) Therefore, the left side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a, in other words, excluding the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The location of the area) can be mentioned.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display is performed across two variable displays shown in FIG. 67(B) to FIG. 67(K), and in FIG. 67(C) to FIG. 67(E), The transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, appears at different positions, and the transparent region HR having the same shape and size that is commonly used Area HR had appeared. However, each variation display may change to a different shape (for example, a triangle, a square, a star), or may be counted down using a numerical image. The outline of the other shape becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, the inner region of the other shape becomes the inner region HRa of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, and the outer region of the outline of the other shape becomes the above-mentioned transparent region. This becomes an outer region HRb of HR. In this case, it is preset so that the probability of winning increases as the shape progresses (for example, as the shape changes in the order of a horizontally long rectangle, a triangle, a square, and then a star). Further, the outline of the number image becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, the inner region of the number image becomes the inner region HRa of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, and the outer region of the outline of the number image becomes the above-mentioned transparent region HR. The outer region HRb is the outer region HRb. In this case, a countdown is performed using number images in the order of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)", and the image of the number "3", It is set in advance so that when the countdown using the number images progresses in the order of the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)", the expectation of winning becomes high.

In addition, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 67(D) and 67(I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent area HR is The background image was a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image). However, in FIGS. 67(D) and 67(I), when the background image is darkened, the background image that is visible through the transparent area HR seems to switch (change) from the background image before the darkening to another background image. You may also do so. By doing this, it is possible to switch the background image before and after FIG. 67(D) and FIG. 67(I), that is, by switching the background image at the time of the change, the background image switched due to the change and the winning/losing result can be changed. It is possible to discover relationships (laws) for each player and contribute to suppressing a decline in interest. Note that the background image may be switched (changed) to any of the above-mentioned city image, forest image, sea image, seabed image, and underground image, or may be changed in the variable display effect B through the transparent area. It may be possible to switch (change) to one image from among a plurality of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, . . . . In this case, the plurality of images such as dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, etc. may be set in advance to have a high probability of winning in the order of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, etc. .

[Fluctuating display effect C through transparent area]
Next, the variable display effect C through the transparent area will be explained with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining a variable display effect C through a transparent area. The variable display effect C through the transparent area is performed by the image display device 7 after starting the variable effect (fluctuating display) of a plurality of decorative patterns and before ending (stop display) (that is, during the variable effect of the decorative patterns). It is possible to perform a variable display effect in which the display screen 7a is darkened and at least a part of a plurality of decorative patterns is made visible together with a background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. be. In other words, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the area other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape is darkened, and only through this transparent area, a part of at least one decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to perform a variable display effect that makes it visible.

The variable display performance C through the transparent area in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Further, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the "right-handed" image does not change at all and can be visually recognized. In addition, if the image "Right-handed hit" becomes an eyesore in the various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "Right-handed hit" is started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stationary display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode in which it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low to downward, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed.Furthermore, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variation area (the opaque small size that is the content displayed in the sub-variation area) (The display mode of the left decorative pattern, the display mode of the small opaque middle decorative pattern, and the display mode of the small opaque right decorative pattern) can be visually recognized without any change. A background image may not be provided in the sub-variation area, and in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that in the sub-variation area, an opaque small left decorative pattern, a small opaque middle decorative pattern, Only the variation effect (variation display) of the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the expiry of the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 68(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special symbol reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that although both the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the fluctuation areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, other effect images is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. Furthermore, even if a transparent area, which will be described later, appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd do not change at all and can be visually recognized. It is now possible to do so.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from now on.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a (that is, the frontmost side). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since the visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in the variable display effect C through the transparent area. In addition, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the color of the number of the first special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20) Blue numbers) and the color of the number of second special symbols reserved (red numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 do not change at all and can be visually recognized.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2.The number of reserved special drawings (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that they do not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation level is high, and the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation level of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation level of winning.

Next, to briefly explain the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, the second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, and has character figures (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ") is formed three-dimensionally, and has a character area 15a in which a character figure is formed, and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, there are a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that cause the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) that are capable of emitting multicolor light that causes the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. A decorative board (not shown) having a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) that can emit multicolor light and mounted on the front surface thereof is accommodated. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the front side of the decorative board. In other words, the front side of the decorative board is the LED mounting surface. On the back side of this decorative board (the surface opposite to the front side of the decorative board), there is a dedicated LED drive IC (not shown) for controlling the gradation of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs. ), a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), and a connector (not shown) are mounted. The LED driving IC, resistor, capacitor, and connector are also surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the back side of the decorative board. In other words, the back side of the decorative board is a non-LED mounting surface. The LED drive IC is controlled by a control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs light up in gradation (lighting, flashing, gradation) and emit light, thereby controlling the character area. 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner, and the rectangular area 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner.

The second movable accessory 15 is able to stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a during normal times (first mode), and remains stationary at the retracted position (home position). From this state, it is possible to move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployment position) (second mode). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the second movable accessory 15 starts operating from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can indicate to the player that the expectation of winning is high. In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily recognized visually.

As shown in FIG. 68(A), when the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is finished, the left The decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. It is in a state where it disappears from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern ends. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. Note that when the power to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. is lit white. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 is normally in a state where the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow, and a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in white. .

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a yellow light state and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory object 15 is maintained in a white light state. As shown in 68(B), a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns is started. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd started moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and was placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and changes at high speed, a variable display effect C through the transparent area is started, and in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, The brightly displayed state gradually changes to the darkly displayed state, and at the same time, a transparent closed specific area in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C) is displayed as a planar and circular colorless area. This is a display mode in which a transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, gradually appears. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc clearly shines from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the second movable While the character area 15a of the accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it is lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from a state in which it is lit in white to a state in which it is lit in blue. . At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. In other words, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the brightness is maintained at the same level as at the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern. In other words, when the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started, the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker as a background image except for the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and then the display screen 7a becomes darkened. .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(D), when the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) is moved to the inside of the transparent area HR. The state becomes such that it can be visually recognized through the region HRa, and the medium decorative pattern 8C that moves at high speed in front of the background image THG1 can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which move at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a blue lighting state, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the same as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the high-speed fluctuating medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a translucent state to a translucent state. A part of the medium decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "2" can be gradually seen from the center part to the upper part, and the number The lower part of the number "3" following "2" is visible).

Note that even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd. There is no change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern and it can be visually recognized. There is no change in the color of the number of first special drawings held based on the ball entering (blue numbers) or the color of the number of second special drawings holding based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (red numbers). It can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the image "right-handed hit". As mentioned above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. , the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged so that they are the closest to the front, that is, the background image THG1 is used as a background image. On the front side are a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a hold icon 9B, a hold display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second This is because the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and just before a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is changed from the darkened state to the background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display mode is such that the blue glow at the boundary line HRc shines indistinctly from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. It is blue, which is the same color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

From the state where the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image, and at the same time, it appears in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C). When the displayed transparent area HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), the middle Decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before being temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) returns to the state where it is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the transparent region HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1." Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 comes to rest at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in blue to the original white lighting state. It is designed to change depending on the state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is in a white-lit state, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(G), when the movement starts toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image. (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue. , the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. As a result, the two pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(H), the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and changes at high speed, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display mode gradually changes from bright to dark. At the same time, a transparent closed screen is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the same position as the transparent area HR that appears in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E)). The display mode is such that a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, gradually appears as the specific region. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 68(C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc clearly shines from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. In other words, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in red.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the brightness is maintained at the same level as at the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern. In other words, the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a becomes dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(I), when the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) is moved to the inside of the transparent area HR. The state becomes such that it can be visually recognized through the region HRa, and the medium decorative pattern 8C that moves at high speed in front of the background image THG1 can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which move at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is kept lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the same as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in red continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the high-speed fluctuating medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a translucent state to a translucent state. A part of the medium decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "9" can be gradually seen from the center part to the upper part, and the number The lower part of the number "1" following "9" is visible).

Note that even if the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker as a background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd will change as described above. There is no change at all in the display mode of the small decorative pattern and it is now visible. The color of the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the (blue numbers) and the color of the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entrance of game balls into the second starting port 21 (red numbers) It is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change at all, and it is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change in the display mode of the "right-handed hit" image. As mentioned above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. , the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged so that they are the closest to the front, that is, the background image THG1 is used as a background image. On the front side are a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a hold icon 9B, a hold display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second This is because the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the display screen 7a is darkened, and just before a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is changed from the darkened state to the background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display mode is such that the red glow at the boundary line HRc shines indistinctly from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. It is red, which is the same color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light continues.

From the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image, and the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C) , the same position as the position of the transparent area HR that appeared in FIGS. Decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), medium decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") , the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(K), the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the moving image) returns to the state where it is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the transparent region HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and then, The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2." Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 comes to rest at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in red to the original white lighting state. It is designed to change depending on the state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is in a white-lit state, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(L), when the movement starts toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image. (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue. , the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position. As a result, one pending icon is kept in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(M), the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and changes at high speed, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display mode gradually changes from bright to dark. At the same time, the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, which is the same position as the transparent area HR that appears in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E)), and furthermore, A transparent region HR which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a rectangular shape is located as a transparent closed specific region (at the same position as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J)). becomes a display mode that gradually appears. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from that of the transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 68(C). The shape is different from the transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape shown in H). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc clearly shines from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in green. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is green, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. In other words, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in green and emits light.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the background image THG1 is displayed as a background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the brightness is maintained at the same level as at the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern. In other words, the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a becomes dark.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68(N), when the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) is moved to the inside of the transparent region HR. The state becomes such that it can be visually recognized through the region HRa, and the medium decorative pattern 8C that moves at high speed in front of the background image THG1 can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image of the video) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which move at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Also, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is kept lit in green, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the same as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is green, which is the same color as the lighting color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in green continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds), the high-speed fluctuating medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a translucent state to a translucent state. A part of the medium decorative pattern 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be seen (here, the lower part of the number "8" can be gradually seen from the center part to the upper part, and the number The lower part of the number "9" following "8" can be seen).

Note that even if the background image THG1 becomes gradually darker as a background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd will change as described above. There is no change at all in the display mode of the small decorative pattern and it is now visible. The color of the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the (blue numbers) and the color of the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entrance of game balls into the second starting port 21 (red numbers) It is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change at all, and it is now possible to visually recognize the image without any change in the display mode of the "right-handed hit" image. As mentioned above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative pattern, and the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. , the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged so that they are the closest to the front, that is, the background image THG1 is used as a background image. On the front side are a variable icon 9C, a variable display position 9Cd, a hold icon 9B, a hold display position 9Bd, a small decorative pattern, the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second This is because the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 21, and the image "Right hit" are arranged.

Subsequently, although not shown, the display screen 7a is darkened, and just before a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, a background image THG1 (here, The subterranean image of the moving image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed at the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display mode is such that the green glow at the boundary line HRc shines indistinctly from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in green, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is maintained in a state where the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 lights up. It is green, which is the same color. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in green continues.

From the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image, and the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C) , is the same position as the transparent region HR that appears in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), and is also the same as the position of the transparent region HR that appears in FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J). When the transparent area HR displayed at the position of ``1'' gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1" ”), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number “8” and the number “9” following the number “8”), right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number “9” and the number following the number “9”) "1") has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a state immediately before being temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, although not shown, the background image THG1 (in this case, the underground image of the video) returns to the state where it is brightly displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the transparent region HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "9", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", and then the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1". It is stopped and displayed at "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1". Upon completion of the display), the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed. , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the second movable accessory 15 comes to rest at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The state (first mode) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in green to the original state where it lights up in white. It is designed to change depending on the state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular area 15b of the movable accessory 15 is in a white-lit state, the character area 15a and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state. As a result, the variable display performance C through the transparent area that started from FIG. 68(B) and was performed across the three variable displays ends.

After the variable display effect C through the transparent area is finished, and then, although not shown, when the icon 9B starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, In a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state where it is lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b is lit in white. While this state is maintained, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position. It will be in a state where it is not. This results in a state in which no pending icons are stocked.

Variation (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns is started, and then, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the decoration will be out of alignment. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the symbols ends, if the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and temporarily stop and display, then it becomes a hit. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is finished, and then the jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started.

In this way, the variable display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. 68(B) and is performed across three variable displays, and in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as the specific region, and the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light, as shown in FIG. 68 (H ) ~ In FIG. 68 (J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red. It is a display mode that emits light, and in FIGS. 68(M) and 68(N), etc., a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a rectangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, The display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR glowed in green and emitted light. This means that in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless transparent area with a planar shape as a transparent closed specific area, is expected to hit in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because the degree is set in advance to be high. As a result, as the variable display effect C progresses through the transparent area, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes sequentially from a circular shape to a triangular shape and then to a square shape, giving the player a sense of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to reducing monotony caused by variations in decorative patterns.

Furthermore, regarding the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15, the winning order is white (normally lit color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color), and rainbow color (rainbow color (strong jackpot)). The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is highly expected and has been set in advance and is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color). This is because the expectation of winning is high and is preset in the following order: ) and rainbow color (high probability of jackpot). As a result, as the variable display effect C progresses through the transparent area, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from blue to red to green, giving the player a sense of expectation of winning. , it is possible to contribute to reducing monotony caused by variations in decorative patterns.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, it starts from FIG. 68(B) and is performed across three variable displays, and in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears, and the transparent region HR is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. 2. The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 lights up, and in FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), , a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and is stationary at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first aspect). ), the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red, which is the same color as that of the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 maintained in FIG. 68(M), ( In N), etc., a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a rectangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and remains at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a. The display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in green, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 that is maintained in the state (first mode) lights up. . In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the rectangular area of the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the second movable accessory 15b lights up, even if the second movable accessory 15 has not started moving, the second movable accessory 15 It is possible to provide the player with a winning expectation that is commensurate with (corresponding to) the winning expectation given to the operation of the player, and can contribute to providing a sense of expectation regarding the variable display.

Further, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, as described above, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow as the normal state, and the second movable accessory 15 rectangular areas 15b are illuminated in white. In the variable display effect C through the transparent area, although it starts from FIG. 68(B) and is performed across three variable displays, in FIG. 68(B) to FIG. 68(F), the second movable accessory The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in white to the state where it lights up in blue, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the state where it lights up in blue to the original state where it lights up in white. 68(G) to FIG. 68(K), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in red, and then the second movable accessory The rectangular area 15b of No. 15 changes from the state where it lights up red to the original state where it lights up white, and furthermore, in the next variation starting from FIG. 68(L), the second movable accessory 15 The rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in white to a state where it lights up in green, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state where it lights up in green to the original state where it lights up in white. . The fluctuating display performance C through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead performances, but the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the fluctuating display performance through the transparent area during the performance. The decision is made by lottery. In other words, in reality, the variable display effect C through the transparent area is started from FIG. , it is possible to perform a variable display effect C through the transparent area as if determined by lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that there are a plurality of variations to the variable display effect C through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), first, a colorless transparent area having a planar shape and a circular shape is used as a transparent closed specific area. 68(B) to 68(B) to FIG. 68(B). In 68(K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining the planar and circular shape.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIG. Although the color changes from blue, for example, it may change from one of red, green, and purple. In the variations, or in the variations in FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), or in the variations in FIGS. 68(M), (N), etc., first, a transparent closed specific area is a planar shape and a circle. The color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region with a shape, changes from blue to another color multiple times (for example, changes from blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.) ), or starting from FIG. 68(B), the color of the transparent region HR is maintained at yellow (gold color) or rainbow color (rainbow color (rich jackpot)) across the three variations. state, change the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a transparent closed specific region (for example, circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped, circular, triangular, square, circular, etc.) Then, the order of triangle shape, triangle shape, square shape, star shape, triangle shape and square shape, etc.), the shape of the transparent region HR which is a transparent closed specific region (for example, the shape of a circle) (maintaining a triangular shape, maintaining a rectangular shape, or maintaining a star shape).

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, although it starts from FIG. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display performance C through the transparent area during the performance. However, the variable display effect C through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the pre-read effects. In this case, since the variable display effect C through the transparent area was started from FIG. 68(B) and was performed across three variable displays, the display is placed at the third pending display position 9Bd in FIG. 68(A). The shape and color of the hold icon 9B are actually set as a red spherical hold icon 9B as a pre-read result for the hold icon 9B, but the figure shows an effect that matches (corresponds to) the expectation level of the red spherical hold icon 9B. Starting from 68(B), by performing the variable display effect C through the transparent area that spans the three variable displays, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd is deliberately changed to a white spherical hold icon. It can be the icon 9B.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in the sub variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a. There was a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display). However, the player misunderstood the numbers formed by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern as a countdown started by the variable display effect C through the transparent area, and this countdown resulted in a win. Since there is a risk that the player may expect that a highly anticipated performance will be executed subsequently, the sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or at the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R to create a small size. The left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern may be variably produced (variably displayed).

In addition, in the variable display performance C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special symbols held (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 and the number of the first special symbols held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 21 The number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls (red numbers) was placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and was always displayed. However, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbols pending based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (Red numbers), the player misunderstands that it is a countdown that starts with the variable display effect C through the transparent area, and the player expects that a effect with a high expectation of winning will be executed subsequently due to this countdown. Therefore, the number of first special symbols on hold (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and the second special chart based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The number of pending items (red numbers) may be displayed at all times by being placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), a colorless transparent area having a planar shape and a circular shape is used as a transparent closed specific area. When the transparent region HR appears at the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. In addition, in FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a flat and triangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is located in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, in the center of the display screen 7a). When it appears in the variable area of the decorative pattern 8C), the transparent area HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. In addition, in FIGS. 68(M), (N), etc., the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is located at the center of the display screen 7a (that is, inside the middle decoration). When it appears in the variable area of symbol 8C), the transparent area HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the display mode is such that the transparent region HR repeatedly moves up and down in small steps (vertical vibration) or moves left and right in small steps (horizontal vibration) centering on the position where the transparent region HR appears. ), a display mode that repeatedly rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode that combines these. In this way, since the area that becomes visible through the transparent area HR changes, it is possible to increase the variations in the presentation by the transparent area HR, and contributes to reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern. be able to.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, for example, in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E), the transparent closed specific area is colorless and transparent which has a planar shape and a circular shape. A transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, appeared at the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region, the variable region of the medium decorative pattern 8C is used as a transparent region HR which is a planar shape and a colorless and transparent region. Good too. In other words, the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R gradually change from a bright state to a dark state, the display screen 7a becomes dark, and finally only the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes bright. By maintaining this, the background image and the medium decorative pattern 8C that displays the front of the background image in a variable manner may be visible only through the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. In this way, the variations of the transparent region HR can be increased, so that it is difficult for the player to lose the freshness of the variable display performance C through the transparent region.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. ~ In FIG. 68(E), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. In FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red and emits light, and in FIGS. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appeared, and the display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shined in green and emitted light. This means that in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the probability of winning increases in the order that the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, is circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appearing as a closed specific region in a circular shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, and a star shape, character 1's silhouette, character 2's silhouette, and character 3's silhouette appear. Silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the order of the silhouette of character 4 and the silhouette of character 4. The outline of each character's silhouette becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, the inner region of each character's silhouette becomes the inner region HRa of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, and the outer region of the outline of each character's silhouette becomes the above-mentioned inner region HRa. This becomes an outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the expectation of winning is set in advance in the order of character 1 silhouette, character 2 silhouette, character 3 silhouette, and character 4 silhouette. In addition, instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent closed specific region, appearing in a circular, triangular, square, or star shape, the posture of the silhouette of a single specific character ( poses) may appear in a manner that changes gradually. For example, a series of silhouettes of a specific character from holding a sword to setting it up can be made to appear in sequence. In this case, it is set in advance so that the degree of expectation of a hit increases as the silhouette of a series of actions from the specific character holding the sword to holding the sword progresses.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the variable display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. ~ In FIG. 68(E), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. In FIGS. 68(H) to 68(J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red and emits light, and in FIGS. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appeared, and the display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shined in green and emitted light. This means that in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the probability of winning increases in the order that the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area as a transparent closed specific area, is circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appearing as a closed specific region in a circular, triangular, square, or star shape, a countdown may be performed using a numerical image. The outline of the number image becomes the boundary line HRc of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, the inner region of the number image becomes the inner region HRa of the above-mentioned transparent region HR, and the outer region of the outline of the number image becomes the outside of the above-mentioned transparent region HR. This becomes the area HRb. In this case, a countdown is performed using number images in the order of the image of the number "3", the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)", and the image of the number "3", It is set in advance so that the expectation of winning increases as the countdown using the number images progresses in the order of the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image.

In addition, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, in FIGS. 68(D), 68(I), and 68(N), the background image that is visible through the transparent area HR when darkened is The background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is the background image before the image is darkened. However, in FIGS. 68(D), 68(I), and 68(N), when the background image is darkened, the background image that is visible through the transparent area HR is changed from the background image before the darkening to another background image. It may be switched (changed). In this way, the background image can be switched before and after FIG. 68(D), FIG. 68(I), and FIG. 68(N). In other words, by switching the background image at the time of the change, the background image switched due to the change can be changed. The relationship (rule) between the image and the winning/losing result can be discovered by the player himself/herself, thereby contributing to suppressing a decline in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any one of the above-mentioned city image, forest image, sea image, seabed image, and underground image, or may be changed in the variable display effect C through the transparent area. It may be possible to switch (change) to one image from among a plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3, . . . . In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3... may be set in advance to have a high probability of winning in the order of the dedicated background images C1, C2, C3... .

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display effect through the transparent area is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of types of images are displayed in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. When displaying an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR, a background image THG1 and a pattern image are provided outside the image forming the specific area HR. A production in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern are difficult to see, and a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the pattern image are made visible through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR. (Figures 66 (D) and (I) for fluctuating display effect A through the transparent area, Figures 67 (D) and (I) for fluctuating display effect B through the transparent area, and Figure 68 for fluctuating display effect C through the transparent area (D), (I), and (N)). According to this configuration, when displaying an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR, outside of the image forming the specific area HR, there is a background image THG1 and a pattern image that can notify winning or losing results. Although it is difficult to see the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, inside the image forming the specific area HR, the background image THG1 can be seen through the inside of the image forming the specific area HR. A part of the pattern image (for example, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 66(D), a part of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 66(I), a transparent area In the variable display effect B, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 67(D), a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 67(I) , in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, it is possible to visually recognize the part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner, contributing to reducing monotony caused by fluctuations in the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern, which are pattern images. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, interest can be improved by performing a variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern, which are novel pattern images.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. When the image forming the specific area HR is displayed by darkening 7a, the outside of the image forming the specific area HR is darkened, and the inside of the image forming the specific area HR is not darkened and remains transparent. It is now possible to do so. According to this configuration, by darkening the display screen 7a, the outside of the image forming the specific region HR is divided into the background image THG1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images. becomes difficult to see, and the inside of the image forming the specific region HR remains transparent regardless of whether or not the display screen 7a is darkened. Therefore, before the display screen 7a is darkened, The background image THG1 and the pattern image (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 66(I) in variable display effect A through the transparent area, and the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 67(I) in variable display effect B through the transparent area) In the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 68(D), the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 68(I), and the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 68(N) are displayed. A state of easy visibility can be maintained.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. The fluctuation icon 9C and the hold icon 9B are displayed outside the image forming the HR, and even if the display screen 7a is darkened, the fluctuation icon 9C and the hold icon 9B can be maintained in a displayed state without being hidden. It is now possible to do so. According to this configuration, when the display screen 7a is darkened, the outside of the image forming the specific region HR becomes dark, but the variable icon 9C arranged outside the image forming the specific region HR and the Since the icon 9B can be maintained in a displayed state without being hidden, it is possible for the player to see the fluctuations that continue to be displayed during the fluctuation display of the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. The icon 9C can change to another shape or color to suggest the possibility that the probability of winning will increase, and is displayed during the variable display by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is also possible to suggest the possibility that the pending icon 9B, which continues to be displayed, may change to a different shape or color, thereby increasing the probability of winning.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68 are based on the background image. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images, are arranged in front of THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images, are changed from an opaque state. When started, the image forming the specific region HR was displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were pattern images, were changed from an opaque state to a translucent state and were displayed in high-speed fluctuations. Further, the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images, is decelerated to change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state. According to this configuration, although the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images, are displayed in a translucent state in a rapidly changing manner, the left decorative pattern, which is a semitransparent pattern, is The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are semi-transparent pattern images that can be visually recognized through the specific region HR. The background image THG1 behind can also be visually recognized through the pattern image and the specific region HR.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. The boundary line HRc between the outside and inside of the image forming HR can be displayed in a predetermined color. According to this configuration, since the specific region HR is an image forming a transparent closed region, the boundary line HRc representing the outer shape of the specific region HR is displayed in a predetermined color to make the specific region HR easily visible, When the specific region HR is displayed, it can contribute to guiding the player's line of sight to the specific region HR and drawing attention to it.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is movable between a retracted position and an advanced position, and is provided with a plurality of first full-color LEDs and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (a plurality of light emitting means) capable of emitting light in multiple colors. It has two movable accessories 15 (movable bodies), and has a variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, a variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and a variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68. In the state in which the second movable accessory 15 is retracted to the retracted position, a predetermined color for displaying the boundary line HRc and a plurality of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs (the plurality of light emitting means) are selected. The color of the light emitted by the second full-color LED (specific light emitting means) can be made the same color as that of the second full-color LED (specific light emitting means). When the second movable accessory 15 starts operating from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can suggest to the player that the expectation of winning is high. In the retracted state, the boundary line HRc can be displayed so as to have the same color as the light emitted by the plurality of second full-color LEDs (specific light emitting means) provided in the second movable accessory 15. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the second movable accessory 15 and the transparent region HR (that is, the boundary line HRc) are linked, and the second movable accessory 15 can be moved to the retracted position. Even in the retreated state, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of winning is high using the transparent region HR (that is, the boundary line HRc). In addition, as described above, when the second movable accessory 15 is retracted to the retracted position, the color of the light emitted by the plurality of second full-color LEDs (specific light emitting means) provided in the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc can be displayed in the same color, the player can easily see that the second movable accessory 15 and the transparent area HR (that is, the boundary line HRc) are linked. Along with this, it is also possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation that the second movable accessory 15 may start operating from now on.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. The images formed are planar images (planar images), and include variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and variable display effect through the transparent area in FIG. 68. The effect in Production C is now able to maintain the posture and size of the plane image (plane image) without changing it from the time the plane image is displayed until it is hidden. ing. According to this configuration, since the posture and size of the planar image (planar image) that is the image formed in the specific region HR do not change, the player's line of sight is directed not to the specific region HR itself. This can contribute to maintaining the state toward a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the pattern image that are visible through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the variable display effect through the transparent area will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. It was carried out based on the In other words, the game was played in a so-called right-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called left-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern During the variable display by 8R, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B did not change to other shapes or colors to the player. However, during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9 changes to a different shape or color, suggesting the possibility that the expectation of winning will increase. Alternatively, during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the hold icon 9B may change to a different shape or color, increasing the probability of winning. It may be possible to make suggestions.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68, an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR is displayed. At this time, the background image THG1, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern, which are pattern images, are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific region HR, and the outside of the image forming the specific region HR is It was possible to perform an effect that made part of the background image THG1 and part of the pattern image visible through the inside. However, instead of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern as the pattern images, a variable icon 9 or a pending icon 9B may be used. In this case, when the pattern image is the variable icon 9C, when displaying an image forming a transparent closed specific region HR, the background image THG1 and the variable icon 9C are visible outside the image forming the specific region HR. Although it is difficult, inside the image forming the specific region HR, part of the background image THG1 and part or all of the symbol image (part or all of the variation icon 9C) When the design image is the pending icon 9B and an image forming a transparent closed specific region HR is displayed, the specific region HR may be made visible. Although the background image THG1 and the pending icon 9B are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR, the background image THG1 and the hold icon 9B are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR. Part or all of the symbol image (part of the pending icon 9B or all of the pending icon 9B) may be made visible. In this way, the player's eyes can be directed toward the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B, so that the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B change to other shapes and colors, increasing the expectation of winning. It is possible to tell the player the timing that suggests the possibility.

[Modification 4]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68, regarding the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15, White (usually lit color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color), and rainbow color (rainbow color (strong jackpot)) are preset in the order of high probability of winning, and the second movable accessory The colors of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of No. 15, are also arranged in the following order: blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color), and rainbow color (rich jackpot color). The expectation of winning was high and had been set in advance. However, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be set to a color that has the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 and has a higher probability of winning by one. For example, when the rectangular area 15 of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue, red, which is the color that increases the probability of winning by one next to blue, becomes the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR, and the transparent area The HR boundary line HRc lights up in red. Further, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be set to a color that has the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 and has a two-level higher winning expectation. For example, when the rectangular area 15 of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue, green, which is the color with the second highest probability of winning after blue, becomes the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR, and the transparent area The HR boundary line HRc lights up in green.

[Modification 5]
Variable display effect A through the transparent area in FIG. 66, variable display effect B through the transparent area in FIG. 67, and variable display effect C through the transparent area in FIG. 68 may not include some of the effects described. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means for displaying a plurality of types of images on a screen,
When displaying an image forming a transparent closed specific area, the background image and the pattern image are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area, and the background image is displayed through the inside of the image forming the specific area. It is possible to perform an effect that makes part of the image visible and part of the pattern image visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
The effect is that when the screen is darkened and an image forming the specific area is displayed, the outside of the image forming the specific area is darkened, and the inside of the image forming the specific area is not darkened but transparent. maintain the condition,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
The effect displays a variable icon and a pending icon outside the image forming the specific area, and maintains a state in which the variable icon and the pending icon are not hidden even if the screen is darkened. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
The effect is to place the pattern image in front of the background image, and when the pattern image starts to change from an opaque state, an image forming the specific area is displayed, and the pattern image changes from an opaque state to a translucent state. After changing the symbol image to a state and displaying it fluctuating at high speed, decelerating the fluctuating display of the symbol image and changing it from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
The effect includes displaying a boundary line between an outside and an inside of the image forming the specific area in a predetermined color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-5,
It is movable between a retracted position and an advanced position, and has a movable body equipped with a plurality of light emitting means, and is capable of emitting multicolor light.
The effect includes the predetermined color for displaying the boundary line and the color of light emitted by a specific light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means when the movable body is retracted at the retracted position. be the same color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-6,
The image formed in the specific area is a planar image,
The effect maintains the posture and size of the planar image without changing it from the time the planar image is displayed to the time when the planar image is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Rhythmic winning/losing notification performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 69 to 71. In FIGS. 69 to 71, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. There is. In addition, when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are activated during variable production (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated. Players are informed that there is a high expectation of a win in that a win will occur after the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of multiple decorative symbols ends (in other words, after the multiple decorative symbols are stopped and displayed) compared to when When the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are activated during temporary stop display with a plurality of decorative symbols aligned in the same pattern, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 is not activated, it is suggested to the player that out of the plurality of winning types, there is a high expectation that the winning will be more profitable to the player. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15.

This rhythmic win/lose notification performance starts the fluctuating display (fluctuating display) of multiple decorative patterns all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) has elapsed, the display stops all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning/losing result. It is possible to perform a variable display effect of. In other words, by notifying the winning or losing results after the elapse of a predetermined period of time (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols, it is possible to execute a variable display effect that rhythmically notifies the winning or losing results. . That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a rhythmic winning/losing notification effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 reads out the corresponding image data. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute a rhythmic winning/losing notification effect is included, the first movable accessory 14 and the second The position of the movable accessory 15 may be changed. The rhythmic win/loss notification performance is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead performances, but the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the rhythmic win/loss notification performance during the performance. There is.

In addition, various background images for the variation presentation (variation display) of decorative patterns include, for example, background images such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an ocean floor image, and an underground image. These various background images may be still images or moving images.

Here, first, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A will be explained, then the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B, and then the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C will be explained in order.

[Rhythmic winning announcement performance A]
First, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A will be explained with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A. Rhythmic win/lose notification performance A starts a fluctuating display (fluctuating display) of multiple decorative patterns all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) elapses, the display stops all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning/losing result. It is possible to perform a variable display effect of. In other words, the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance A is a variable display performance that rhythmically notifies the winning/losing result by notifying the winning/losing result after a predetermined time (certain time) has elapsed with a fluctuating display (fluctuating display) of a plurality of decorative symbols. can be carried out.

The rhythmic win/loss notification performance A in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Note that, when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image "right-handed hitting" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. In addition, if the image of "hitting right" becomes an eyesore in various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "hitting right" may be started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stop display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern will move from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing its speed from low to downward (after the decorative pattern is in the display mode in which it is about to move). The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed. Note that the sub-variation area may not have a background image; in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that the sub-variation area has an opaque small size. Only the variable effects (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern, and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become translucent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even when the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-fluctuation area is placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the expiration of the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 69(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the fluctuation areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, other effect images is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. Note that the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image to be described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. (disappear).

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 from now on, and that the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd is digested, and then the 2. When the game ball enters the starting port 21, the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance A is started, that is, in the game state of right-handed hitting, three to four pending icons are always kept in stock. This assumes that there are. As a result, the period of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative pattern) of the decorative pattern is always set for a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a (that is, the frontmost side). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2.The number of reserved special drawings (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that they do not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the fluctuating icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in shape and color can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling globe icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectations are high, with the blue spherical icon having the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon having the lowest expectation of winning.

Icons other than these include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura coming out from the entire icon. The expected success rate of the icon of character A with a white aura and the expected success rate of the icon of character B with a white aura are the same as that of the white spherical icon. However, character A's icon and character B's icon are expected to be a hit in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven-colored (rainbow) aura (high chance of winning) is set high.

Next, to briefly explain the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, the second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, and has character figures (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ”) is formed three-dimensionally. The second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). The second movable accessory 15 can move from a state where it is stationary at a retracted position (home position), move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a, and come to rest at an advanced position (deployment position). (Second aspect) In other words, the second movable accessory 15 in the second mode is kept stationary so that the character figure is in a horizontal state, and the second movable accessory 15 that was stationary at the retreat position (home position) remains as it is. It simply moves downward in the posture of , and comes to a standstill at the advanced position (deployment position). Furthermore, the second movable accessory 15 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in the advanced position (deployed position) and can be stopped at any angle (third aspect). .

The second movable accessory 15 is moved between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position (deployed position) by a vertical movement motor (not shown) (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor), which is an electric drive source provided in the game board 2. Furthermore, the second movable accessory 15 can be moved clockwise or counterclockwise by a rotating motor (not shown) (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor) that is an electric drive source provided in the second movable accessory 15. It is now possible to rotate around.

In the game state of right-handed hitting, rhythmic win/loss notification effect A may be started. In a state where this rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A has been started, as shown in FIG. When the fluctuating display of decorative patterns is completed, the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are displayed. ) are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously), and accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state at high speed. When it comes to the changing display mode, as shown in FIG. (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (at the same time) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "1". That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the white spherical holding icon 9B is placed at the fourth holding display position 9Bd, and a total of four holding icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1", that is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd started moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and was placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state at high speed. When it comes to the changing display mode, as shown in FIG. (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (at the same time) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2". That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the white spherical holding icon 9B is placed at the fourth holding display position 9Bd, and a total of four holding icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2", that is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69(F), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state at high speed. When it comes to the changing display mode, as shown in FIG. (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (at the same time) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "1", and a win is notified. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously) at the same symbol number "1" without forming a reach or developing into a super reach. Ru. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 69(B) and (C) are not aligned to the same pattern and is reported to be out of alignment, and ), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned to the same pattern and the misalignment is reported, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIGS. 69(F) and (G) , and the timing at which the right decorative patterns 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced coincides.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69(H), the first premier background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as a background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the background image THG1 (here, , the underground image of the video), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed at the same number "1", are displayed. is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the image "Right hit" that was displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd arranged below are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. Note that the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a win has been confirmed.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 69(I). It advances (moves) from a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and Pause for a period of time (eg, 15 seconds).

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same as shown in FIG. The number "1", which is a symbol, appears again and is temporarily stopped, and furthermore, an indicator appears below the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. A specific image consisting of an image TB and a character CRC is displayed. To display a left part of the character CRC so as to cover a right part of the indicator image TB so as to be in front of the indicator image TB, and to further improve the visibility of a specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC. The specific image background image THG4 that can be displayed is suddenly switched from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier image THG3, and displayed on the display screen 7a. When the indicator image TB and the character CRC are composed of bright colors, the specific image background image THG4 may be a dark color (for example, in addition to gray or black, a color close to gray or black) It may be a single color, a combination of multiple dark colors, or an arrangement of effect images so as not to obstruct the visibility of a specific image. You can. Further, when the indicator image TB and the character CRC are composed of dark colors, the specific image background image THG4 mainly uses bright colors (for example, in addition to white, colors close to white). It may be a single color, a combination of a plurality of bright colors, or a structure in which effect images are arranged so as not to obstruct the visibility of a specific image.

The indicator image TB constituting the specific image visually and intuitively displays the remaining time by shortening the length of the horizontal bar image. In this embodiment, the maximum remaining time is 40 seconds. In other words, the state where the length of the bar image is displayed the longest (the state shown in FIG. 69(J)) is the maximum remaining time (40 seconds), and the specific image (indicator image TB) is displayed. When the countdown starts (timekeeping starts), the length of the bar image becomes shorter from right to left. The color of the bar image of the indicator image is a bright tone when the remaining time is the maximum (40 seconds), a dark tone when the remaining time is the minimum (zero seconds), and a dark tone when the remaining time is the maximum (40 seconds). This is a display mode (gradation display mode) in which the color tone changes stepwise (or continuously) from 0 to the minimum (zero seconds). Note that when the color of the bar image of the indicator image is changed stepwise, the display mode is such that the color tone changes darkly every second (gradation display mode). Further, when the color of the bar image of the indicator image is changed continuously, the display mode is such that the color tone changes darkly and smoothly (gradation display mode).

The character CRC constituting the specific image is a character B that may appear as a pending icon 9B and a variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC constituting the specific image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(K), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed until the remaining time becomes the minimum (zero seconds) according to the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image. is maintained in a temporarily stopped state with the same symbol (in this case, the number "1"). Of course, the character CRC constituting the specific image is also displayed.

Based on the fact that the remaining time is minimized (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB that constitutes the specific image (in other words, the remaining time is minimized (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB that constitutes the specific image ), and after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed for the purpose of displaying the final promotion result, a dedicated promotion background image THG6 that conveys the promotion confirmation is displayed, as shown in FIG. 69(L). is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the specific image background image THG4, and the indicator image TB and character CRC that make up the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the same pattern of numbers " The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily stopped and displayed at "1" are also hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position), advance (move) again toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and then reverse the movement. It rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), the first premier image ( A second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the promoted background image THG6, and the left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), then stopped and displayed, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A is completed. Note that the second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a winning has been confirmed, similar to the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that becomes the above-mentioned "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot") starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, The fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a again, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd, a variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. .

In addition, in FIG. 69(L), the promotion background image THG6, which is dedicated to convey promotion confirmation, is not switched from the specific image background image THG4 as the background image, and the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is changed to the specific image again. The indicator image TB and the character CRC that constitute the specific image were hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and were temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the number "1". The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69(I), the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the image display device. From a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above 7, it advances (moves) again towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a. , may be stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), the first premier image ( The first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (in this case, the number "1"), then stopped and displayed, and then confirmed. Then, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot" or "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot") starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd, a variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. .

In this way, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned to the same pattern and a miss is reported in FIGS. 69(B) and (C), and ( In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 69(D) and (E) are not aligned to the same pattern, and a deviation is reported. 69(D) and (E)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. 69(F) and (G) are aligned to the same pattern. The timing at which a win is announced (that is, the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 69(F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 The winning or losing results are announced every 3000 milliseconds (3000 milliseconds). The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced according to FIGS. 69(B) and (C) varies according to FIGS. 69(B) and (C). Although the time is the same as the variation time shown in FIGS. 69(D) and (E), and the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed since the start of the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In reality, the variation time from FIG. 69(F) to FIG. 69(M) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds).

In addition, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A, when a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed after the start of the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols, the winning/losing result is announced without forming a reach. Since it is possible to always notify, if the second special figure reservation is used one after another in the right-handed game state, the winning result will be announced for a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) ), the failure will be continuously notified. However, when a loss is continuously announced in such a rhythmic manner, a win is suddenly announced, making the player think that the fluctuation is also a loss. It is possible to make the person momentarily unaware that something has happened (in other words, an unexpected event occurs), making it possible to surprise and delight the person.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/lose notification performance A, as shown in FIG. When the number ``2'', number ``3'', number ``4'', number ``5'', number ``6'', number ``8'', or number ``9'' is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned ``16R'' (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot” or “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. In the "16R (substantially 13R) jackpot expected to pass V", as described above, the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible. Furthermore, in the case of the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, as described above, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern at the number "7", the above-mentioned It will be a “16 RV passing planned jackpot”. As mentioned above, in the "16 RV expected jackpot", the actual total number of rounds is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 69(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "1", after that, as shown in FIG. As shown in (I), by actuating the second movable accessory 15, the second movable accessory 15 changes from a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the image display device. By advancing (moving) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of No. 7 and toward the center position (advancing position) of the display screen 7a and stopping, the player feels a sense of expectation of a "16 RV passing planned jackpot". can be granted to At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16 RV expected jackpot", the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are considered to be the same pattern, as shown in FIG. 69(M). As shown in FIG. 69(L), the image is displayed from a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 before being stopped and displayed at the number "7". The display screen 7a of the device 7 is in front of the display screen 7a and is advanced (moved) again toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a and rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees). By stopping in this state, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16 RV passing expected jackpot". After that, as shown in FIG. 69(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "7", then stopped and displayed, and finally displayed. , informs the player of a ``16 RV expected jackpot''.

In other words, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a state in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7) as a first step. ), advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a and stops, and the second movable accessory 15 moves to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 as a second stage. From the stationary state, advance (move) again toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and move counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, The second movable accessory 15 is rotated by approximately 30 degrees and then stopped, allowing the second movable accessory 15 to move from the first stage to the second stage. There is a high level of interest in the operation of the second movable accessory 15, and the operation of the second movable accessory 15 causes the game to change from "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot" or "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot" to "16RV passing planned jackpot". It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A in this embodiment, a reach is formed when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed after the start of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols. Since the winning/losing result is always notified without fail, although the fluctuation time from Fig. 69(F) to Fig. 69(M) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), Fig. 69(F) and (G) The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced is based on the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 69(B) and (C) and the timing shown in FIGS. 69(D) and ( This is the same as the variation time according to E), and cannot be varied for a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative pattern. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time after subtracting this time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) to FIGS. 69(H) to 69(M) without fixing it to the above-mentioned time, It is possible to increase the variation of performances after a win is announced. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 allocates time for performing each of FIGS. 69(H) to 69(M) during the performance.

In addition, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance A in this embodiment, in FIG. 69(L), the promotion background image THG6 dedicated to conveying confirmation of promotion is not switched from the specific image background image THG4 as a background image, and the first premier image is returned to the background image THG6. (First rainbow background image THG3) is displayed in place of the specific image background image THG4, and the indicator image TB and character CRC that constitute the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a and have the same design. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", are again hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and further, as shown in FIG. 69(I). , the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and at a central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a. Instead of advancing (moving) toward the image display device 7, the device may remain stationary at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in FIG. 69(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, The right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "1"), then stopped and displayed, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot") starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd, a variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. .

In addition, in the rhythmic win/lose notification performance A, before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner, after the winning game state has occurred. It is now possible to execute an effect that displays a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state (a specific image consisting of an indicator image TB and a character CRC in FIGS. 69(J) and (K)). There is. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are not displayed in a winning manner, a specific game can be executed after a winning game state occurs. Since a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV passing planned jackpot") is displayed, if multiple decorative patterns derived and displayed by variable production (variable display) are displayed. As a result of being confirmed and displayed in a winning mode, if a specific game state does not occur (a jackpot game that is "16 RV passing expected jackpot" occurs), even if multiple decorative symbols are not confirmed and displayed in a winning mode. By displaying a specific image (in other words, in a state where multiple decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a win mode), the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16 RV expected jackpot") can be detected. It is possible to carry out the promotion effect of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/lose notification effect A (FIGS. 69(J), (K)), the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 that suggests a win, in FIGS. 69(H), (I) It is designed to be performed after the performance that displays. According to this configuration, first, the effects shown in FIGS. 69(H) and (I) give the player a sense of security by suggesting a win, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 69(H) and (I) The subsequent promotion effects shown in FIGS. 69(J) and 69(K) can arouse expectations for the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16 RV expected jackpot").

In addition, in the rhythmic win notification performance A (FIGS. 69(J) and (K)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner. Even in this state, it is possible to continue displaying the specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC. According to this configuration, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner, the specific image continues to be displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling that the display mode of the decorative pattern may change to another display mode, and it is possible to stimulate the player's sense of expectation regarding the change in the display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns. .

Furthermore, after the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A (FIGS. 69(J) and (K)), in FIG. 69(L), the indicator image TB and character CRC constituting the specific image are hidden from the display screen 7a. (disappeared), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", which are the same pattern, are again hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. 2. The movable accessory 15 is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and at the center of the display screen 7a (advance position). advance (move) again toward , rotate counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees), stop for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, When the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are the specific pattern number "7". '' is confirmed and displayed to notify the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is "16RV passing scheduled jackpot"). According to this configuration, when the specific image and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) displayed in a winning manner disappear, the movable body suddenly retreats. Since it moves from position to advanced position and appears, the movable body can create an impactful performance.Furthermore, when the movable body returns to the retreat position, a specific message will be displayed to notify the occurrence of a specific game state. Since multiple decorative symbols are all aligned and confirmed to be displayed on the number "7", which is the symbol, the promotion performance is successful due to the appearance of a movable object (occurrence of a specific game state is confirmed ("16 RV passing planned jackpot") It is possible to emphasize and convey to the player the certainty that a jackpot game will occur.

In addition, in rhythmic winning/losing notification performance A, the specific images composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC in FIGS. 69(J) and (K) are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multi This is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the decorative pattern) is confirmed and displayed in a winning manner. According to this configuration, since the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until multiple decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, in other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time (approximate time remaining until the promotion performance starts), it is possible to tell the time when the promotion performance will start (approximate time when the promotion performance will start). can be displayed.

[Rhythmic winning announcement performance B]
Next, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B will be explained with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining rhythmic win/loss notification effect B. Rhythmic win/lose notification performance B starts a fluctuating display (fluctuating display) of multiple decorative patterns all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) elapses, the display stops all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning/losing result. It is possible to perform a variable display effect of. In other words, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B is a variable display performance that rhythmically notifies the winning/losing result by notifying the winning/losing result after a predetermined period of time (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols. can be carried out.

The rhythmic winning/losing notification performance B in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Note that, when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image "right-handed hitting" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. In addition, if the image of "hitting right" becomes an eyesore in various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "hitting right" may be started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stationary display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode in which it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low to downward, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed.In addition, the sub-variation area may not have a background image; in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that the sub-variation area has an opaque small size. Only the fluctuation effects (fluctuation display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the expiration of the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 70(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special symbol reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that although both the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the fluctuation areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, other effect images is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. Note that the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image to be described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. (disappear).

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 from now on, and that the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd is digested, and then the 2. When the game ball enters the starting port 21, the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance B is started, that is, in the game state of right-handed hitting, three to four pending icons are always kept in stock. This assumes that there are. As a result, the period of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative pattern) of the decorative pattern is always set for a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a (that is, the frontmost side). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2.The number of reserved special drawings (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that they do not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation level is high, and the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation level of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation level of winning.

Icons other than these include a character A icon and a character B icon. The character A icon and the character B icon each have a white aura coming out of the entire icon. The expected success rate of the icon of character A with a white aura and the expected success rate of the icon of character B with a white aura are the same as that of the white spherical icon. However, character A's icon and character B's icon are expected to be a hit in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven-colored (rainbow) aura (high chance of winning) is set high.

Next, to briefly explain the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2, the first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long bar-shaped member that is movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). It is configured. The first movable accessory 14 is normally able to stand still at a retracted position (home position, see FIG. 1) to the left of the image display device 7 (first mode). The first movable accessory 14 moves from the retreat position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, and stops at an arbitrary advanced position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), or can move from the retreat position (home position) to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and then stand still (third mode). Furthermore, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position), and comes to rest at any advanced position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a ( (4th mode), or can move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the retreat position (home position) and then stand still (5th mode). In addition, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the third mode after being operated to the second mode, or may be operated directly to the third mode without going through the second mode. may be done. In addition, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the fourth mode after being operated to the third mode, or may be directly operated to the fifth mode without going through the fourth mode. may be done. Further, when the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a (that is, the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), other decorative members provided on the game board 2 A part of the first movable accessory 14 may be made difficult to see by covering a part of the first movable accessory 14, or by covering the first movable accessory 14 with other decorative members provided on the game board 2. By covering almost the entire object 14, almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be difficult to see, or the first movable accessory 14 may be in a retracted position (home position). Almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be easily visible as shown in FIG.

The first movable accessory 14 is moved between the retracted position (home position) and the right side of the display screen 7a ( It is now possible to move back and forth between the right end).

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, so that it can cover a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position (deployed position). It has become.

In the game state of right-handed hitting, rhythmic win/loss notification effect B may be started. In a state in which this rhythmic winning/losing notification effect B has been started, as shown in FIG. When the fluctuating display of decorative patterns is completed, the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are displayed. ) are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously), and accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd started moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and was placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. This brings the three pending icons into stock.

Next, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, and then change at high speed. When it comes to the changing display mode, as shown in FIG. (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "1". That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the white spherical holding icon 9B is placed at the fourth holding display position 9Bd, and a total of four holding icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1", that is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd started moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and was placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Next, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, and then change at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". The right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the white spherical holding icon 9B is placed at the fourth holding display position 9Bd, and a total of four holding icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2", that is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(F), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Next, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, and then change at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 70(G), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, for a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "1", and a win is notified. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously) at the same symbol number "1" without forming a reach or developing into a super reach. Ru. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 70(B) and 70(C) are not aligned to the same pattern and the deviation is reported, and the timing shown in FIGS. 70(D) and (E ), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned to the same pattern and the misalignment is notified, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C according to FIGS. 70(F) and (G) , and the timing at which the right decorative patterns 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced coincides.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70(H), the first premier background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as a background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the background image THG1 (here, , the underground image of the video), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed at the same number "1", are displayed. is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the image "Right hit" that was displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd arranged below are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. Note that the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a win has been confirmed.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 is displayed on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 70(I). From a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, it moves toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

After that, when the first movable accessory 14 completes moving to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern. The number "1" appears again and the display is temporarily stopped, and furthermore, in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a specific image consisting of the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin is displayed as a left decoration. The background image THG4 for the specific image, which is arranged and displayed on the front side of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and which can enhance the visibility of the specific image, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as the first premiere. The image THG3 is displayed after being switched from the first rainbow background image THG3. The specific image background image THG4 is a dark color (for example, gray or black) when the specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin is composed of bright colors. It consists mainly of colors close to gray and colors close to black), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple dark colors, and may have effects that do not impede the visibility of a specific image. It may be configured by arranging images. Further, when the specific image formed by attaching the character CRC to the front surface (front side) of the coin is expressed in dark colors, the background image THG4 for specific images is a bright color (for example, white). It is composed mainly of a color close to white (in addition to It may be configured.

The character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image starts from the lower right corner of the display screen 7a and moves along the lower side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 70(K). When it rolls counterclockwise toward the lower left corner of screen 7a and reaches the left side, it rolls counterclockwise along the left side toward the upper left corner of display screen 7a and reaches the top side. It rolls counterclockwise along the right side toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the right side, it then rolls counterclockwise along the right side toward the starting point, which is the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When it reaches the bottom, it stops rolling. In other words, the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls around the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, the time required for the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a (hereinafter referred to as "rolling time") is Now, it is 40 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image starts rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a, the countdown will start (time measurement will start). , the remaining time is indicated by the position where the coin is displayed.

The character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image is character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(L), the time it takes for the character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a (rolling time ) until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds), in other words, until the character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image finishes rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R remain temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (number "1" here).

Based on the fact that the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image has completed one rotation by rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a (in other words, the character CRC attached to the front surface of the coin constituting the specific image After the character CRC attached to the front surface (front) has finished rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a, a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) is performed for the purpose of displaying the final promotion result. 70(M), a special promotion background image THG6 that conveys promotion confirmation is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, replacing the specific image background image THG4, and the coins forming the specific image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The character CRC attached to the front surface (front) disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, FIG. ), the first movable accessory 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, takes a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) to retreat to the left side of the image display device 7. Move toward the position (home position).

When the first movable accessory 14 returns from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position (home position) over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in FIG. 70(N), , a second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) as a background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as a promoted background image. The display switches from THG6, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (in this case, the number "7") and are temporarily stopped and displayed, then stopped and displayed, and then displayed rhythmically. Win/lose notification performance B ends. Note that the second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a winning has been confirmed, similar to the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that becomes the above-mentioned "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot") starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, The fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd, a variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. .

In addition, in FIG. 70(M), the promotion background image THG6, which is dedicated to convey promotion confirmation, is not switched from the specific image background image THG4 as the background image, and the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is changed to the specific image again. The character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. The first movable accessory 14, which is stationary on the right side (right end) of the image display device 7, does not move toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, and remains on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. There are cases where the image display device 7 remains stationary on the right side (right end) and does not move at all toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in FIG. 70(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, The right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (in this case, the number "1"), then stopped and displayed, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot") starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd, a variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. .

In this way, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned to the same pattern and a miss is reported in FIGS. 70(B) and (C), and ( In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 70(D) and (E) are not aligned to the same pattern, and the deviation is reported. 70(D) and (E)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. 70(F) and (G) are aligned in the same pattern. The timing at which a win is announced (that is, the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 70(F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 The winning or losing results are announced every 3000 milliseconds (3000 milliseconds). The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced according to FIGS. 70(F) and (G) varies according to FIGS. 70(B) and (C). Although the time is the same as the variation time shown in FIGS. 70(D) and (E), and the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed since the start of the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative pattern. In reality, the variation time from FIG. 70(F) to FIG. 70(N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds).

In addition, in the rhythmic win/lose notification effect B, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed after the start of the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols, the win/lose result is announced without forming a reach. Since it is possible to always notify, if the second special figure reservation is used one after another in the right-handed game state, the win or loss result will be announced for a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) ), the failure will be continuously notified. However, when a loss is continuously announced in such a rhythmic manner, a win is suddenly announced, making the player think that the fluctuation is also a loss. It is possible to make the person momentarily unaware that something has happened (in other words, an unexpected event occurs), and to surprise and delight the person.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/lose notification performance B, as shown in FIG. When the number ``2'', number ``3'', number ``4'', number ``5'', number ``6'', number ``8'', or number ``9'' is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned ``16R'' (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot” or “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. In the "16R (substantially 13R) jackpot expected to pass V", as described above, the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible. Furthermore, in the case of the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, as described above, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(N), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern at the number "7", the above-mentioned It will be a “16 RV passing planned jackpot”. As mentioned above, in the "16 RV expected jackpot", the actual total number of rounds is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 70(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "1", after that, as shown in FIG. As shown in (I), by actuating the first movable accessory 14, the first movable accessory 14 changes from a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. By moving toward the right side (right end), it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16 RV passing expected jackpot". At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16 RV expected jackpot", the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are considered to be the same pattern, as shown in FIG. 70(N). Before being stopped and displayed at the number "7", the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the left side of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 70(M). By moving toward the retracted position (home position), it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16 RV passing planned jackpot". After that, as shown in FIG. 70(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "7", and then stopped and displayed for confirmation. , informs the player of a ``16 RV expected jackpot''.

In other words, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance B, the first movable accessory 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a as a first step. Then, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as a second stage. Since the first movable accessory 14 can operate in the first stage and then in the second stage, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14, and The operation of the movable accessory 14 gives the player a sense of expectation that the "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot" or "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot" will become the "16RV passing planned jackpot." be able to.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B in this embodiment, a reach is formed when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. Since the winning/losing result is always notified without fail, although the fluctuation time from Fig. 70 (F) to Fig. 70 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), Fig. 70 (F) and (G) The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced is based on the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 70(B) and (C) and the timing shown in FIGS. 70(D) and ( This is the same as the variation time according to E), and cannot be varied for a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative pattern. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time after subtracting this time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) to FIGS. 70(H) to 70(N) without fixing it to the above-mentioned time, It is possible to increase the variation of performances after a win is announced. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 allocates the time for performing each of FIGS. 70(H) to 70(N) during the performance.

In addition, in the rhythmic win notification performance B, before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner, after the winning game state has occurred. A first effect that displays a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state (a specific image consisting of a character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. 70(J) to (L)) is executed. It is now possible to do so. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are not displayed in a winning manner, a specific game can be executed after a winning game state occurs. Since a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV passing planned jackpot") is displayed, if multiple decorative patterns derived and displayed by variable effects (variable display) are displayed. If a specific game state does not occur as a result of being confirmed and displayed in a winning mode (a jackpot game that is a "16 RV expected jackpot" occurs), even if multiple decorative symbols are not confirmed and displayed in a winning mode. By displaying a specific image (in other words, in a state where multiple decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a win mode), the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "jackpot expected to pass through 16 RV") can be detected. It is possible to carry out the promotion effect of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the rhythmic win notification performance B (FIGS. 70(J) to (L)), the first rainbow background image THG3 which is the first premium background image THG3 that suggests a win in FIGS. 70(H) and (I) It is designed to be performed after the performance that displays. According to this configuration, first, the effects shown in FIGS. 70(H) and (I) give the player a sense of security by suggesting a win, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 70(H) and (I) The subsequent promotion performance shown in FIGS. 70(J) to (L) can arouse expectations for the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16 RV expected jackpot").

In addition, in the rhythmic win notification performance B (FIGS. 70(J) to (L)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner. Even in this state, it is possible to continue displaying a specific image consisting of the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin. According to this configuration, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner, the specific image continues to be displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling that the display mode of the decorative pattern may change to another display mode, and it is possible to stimulate the player's sense of expectation regarding the change in the display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns. .

In addition, after the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B (FIGS. 70 (J) to (L)), in FIG. 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. 70(I), the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has already disappeared. The first movable accessory 14, which is in a stationary state at the (right end), takes a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) to move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, and then moves for a predetermined time When the first movable accessory 14 returns from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) over a period of 15 seconds (for example, 15 seconds), a specific gaming state occurs ("16 RV passing scheduled"). Since multiple decorative symbols are all aligned and confirmed to be displayed on the number "7", which is a specific symbol that conveys the occurrence of a jackpot game that will result in a "jackpot", the success of the promotion effect (specific It is possible to emphasize and convey to the player the confirmation of the occurrence of the gaming state (the confirmation of the occurrence of the jackpot game that is the "16RV passing expected jackpot").

In addition, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance B, the specific images configured with the character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. 70(J) to (L) are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right This is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) is displayed in a winning manner. According to this configuration, since the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until multiple decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, in other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time (approximate time remaining until the promotion performance starts), it is possible to tell the time when the promotion performance will start (approximate time when the promotion performance will start). can be displayed.

[Rhythmic winning/losing announcement performance C]
Next, the rhythmic win/lose notification effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C. Rhythmic win/lose notification performance C starts the fluctuating display (fluctuating display) of multiple decorative patterns all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) elapses, the display stops all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning/losing result. It is possible to perform a variable display effect of. In other words, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C is a variable display performance that rhythmically notifies the winning/losing result by notifying the winning/losing result after a predetermined period of time (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols has elapsed. can be carried out.

The rhythmic win/loss notification performance C in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Note that, when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image "right-handed hitting" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. In addition, if the image of "hitting right" becomes an eyesore in various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "hitting right" may be started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are displayed in a display mode that rotates in the following order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stationary display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode in which it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low to downward, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed. Note that the sub-variation area may not have a background image; in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that the sub-variation area has an opaque small size. Only the variable effects (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the expiration of the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 71(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special symbol reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the fluctuation areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, other effect images is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. Note that the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image to be described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. (disappear).

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 from now on, and that the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd is digested, and then the 2. When the game ball enters the starting port 21, the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C is started, that is, in the right-handed game state, three to four pending icons are always kept in stock. This assumes that there are. As a result, the period of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative pattern) of the decorative pattern is always set for a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the closest side of the display screen 7a (that is, at the forefront). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative design fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2.The number of reserved special drawings (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that they do not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation level is high, and the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation level of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation level of winning.

Icons other than these include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura coming out from the entire icon. The expected success rate of the icon of character A with a white aura and the expected success rate of the icon of character B with a white aura are the same as that of the white spherical icon. However, character A's icon and character B's icon are expected to be a hit in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven-colored (rainbow) aura (high chance of winning) is set high.

Next, to briefly explain the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2, the first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long bar-shaped member that is movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). It is configured. The first movable accessory 14 is normally able to stand still at a retracted position (home position, see FIG. 1) to the left of the image display device 7 (first mode). The first movable accessory 14 moves from the retreat position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, and stops at an arbitrary advanced position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), or can move from the retreat position (home position) to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and then stand still (third mode). Furthermore, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position), and comes to rest at any advanced position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a ( (4th mode), or can move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the retreat position (home position) and then stand still (5th mode). In addition, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the third mode after being operated to the second mode, or may be operated directly to the third mode without going through the second mode. may be done. In addition, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to the fourth mode after being operated to the third mode, or may be directly operated to the fifth mode without going through the fourth mode. may be done. Further, when the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a (that is, the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), other decorative members provided on the game board 2 A part of the first movable accessory 14 may be made difficult to see by covering a part of the first movable accessory 14, or by covering the first movable accessory 14 with other decorative members provided on the game board 2. By covering almost the entire object 14, almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be difficult to see, or the first movable accessory 14 may be in a retracted position (home position). Almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be easily visible as shown in FIG.

The first movable accessory 14 is moved between the retracted position (home position) and the right side of the display screen 7a ( It is now possible to move back and forth between the right end).

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, so that it can cover a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position (deployed position). It has become.

In the gaming state of right-handed hitting, rhythmic win/loss notification performance C may be started. In a state in which this rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C has started, as shown in FIG. When the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is completed, the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are displayed. ) are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously), and accordingly, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Next, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, and then change at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 71(C), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, for a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "1". That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the white spherical holding icon 9B is placed at the fourth holding display position 9Bd, and a total of four holding icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1", that is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd started moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and was placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three pending icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 71(E), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, for a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (at the same time) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". The right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the white spherical holding icon 9B is placed at the fourth holding display position 9Bd, and a total of four holding icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern is 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2", that is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously). At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71(F), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed all at once. (At the same time) it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B placed at the 2nd hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the 3rd hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the 3rd hold display position 9Bd. In this state, the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. This brings the three pending icons into stock.

Next, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, and then change at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 71(G), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, for a predetermined period of time (fixed period of time: 3 (seconds (3000 milliseconds)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "1", and a win is notified. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously) at the same symbol number "1" without forming a reach or developing into a super reach. Ru. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIGS. 71(B) and 71(C) are not aligned to the same pattern and is reported to be out of alignment, and ), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned to the same pattern and the misalignment is reported, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C according to FIGS. 71(F) and (G) , and the timing at which the right decorative patterns 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced coincides.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 71(H), the first premier background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as a background image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, and the background image THG1 (here, , the underground image of the video), this triggers the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1" which is the same pattern. is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the image "Right hit" that was displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd arranged below are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. Note that the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a win has been confirmed.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 is displayed on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 71(I). From a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, it moves toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

After that, when the first movable accessory 14 completes moving to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, as shown in FIG. 71(J). When the number "1" appears again, the coin is temporarily stopped and displayed, and furthermore, a character CRC is added to the surface (front) of the coin in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and a part of the character CRC is covered. A specific image constituted by the countdown image NJ arranged as shown in FIG. The available specific image background image THG4 is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, replacing the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier image THG3. The specific image background image THG4 is a specific image in which a character CRC is attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin and a countdown image NJ is placed so as to partially cover the character CRC, and the specific image is configured in a bright color. When it is expressed, it is composed mainly of dark colors (e.g., gray, black, colors close to gray or colors close to black), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple dark colors. The effect images may be arranged so as not to obstruct the visibility of the specific image. In addition, the specific image background image THG4 is a specific image in which a character CRC is attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin and a countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC. When it is expressed as a color, it is composed mainly of bright colors (for example, white or a color close to white), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple bright colors. , the effect images may be arranged so as not to obstruct the visibility of the specific image.

Specifically, a specific image consisting of a character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ placed so as to cover a part of the character CRC is A character CRC is attached, and a countdown image NJ is placed on the lower side of the front surface (front) of the coin so as to partially cover the character CRC.

Here, for coins that make up a specific image, a vertical line passing through the top and bottom points of the coin (hereinafter simply referred to as "the vertical line of the coin that makes up the specific image"), and the leftmost point of the coin. and the rightmost point (hereinafter simply referred to as the "horizontal line of the coins constituting the specific image") intersect with the center point (hereinafter simply referred to as the "center point").

In addition, regarding the countdown image NJ, a numerical image counting down (timekeeping) is displayed in a circular shape, and a vertical line passing through the top and bottom points of the circular shape (hereinafter simply "specific image The vertical line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the image NJ) and the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image match. In addition, regarding the countdown image NJ, a horizontal line passing through the leftmost point and rightmost point of the circular shape (hereinafter simply referred to as "horizontal line of the countdown image NJ that makes up the specific image") and the coin that makes up the specific image. The horizontal lines do not match, but are parallel, and the horizontal line passing through the leftmost point and the rightmost point of the circular shape is located below the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image.

The character CRC attached to the front side of the coin that makes up the specific image rotates counterclockwise or clockwise around the center point, and such rotation is repeated. The display mode is such that the character CRC also oscillates in conjunction with the oscillation of the coin. On the other hand, the countdown image NJ, which constitutes a specific image placed so as to cover a part of the character CRC, is placed on the surface (front) of the coin, but unlike the character CRC, it is linked to the coin's movement. When the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point instead of swinging, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that makes up the specific image moves to the left of the vertical line of the coin that makes up the specific image. When the coin moves in parallel and rotates clockwise around the center point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ forming the specific image moves in parallel to the right of the vertical line of the coin forming the specific image.

Even if the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that makes up the specific image moves parallel to the left or right of the vertical line of the coin that makes up the specific image, the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ that makes up the specific image and the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ that makes up the specific image do not form the specific image. The distance dimension between the horizontal line of the coin and the horizontal line does not change. In other words, the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image simply moves horizontally to the left when the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, and simply moves to the right when the coin rotates clockwise around the center point. It is designed to move horizontally to .

The number image displayed within the circular shape in the countdown image NJ is a number image for counting down (timekeeping), and in this embodiment, it is 40 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the front side (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image and the countdown image NJ are displayed on the display screen 7a, the countdown starts (timekeeping starts). , the remaining time is represented by a number image counted down (timed) in the countdown image NJ.

The character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin constituting the specific image is character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 71(K) and (L), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed until the number image counted down (timed) reaches zero seconds in the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image. , the right decorative pattern 8R remains temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (in this case, the number "1").

Based on the fact that the number image counted down (timed) in the countdown image NJ that makes up the specific image reaches zero seconds (in other words, the number image that is counted down (timed) in the countdown image NJ that makes up the specific image becomes zero seconds and a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses for the purpose of displaying the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 71(M), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 that conveys the promotion confirmation is displayed is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the specific image background image THG4, and the character CRC and countdown image NJ attached to the front surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, and the screen is temporarily stopped. The displayed left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. 71(I), they have already stopped on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 in this state moves toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

When the first movable accessory 14 returns from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position (home position) over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in FIG. 71(N), , a second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) as a background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as a promoted background image. The display switches from THG6, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (in this case, the number "7") and are temporarily stopped and displayed, then stopped and displayed, and then displayed rhythmically. The winning/losing notification effect C ends. Note that the second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a winning has been confirmed, similar to the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that becomes the above-mentioned "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot") starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, The fourth pending display position 9Bd and the pending icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd, a variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. .

In addition, in FIG. 71(M), the promotion background image THG6, which is dedicated to convey promotion confirmation, is not switched from the specific image background image THG4 as the background image, and the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is changed to the specific image again. The character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. The first movable accessory 14, which is stationary on the right side (right end) of the image display device 7, does not move toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, and remains on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. There are cases where the image display device 7 remains stationary on the right side (right end) and does not move at all toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in FIG. 71(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, The right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (in this case, the number "1"), then stopped and displayed, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" or "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot") starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd, a variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started. .

In this way, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance C, the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned to the same pattern and a miss is reported in FIGS. 71(B) and (C), and ( In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to FIGS. 71(D) and (E) are not aligned to the same pattern, and a misalignment is notified. 71(D) and (E)), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. 71(F) and (G) are aligned to the same pattern. The timing at which a win is announced (that is, the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 71(F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 The winning or losing results are announced every 3000 milliseconds (3000 milliseconds). The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced according to FIGS. 71(F) and (G) varies according to FIGS. 71(B) and (C). Although the time is the same as the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 71(D) and (E), and it is a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern. In reality, the variation time from FIG. 71(F) to FIG. 71(N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds).

In addition, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C, when a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed after the start of the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols, the winning/losing result is announced without forming a reach. Since it is possible to always notify, if the second special figure reservation is used one after another in the right-handed game state, the win or loss result will be announced for a predetermined period of time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) ), the failure will be continuously reported. However, when a loss is continuously announced in such a rhythmic manner, a win is suddenly announced, making the player think that the fluctuation is also a loss. It is possible to make the person momentarily unaware that something has happened (in other words, an unexpected event occurs), and to surprise and delight the person.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/lose notification effect C, as shown in FIG. When the number ``2'', number ``3'', number ``4'', number ``5'', number ``6'', number ``8'', or number ``9'' is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned ``16R'' (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot” or “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. In the "16R (substantially 13R) jackpot expected to pass V", as described above, the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible. Furthermore, in the case of the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, as described above, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(N), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern at the number "7", the above-mentioned It will be a “16 RV passing planned jackpot”. As mentioned above, in the "16 RV expected jackpot", the actual total number of rounds is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), so that passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 71(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "1", after that, as shown in FIG. As shown in (I), by actuating the first movable accessory 14, the first movable accessory 14 changes from a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. By moving toward the right side (right end), it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16 RV passing expected jackpot". At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16 RV expected jackpot", the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are considered to be the same pattern, as shown in FIG. 71(N). Before being stopped and displayed at the number "7", the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the left side of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 71(M). By moving toward the retracted position (home position), it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a "16 RV passing planned jackpot". After that, as shown in FIG. 71(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "7", and then stopped and displayed for confirmation. , informs the player of a ``16 RV expected jackpot''.

In other words, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance C, the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a from a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as a first step. Then, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as a second step. Since the first movable accessory 14 can operate in the first stage and then in the second stage, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14, and The operation of the movable accessory 14 gives the player a sense of expectation that the "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot" or "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot" will become the "16RV passing planned jackpot." be able to.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C in this embodiment, a reach is formed when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed after the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. Since the winning/losing result is always notified without fail, although the fluctuation time from Fig. 71 (F) to Fig. 71 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), Fig. 71 (F) and (G) The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern and a hit is announced is based on the fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 71(B) and (C) and the timing shown in FIGS. 71(D) and ( This is the same as the variation time according to E), and cannot be varied for a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the start of the variation presentation (variation display) of the decorative pattern. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time after subtracting this time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) to FIGS. 71(H) to 71(N) without fixing it to the above-mentioned time, It is possible to increase the variation of performances after a win is announced. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 allocates time for performing each of FIGS. 71(H) to 71(N) during the performance.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/lose notification performance C, before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner, after the winning game state has occurred. In the first effect (FIGS. 71 (J) to (L)) that displays a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a specific gaming state, a character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a part of the character CRC is covered. A specific image configured by arranging countdown images NJ) can be executed. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are not displayed in a winning manner, a specific game can be executed after a winning game state occurs. Since a specific image that suggests the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV passing planned jackpot") is displayed, if multiple decorative patterns derived and displayed by variable effects (variable display) are displayed. If a specific game state does not occur as a result of being confirmed and displayed in a winning mode (a jackpot game that is a "16 RV expected jackpot" occurs), even if multiple decorative symbols are not confirmed and displayed in a winning mode. By displaying a specific image (in other words, in a state where multiple decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a win mode), the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "jackpot expected to pass through 16 RV") can be detected. It is possible to carry out the promotion effect of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, in the rhythmic win notification performance C (FIGS. 71(J) to (L)), the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 that suggests a win, in FIGS. 71(H) and (I) It is designed to be performed after the performance that displays. According to this configuration, first, the effects shown in FIGS. 71(H) and (I) give the player a sense of security by suggesting a win, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 71(H) and (I) The subsequent promotion performance shown in FIGS. 71(J) to (L) can arouse expectations for the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16 RV expected jackpot").

In addition, in the rhythmic win notification performance C (FIGS. 71(J) to (L)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner. Even in this state, it is possible to continue displaying a specific image consisting of a character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged so as to partially cover the character CRC. It has become. According to this configuration, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning manner, the specific image continues to be displayed. It is possible to give the player a feeling that the display mode of the decorative pattern may change to another display mode, and it is possible to stimulate the player's sense of expectation regarding the change in the display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns. .

In addition, after the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C (FIGS. 71 (J) to (L)), in FIG. 71 (M), the character CRC and countdown image attached to the front side of the coin constituting the specific image are shown. NJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. 71(I), the image display device 7 The first movable accessory 14, which is stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, takes a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) to move toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. When the first movable accessory 14 moves and returns again from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), a specific game state occurs. (The occurrence of a jackpot game that is a jackpot scheduled to pass through 16RV) Since the number "7", which is a specific symbol that conveys the message, all the decorative symbols are displayed as a set, promotion due to the appearance of movable objects The success of the performance (the confirmation of the occurrence of a specific game state (the confirmation of the occurrence of a jackpot game that is ``16 RV passing expected jackpot'')) can be emphasized and communicated to the player.

Furthermore, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C, the character CRC is attached to the front surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. 71 (J) to (L), and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to partially cover the character CRC. The specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner. . According to this configuration, since the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until multiple decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, in other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time (approximate time remaining until the promotion performance starts), it is possible to tell the time when the promotion performance will start (approximate time when the promotion performance will start). can be displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the rhythmic win/loss notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to notify the winning or losing result of "win" or "miss" in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A shown in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B shown in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C shown in FIG. 71. It is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns), and a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern. The left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time without forming a reach for each variable display of 8R (a set of decorative symbols) to display the winning or losing results. The first performance to notify (Figures 69 (B) to (G) for rhythmic winning/losing notification performance A, Figures 70 (B) to (G) for rhythmic winning/losing notification performance B, and Figure 71 (B) for rhythmic winning/losing notification performance C ~(G)) can now be executed in the so-called right-handed game state (specific game state), which is different from the normal game state, instead of being executed in the so-called left-handed game state (normal game state). . According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern do not form a reach for each variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). The symbols 8R (a set of decorative symbols) can be temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time to rhythmically notify the winning or losing results. As a result, when a loss is continuously announced in such a rhythmic manner, for example, the player is made to think that the fluctuation is also a loss, and then suddenly a win is announced, making it difficult for the player to In contrast, it is possible to make the person momentarily unaware of what has happened (in other words, an unexpected event occurs), making it possible to surprise and delight the person. It is possible to perform a variable display of such an unprecedented and innovative left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern, thereby reducing monotony caused by fluctuations in the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern. I am now able to contribute to this. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C in FIG. 71 are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the time from the start of the variable display using the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) to the notification of the winning or losing result of "hit" or "miss", left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decoration It is not changed for each variable display of the symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) and is a constant time. According to this configuration, the winning/losing result of "win" or "missing" is notified at regular intervals, so that the winning/losing result can be known rhythmically.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C in FIG. 71 are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time to notify "lost" as a winning result, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R ( A set of decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and a "win" is announced as a winning or losing result. According to this configuration, for each variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right If the decorative symbols 8R (a set of decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time and the winning/losing result is announced, it will be either a "win" or "missing", so the winning/losing result will be continuously announced rhythmically as a winning/losing result. It is now possible to suddenly announce a win while making the player think that the fluctuation is also a loss. As a result, it is possible to realize a mode in which a win is suddenly announced when a loss is continuously and rhythmically announced, so that a win is suddenly announced when you think that the fluctuation is also a loss. By doing so, it is possible to make the player momentarily unaware of what has happened (in other words, an unexpected event occurs), which can contribute to increasing the surprise of winning.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A shown in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B shown in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C shown in FIG. (the second movable accessory 15 in the rhythmic win/lose notification performance A, the first movable accessory 14 in the rhythmic win/lose notification performance B, and the first movable accessory 14 in the rhythmic win/lose notification performance C), When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time and a hit is announced as a winning result, the movable body is moved to the first hit. (In the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position in FIG. 69(I), and in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B, the second aspect is shown in FIG. 70(I). 71 ( In I), the first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds). It has become. In this embodiment, as described above, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, which are movable bodies, include the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns ) are aligned in the same pattern and activated during the temporary stop display, compared to when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated, the game is more likely to be played than among the multiple winning types. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the player will win and receive a profit. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As a result, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are reporting a hit as a winning or losing result, the first movable accessory 14, which is a movable body, and the second movable accessory By making the player pay close attention to whether or not the movable accessory 15 is activated, it is possible to make the player look forward to whether or not he will be promoted to a winning position that will give him a profit.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second performance in the rhythmic win notification performance A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win notification performance B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win notification performance C in FIG. In the third effect (rhythmic win notification effect A) that operates in a second winning mode different from the winning mode (in FIG. ) and then stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). 71 (L) in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C, in which the player moves from the right end) to the retreat position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) (fifth mode). 1. The movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds). 5 aspects)). In this embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, which are movable objects, are, as described above, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of sets of decorative patterns). ) are aligned in the same pattern and activated during the temporary stop display, compared to when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated, the game is more likely to be played than among the multiple winning types. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the player will win and receive a profit. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. In a state in which a win is reported as a winning result, after the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, which are movable bodies, are activated and become the first winning mode, the movable body is activated again. By making the player pay close attention to whether or not the winning result has been won, the movable body can operate in two stages while the winning result is being announced, providing the player with an unprecedented effect. It is possible to make the player expect whether or not he or she will be promoted based on the win that gives him or her a profit.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first performance in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C in FIG. This includes an effect of simultaneously stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). According to this configuration, after the third performance in which the movable body operates in the second winning mode different from the first winning mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, The right decorative symbols 8R (a set of decorative symbols) can be simultaneously stopped and displayed to notify whether or not to be promoted.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the rhythmic win/lose notification effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The rhythmic win/loss notification performance A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C in FIG. 71 were performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. . In other words, it was performed in a so-called right-handed game state (a specific game state different from the normal game state). However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In other words, the game may be performed in a so-called left-handed game state (normal game state).

[Modification 2]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C of FIG. 71, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, The result of winning or losing with the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple sets of decorative patterns) was reported. However, the winning/losing results may include a "small win" in addition to a "win" or "miss". In this way, it is possible to increase the variations displayed as winning or losing results, and the player can be informed whether the winning is a "win" or "small win" by displaying the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed. It is possible to draw attention to the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple sets of decorative patterns).

[Modification 3]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C of FIG. 71, the appearance of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 as the final promotion result Due to the success of the promotion effect using , the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern with the number "7", and then " The players were informed that a jackpot game with a jackpot expected to pass 16RV would occur. However, even if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 appear, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (plurality of decorative patterns) are identical with the number "7". The symbols do not advance together (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R (multiple decorative symbols) do not switch from the number "1" to the number "7" when they are aligned in the same symbol. ), and then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are arranged in the same pattern of the number "7". You may also do so. In this way, you can increase the variety of performances.

[Modification 4]
In the rhythmic win notification performance A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win notification performance B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win notification performance C of FIG. (Display screen 7a) and the remaining time until the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed as the same pattern (in other words, in a winning manner). (approximate time remaining). At this time, the remaining time (approximate time) may be expressed by, for example, a voice saying "5 seconds left" from the speaker 67. In this way, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) can be communicated to the player using the specific image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the sound played from the speaker 67, and the remaining time can be communicated to the player. (approximate remaining time) can be easily grasped.

[Modification 5]
In the rhythmic win notification performance A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win notification performance B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win notification performance C of FIG. (Display screen 7a) and the remaining time until the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed as the same pattern (in other words, in a winning manner). (approximate time remaining). However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a, and a specific image may be displayed on the transparent light guide plate. In this case, since there is a limit to the number of images that can be displayed on the light guide plate, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) is not communicated on the light guide plate every second that elapses, so for example, "15 seconds remaining", ""5 seconds remaining" and "0 seconds remaining" are displayed. By arranging multiple full-color LEDs around a transparent light guide plate, the color changes each time the remaining time (approximate remaining time) becomes shorter due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs.For example, "15 seconds remaining" can be displayed brightly. It is also possible to display it in white, "5 seconds remaining" in bright blue, and "0 seconds remaining" in red. Even if the remaining time (approximate remaining time) appears in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 6]
In the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning/losing alert effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning/losing alert effect C of FIG. 71, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle Even when the decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (that is, in a winning manner), a specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC is displayed. This continues until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds) according to the bar image of the indicator image TB, and in FIGS. Even when decorative patterns 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (in other words, in a winning manner), a specific image consisting of a character CRC attached to the front surface (front) of the coin can be displayed. , the specific image (the character CRC attached to the front surface of the coin) continues to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a until the time for one revolution (rolling time) reaches the minimum remaining time (zero seconds). In FIGS. 71(J) to (L) of the rhythmic winning notification performance C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are aligned in the same pattern (that is, it is a winning pattern). The countdown image NJ is used to display a specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the front surface (front side) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged so as to partially cover the character CRC. The countdown continued until the number image reached zero seconds. However, the display of the specific image may be ended before the zero second (any time from when the time is counted until the zero second is reached). In this case, a dedicated promotion background image THG6 that conveys promotion confirmation is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, replacing the specific image background image THG4 that can increase the visibility of the specific image, and the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a. , the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance A, the second movable accessory 15 is moved above the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, advance (move) counterclockwise again toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a. It rotates by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In addition, in the rhythmic win/fall notification performance B and the rhythmic win/fall notification performance C, in FIG. 70 (I) or FIG. The movable accessory 14 moves toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds). In this way, the second movable accessory 15 and the first movable accessory 14 will suddenly advance before the zero second (any time from when the clock is counted until the zero second reaches), and the promotion effect will be activated. The occurrence can be emphasized as an impactful performance. Note that the sub-control board 90 determines the arbitrary time from when the clock is counted until it reaches zero seconds.

[Modification 7]
The character CRC of the specific image in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C in FIG. It had become. That is, the character B, which may appear as the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appeared on the display screen 7a as the character CRC of the specific image. However, the character CRC of the specific image may be a promotion effect character that appears only in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effects A to C, or it may be a character for the promotion effect that appears when a so-called premiere image is displayed in the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect. It may also appear in A to C. In either case, since the character is rarely seen, it can contribute to further enhancing the performance effects of the rhythmic win/loss notification performances A to C.

[Modification 8]
Rhythmic win/loss notification performance A in FIG. 69, rhythmic win/loss notification performance B in FIG. 70, and rhythmic win/loss notification performance C in FIG. The assumption was that four pending icons were kept in stock. This right-handed game state includes a state where the player shifts to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state where the player shifts to a so-called b-time saver (play time). In this right-handed game state, with three to four pending icons always in stock, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. If the display mode changes at a high speed by changing from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (simultaneously), the display mode will change rapidly from an opaque state to a translucent state. The decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) Immediately before the elapse of time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decoration The pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R were stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). In this way, in the game state of right-handed hitting, with three to four pending icons always in stock, the period from the start of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols until it is stopped (stop display of decorative symbols) The period of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern was always the above-mentioned predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). However, in the right-handed game state, regardless of the number of reserved icons in stock, the fluctuation of decorative symbols from the start of the fluctuating display (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols until it stops (stop display of decorative symbols) The period of the effect (fluctuating display) may always be set to the above-mentioned predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

[Modification 9]
Rhythmic win/loss notification performance A shown in FIG. 69, rhythmic win/loss notification performance B shown in FIG. 70, and rhythmic win/loss notification performance C shown in FIG. You can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a set of decorative symbols capable of informing winning or losing results,
The normal game is played without executing the first performance in the normal gaming state of notifying the winning or losing result by temporarily stopping displaying the set of decorative symbols at the same time without forming a reach for each variable display of the set of decorative symbols. executable in a specific gaming state different from the state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
In the first performance, the time from when the fluctuating display of the set of decorative symbols is started until the winning/losing result is announced is a constant time that is not varied for each fluctuating display of the set of decorative symbols. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-2,
The first performance is a performance in which the set of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time to notify a loss as a win or loss result, and a performance in which the set of decorative symbols are displayed in a temporary stop at the same time to notify a win as a win or loss result. including directing,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
It has a movable body operated by an electric drive source,
In a state in which the set of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed simultaneously by the first performance and a win is notified as a win/loss result, a second performance in which the movable body is operated in the first winning mode can be executed. is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to perform a third effect in which the movable body is operated in a second winning mode different from the first winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-5,
The first performance includes simultaneously stopping and displaying the set of decorative symbols that have already been temporarily stopped and displayed after the third performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, decorative symbol competition effects A to C will be explained using FIGS. 72 to 74. This decorative symbol competition presentation is executed during the special symbol variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern competition performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative design competition performance A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition performance A. This decorative symbol competition performance A is a performance performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative pattern competition effect A, as shown in FIG. 72(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a jackpot or not. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when decorative patterns having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also referred to as a double-digit pattern. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the double-digit pattern, it becomes a missed pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), jackpot symbol display performance A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect A, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the first jackpot symbol XC1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are even-numbered square symbols, and are a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a time-saving gaming state after a jackpot. The ally character CRA is displayed stopped at the left position of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), jackpot symbol display effect B is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance B, the display of the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 continues on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed below the first jackpot symbol XC1. In the second jackpot pattern XC2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are odd-numbered zero-numbered patterns, and the second jackpot pattern XC2 is a jackpot pattern that suggests entering a variable probability gaming state after a jackpot. That is, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a jackpot symbol display performance C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display production C, a production is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the second jackpot symbol XC2. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side part.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), a jackpot symbol display performance D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance D, a first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position before approaching the ally character CRA, and a second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA so as to be replaced. In other words, an effect is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the first jackpot symbol XC1. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side part.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), a jackpot symbol display performance E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance E, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is thrown out of the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed on the display screen. The display is stopped at approximately the center of 7a.

[Decorative design competition performance B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition performance B. This decorative symbol competition performance B is a performance performed during one variation of the special symbol. In decorative pattern competition presentation B, as shown in FIG. 73(A), first, a decorative pattern variation presentation is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a jackpot or not. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when decorative patterns having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also referred to as a double-digit pattern. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the double-digit pattern, it becomes a missed pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), jackpot symbol display performance A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance A, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the first jackpot symbol XC1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are even-numbered square symbols, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entry into a time-saving gaming state after a jackpot. The ally character CRA is displayed stopped at the left position of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), jackpot symbol display performance B is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance B, the display of the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 continues on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed below the first jackpot symbol XC1. In the second jackpot symbol XC2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are odd-numbered zero-numbered symbols, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entry into a variable probability gaming state after a jackpot. That is, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), a jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display production C, a production is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the second jackpot symbol XC2. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side part.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), a jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance D, a first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position before approaching the ally character CRA, and a second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA so as to be replaced. In other words, an effect is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the first jackpot symbol XC1. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side part.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), a jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. This jackpot symbol display performance E is a performance in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide. Specifically, the lower side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the upper side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide, or the positions of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are swapped, and the first jackpot symbol The upper side of the jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the lower side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, and the right side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the right side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, and the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide. The vehicle may collide with the right side of the vehicle. In addition, when the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide as shown in FIG. 73(F), the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 The corresponding three decorative patterns collide with each other. For example, the decorative pattern on the left side of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the decorative pattern on the left side of the second jackpot pattern XC2 collide.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), a jackpot symbol display performance F is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect F, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is thrown out of the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed on the display screen. An effect is performed in which the image is expanded so as to protrude from 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), a jackpot symbol display performance G is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect G, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is reduced and stopped and displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design competition performance C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern competition effect C. This decorative symbol competition performance C is a performance performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative pattern competition performance C, as shown in FIG. 74(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Here, each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a jackpot or not. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when decorative patterns having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot pattern. A state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are stopped and displayed is also referred to as a double-digit pattern. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the double-digit pattern, it becomes a missed pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), jackpot symbol display performance A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance A, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the first jackpot symbol XC1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are even-numbered square symbols, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entry into a time-saving gaming state after a jackpot. The ally character CRA is displayed stopped at the left position of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), jackpot symbol display performance B is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance B, the display of the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 continues on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed below the first jackpot symbol XC1. In the second jackpot symbol XC2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are odd-numbered zero-numbered symbols, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entry into a variable probability gaming state after a jackpot. That is, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), a jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display production C, a production is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the second jackpot symbol XC2. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side part.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance D, a first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position before approaching the ally character CRA, and a second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA so as to be replaced. In other words, an effect is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA more than the first jackpot symbol XC1. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side part.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), a jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance E, the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are rotated so that the side parts face the front so that the front parts are not visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), a jackpot symbol display performance F is performed. This jackpot symbol display performance F is a performance in which a first jackpot symbol XC1 and a second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other with their side parts facing the front so that the front part cannot be seen. Specifically, the lower side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the upper side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide, or the positions of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are swapped, and the first jackpot symbol The upper side of the jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the lower side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, and the right side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the right side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, and the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide. The vehicle may collide with the right side of the vehicle. In addition, when the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide as shown in FIG. 74(G), the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 The corresponding three decorative patterns collide with each other. For example, the decorative pattern on the left side of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the decorative pattern on the left side of the second jackpot pattern XC2 collide.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), a jackpot symbol display performance G is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance G, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is thrown out of the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed in front of the screen. The screen is stopped and displayed approximately at the center of the display screen 7a with the side portions facing forward so that the portions are not visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), a jackpot symbol display performance H is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance H, a performance is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is enlarged so as to protrude from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), jackpot symbol display effect I is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance I, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is reduced in size and stopped and displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a.

[Modified example]
In the above decorative pattern competition performance C, in the jackpot pattern display performance G, three decorative patterns of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2 are respectively displayed, and their front parts are The vehicle collided with its side facing forward so that it could not be seen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used. The three decorative patterns of the first jackpot pattern XC1 are arranged toward the back side so as to be hidden by one decorative pattern, and the three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2 are arranged so as to be hidden by one decorative pattern. Arranged toward the back side, that is, from the player's perspective, one of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and one of the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2. One decorative pattern is arranged so as to be mainly visible, and from that state, the decorative pattern of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the decorative pattern of the second jackpot pattern XC2 are arranged so that the corresponding decorative patterns are They may also collide. In this case, the player selects one of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 that is displayed in front, and one of the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol It is visible that the two decorative symbols collide with each other, but the two decorative symbols on the back side of the decorative symbol displayed in the front in the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the two decorative symbols displayed in the front in the second jackpot symbol XC2 are visible. The structure is such that the collision between the two decorative patterns on the back side of the decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can place one decorative symbol displayed in front of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and one decorative symbol displayed in front of the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2. Along with the collision of one displayed decorative pattern, two decorative patterns on the back side of the decorative pattern displayed in the front in the first jackpot pattern XC1 and the one displayed in the front in the second jackpot pattern XC2. The collision between the two decorative patterns on the back side of the decorative pattern may be made visible from an oblique direction.

In the above decorative symbol competition productions A to C, a production is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the second jackpot symbol XC2, but in this case, the first jackpot symbol It may be displayed so as to be located in front of the jackpot symbol XC2 of 2. In addition, on the contrary, the second jackpot symbol XC2 may be displayed so as to be located closer to the front than the first jackpot symbol XC1.
In addition, in the above-mentioned decorative symbol competition productions A to C, a production is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA more than the first jackpot symbol XC1, but in this case, the second jackpot symbol XC2 may be displayed so as to be located closer to the user than the first jackpot symbol XC1. Moreover, on the contrary, the first jackpot symbol XC1 may be displayed so as to be located closer to this side than the second jackpot symbol XC2.

[Effect example]
In the decorative pattern competition effect A of the gaming machine 1, in the jackpot pattern display effect B, the first jackpot pattern XC1 is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the first jackpot pattern is formed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. A second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed, and then, in jackpot symbol display performance C, a production is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA more than the second jackpot symbol XC2, and then In jackpot symbol display performance D, a performance is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA more than the first jackpot symbol XC1, and then, in jackpot symbol display performance E, the first jackpot symbol Out of the symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, an effect is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, after the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approach the ally character CRA, a competition-like production in which the two jackpot symbols move toward the ally character CRA is performed. After the jackpot is determined, one jackpot symbol (the second jackpot symbol) is determined, so it is possible to keep the player's heart racing until the final jackpot symbol is determined, and increase the interest of the performance when the jackpot is determined. can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition performance B of the gaming machine 1, a jackpot symbol display performance E is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player even more nervous until the final jackpot symbol is determined, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance when the jackpot is determined. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition performance B of the gaming machine 1, a jackpot symbol display performance E in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide is such that the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed against the ally character CRA. A jackpot symbol display effect D that approaches the first jackpot symbol XC1, and a jackpot symbol display effect G in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed among the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2. It takes place between According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player even more nervous until the final jackpot symbol is determined, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance when the jackpot is determined. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition performance of the gaming machine 1, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol (for example, a guaranteed variable jackpot symbol) that provides a greater profit for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1. There is. According to this configuration, after the two jackpot symbols are competed toward the ally character CRA, the second jackpot symbol, which is profitable for the player, is displayed, so that the player can see the second jackpot symbol. It is possible to give great pleasure after the suspenseful excitement, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance when a jackpot is determined. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition performance B of the gaming machine 1, the jackpot symbol display performance F in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is enlarged so as to protrude from the display screen 7a is such that the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are It is performed after the colliding jackpot symbol display performance E and before the jackpot symbol display performance G in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed. It will be done. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player even more nervous until the final jackpot symbol is determined, and it is possible to improve the interest of the performance when the jackpot is determined. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first jackpot pattern including a plurality of decorative patterns and a second jackpot pattern including a plurality of decorative patterns,
The second display performance is a performance in which the first jackpot symbol approaches a predetermined location more than the second jackpot symbol,
The third display performance is a performance in which the second jackpot symbol approaches a predetermined location more than the first jackpot symbol,
The fourth display performance is a performance in which the second jackpot symbol out of the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, then the second display performance is performed, then the third display performance is performed, and then the fourth display performance is performed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance in which the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol collide,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination performance, the fifth display performance is performed between the third display performance and the fourth display performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
The second jackpot symbol is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display performance is a performance in which the second jackpot symbol is enlarged so as to protrude from the display means,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination performance, the sixth display performance is performed after the fifth display performance and before the fourth display performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The logo movement contact effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 75 to 77. This logo moving contact presentation can be executed during the variation presentation of presentation symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the logo moving contact effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The logo movement contact effects A to C are executed in a high-accuracy high base state or a low-accuracy high base state. It should be noted that the same process can be performed even in a low base state with low probability.

[Logo moving contact production A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining logo movement contact effect A. The logo moving contact effect A is a pattern effect that results in a jackpot.
First, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left presentation pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Further, the hold icon 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), logo movement effect A is executed. Logo movement performance A is a performance related to the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decoration part) written as "OARO" and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The advancing position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the lower part of the display screen 7a. Logo movement performance A is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retreat position to the intermediate position, as shown by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact performance is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" symbol and "2" symbol. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying an image in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 that has stopped at an intermediate position, the image appears as if it were the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. It is made to appear as if the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are in contact with each other. Here, an image in which the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are collapsed in the vertical direction is displayed. It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 stopped at an intermediate position may be moved up and down in a small width to encourage it to be difficult to crush. At this time, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15. Also, here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed. This is a performance that prompts the user to operate the performance button 63. Here, when the player operates the performance button 63, the next performance is executed. Note that even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect will be executed when the valid period of input to the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), logo movement effect B is executed. Logo movement performance B is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position. This indicates that the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol were successfully crushed. Specifically, while the second movable accessory 15 is moving from the intermediate position to the lower position, an image in which the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol explode and disappear is displayed. Then, as the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are displayed so as to be below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front. In addition, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot mode. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right production symbols (specifically, identification information forming the production symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. Here, all of the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are "3" symbols. Further, only the upper part of the "3" symbol is displayed, and the remaining part is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are moved upward. Specifically, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are in a jackpot mode, are displayed moving slowly upward as shown by arrow Z. At this time, the part covered by the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. Here, the upper part of the "3" symbol is covered by the second movable accessory 15, making it difficult to see. Note that the "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), logo movement effect C is executed. Logo movement performance C is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position. As the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow X, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a difficult to see state to an easily visible state. Here, the second movable accessory 15 moves to above the "3" symbol when viewed from the front, making the "3" symbol easily visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Logo moving contact production B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining logo movement contact effect B. Logo moving contact performance B is a performance with a pattern that results in a loss compared to logo movement contact performance A that results in a jackpot.
First, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right presentation pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left presentation pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Further, the hold icon 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), logo movement effect A is executed. Logo movement performance A is a performance related to the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decoration part) written as "OARO" and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The advancing position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the lower part of the display screen 7a. Logo movement performance A is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retreat position to the intermediate position, as shown by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact performance is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" symbol and "2" symbol. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying an image in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 that has stopped at an intermediate position, the image appears as if it were the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. It is made to appear as if the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are in contact with each other. Here, an image in which the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are collapsed in the vertical direction is displayed. It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 stopped at an intermediate position may be moved up and down in a small width to encourage it to be difficult to crush. At this time, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15. Also, here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed. This is a performance that prompts the user to operate the performance button 63. Here, when the player operates the performance button 63, the next performance is executed. Note that even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect will be executed when the valid period of input to the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), logo movement effect D is executed. Logo movement performance D is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the retreat position. This indicates that crushing the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol has failed. Specifically, in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 from the intermediate position to the retracted position, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol that were collapsed in the vertical direction are displayed to return to their original state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), a medium symbol low speed variation effect is executed. In the medium symbol low speed fluctuation performance, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C moving downward as shown by the arrow Y becomes slow and becomes visible. Here, the moving speed of the "5" symbol is slow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance in which the middle left and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop when the middle performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is the "2" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "1" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be a "2" symbol. Furthermore, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Logo moving contact production C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the logo movement contact effect C. Logo movement contact performance C is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are promoted after a jackpot is announced. The promotion of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R signals the transition to a more advantageous jackpot game. Specifically, it is made to appear that the 16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot has been won, and with the promotion of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it is announced that the 16RV jackpot is won.

First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. At this time, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped in any order. Further, in that order, two or more of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop in a jackpot mode. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right production symbols (specifically, identification information forming the production symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. Here, all of the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are "2" symbols. The "2" symbol (even number symbol) is a symbol indicating that it is a 16R (actually 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot. Note that the pending icon 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are no longer displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), logo movement effect A is executed. Logo movement performance A is a performance related to the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decoration part) written as "OARO" and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The advancing position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the lower part of the display screen 7a. Logo movement performance A is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retreat position to the intermediate position, as shown by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact performance is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "2" symbol. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying an image in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 that has stopped at an intermediate position, the image appears as if it were the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. "2" Make it appear as if the symbols are touching. Here, an image in which the "2" symbol is vertically collapsed is displayed. It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 stopped at an intermediate position may be moved up and down in a small width to encourage it to be difficult to crush. At this time, the "2" symbol may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), logo movement effect B is executed. Logo movement performance B is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position. This indicates that the "2" symbol was successfully crushed. Specifically, while the second movable accessory 15 is moving from the intermediate position to the lower position, an image that looks like a "2" symbol exploding and disappearing is displayed. Then, as the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are displayed so as to be below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front. In addition, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot mode. Here, all of the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are "3" symbols. The "3" symbol (odd number symbol) is a symbol that indicates a jackpot that is expected to pass 16RV. That is, at this stage, the "2" symbol that was displayed in the jackpot mode has been promoted to the "3" symbol. Here, only the upper part of the "3" symbol is displayed, and the rest is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are moved upward. Specifically, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are in a jackpot mode, are displayed moving slowly upward as shown by arrow Z. At this time, the part covered by the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. Here, the upper part of the "3" symbol is covered by the second movable accessory 15, making it difficult to see. Note that the "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), logo movement effect C is executed. Logo movement performance C is a performance in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position. As the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow X, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a difficult to see state to an easily visible state. Here, the second movable accessory 15 moves to above the "3" symbol when viewed from the front, making the "3" symbol easily visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

In addition, logo moving contact performance C is a case where the promotion of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is successful, but when promotion of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fails, the structure is similar to logo movement contact performance B. It is possible to do so. In other words, the logo contact effect shown in Fig. 77(D) is common, then the logo movement effect D shown in Fig. 76(E) is executed, and the "2" symbol remains as it is, and the logo movement effect shown in Fig. 77(H) is executed. Execute a confirmed stop effect (hit).

In addition, in the logo contact effect (Fig. 75 (D), Fig. 76 (D), Fig. 77 (D)), an effect that prompts the operation of the operation part such as the effect button 63 is performed, and when the operation part is operated, the next The configuration may be such that the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 75 (E), FIG. 76 (E), and FIG. 77 (E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the logo moving contact effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retreat position to the intermediate position to encourage winning in a predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75(C)(D), FIG. 76(C)(D) ), Figures 77(C)(D)). Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position to notify winning in a predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75(E) and 77(E)). According to this configuration, since the second movable accessory 15 performs the promotion performance and the winning notification performance, the performance is more powerful than a simple notification performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the second movable accessory 15 corresponds to a "movable member", the retracted position corresponds to a "first position", the intermediate position corresponds to a "second position", and the lower position corresponds to a "third position". Equivalent to. In addition, logo movement effect A and logo contact effect (Fig. 75 (C) (D), Fig. 76 (C) (D), Fig. 77 (C) (D)) correspond to the "first effect", and the logo movement effect Performance B, symbol movement performance, and logo movement performance C correspond to a "second performance." A jackpot lottery and a jackpot type lottery correspond to a "predetermined lottery."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a logo contact effect is executed, and the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and performs an effect of crushing the temporarily stopped effect symbol. That is, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying an image in line with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 that has stopped at an intermediate position, it appears as if the performance design is at the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. Make it appear as if they are in contact. According to this configuration, since the movement of the performance symbols is linked to the movement of the second movable accessory 15, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the temporarily stopped production pattern corresponds to a "symbol".

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the production pattern 8L on the left middle right is placed below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front as the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position. 8C and 8R are displayed (Fig. 75(E), Fig. 77(E)). According to this configuration, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear to be pressed down by the second movable accessory 15 that has moved to the lower position, so the movement of the second movable accessory 15 to the lower position is noticeable, and the game can improve the interest of

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a symbol movement effect is executed (FIG. 75(F), FIG. 77(F)). Specifically, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed slowly moving upward as shown by the arrow Z, and then moved to the back side of the second movable accessory 15. According to this configuration, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that move so as to overlap with the second movable accessory 15 are more likely to be watched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, logo movement effect C is executed (FIG. 75(G), FIG. 77(G)). Specifically, as the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow Become. According to this configuration, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a state where they are difficult to see to a state where they are easily visible, so that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are more likely to be watched, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the logo movement effect D can be executed (FIG. 76(E)), and a loss in a predetermined lottery can be notified. Specifically, in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 from the intermediate position to the retracted position, the performance pattern that has been crushed in the vertical direction is displayed to return to its original state. According to this configuration, since the second movable accessory 15 performs the inciting performance and the notification performance of failure, the performance is more powerful than a mere notification performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that the logo movement effect D (FIG. 76(E)) corresponds to the "third effect."

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the logo contact effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed to prompt the operation of the effect button 63 (FIGS. 75(D) and 76(D). When the button 63 is pressed, the next effects (logo movement effect B, logo movement effect D) are executed (FIGS. 75(E) and 76(E)). Since winning or losing is notified by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the presentation button 63 corresponds to the "operation section", and the logo contact presentation (FIGS. 75(D) and 76(D)) that displays the button image BG corresponds to the "promotion presentation".

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the logo moving contact effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol temporarily stop, and after the logo contact effect, a jackpot is reached (FIGS. 75(B) to (H)). On the other hand, the temporarily stopped symbol may be in a ready-to-reach mode. The reach mode is generally such that the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information of the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R is the same).

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the temporarily stopped performance symbol is crushed by the second movable accessory 15 to notify the jackpot or the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the lottery result as to whether or not to perform the performance may be notified. For example, by crushing the temporarily stopped symbols, confirmation of execution of the pseudo-continuous performance is notified. In this case, it is conceivable to change the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R again on the back side of the second movable accessory 15 in accordance with the execution of logo movement performance B (FIGS. 75(E) and 77(E)). .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A9-1]
a display screen for displaying images;
movable between a first position, a second position different from the first position, a third position different from the first position and the second position, the first position, the second position, and A gaming machine comprising a movable member that can be stopped at the third position,
a first effect in which the movable member moves from the first position to the second position to encourage winning in a predetermined lottery;
After the first performance, it is possible to perform a second performance in which the movable member moves from the second position to the third position to notify winning in the predetermined lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-1,
In the first effect, by displaying a pattern on the display screen in accordance with the movable member that has moved to the second position, an effect is performed in which the movable member appears to come into contact with the pattern displayed on the display screen. be done,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-1 or aspect A9-2,
In the second performance, a pattern is displayed on the display screen so that the pattern is visible below the movable member in accordance with the movable member that has moved to the third position;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-3,
In the second effect, an effect is performed in which the pattern displayed on the display screen is displayed moving in a direction overlapping the movable member and moved to the back side of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-4,
In the second performance, a performance is performed in which the movable member moves from the third position to the first position in accordance with a performance in which the symbol moves to the back side of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
Note that the phrase "in accordance with the effect in which the symbol moves toward the back side of the movable member" is intended to include a configuration in which the movement of the movable member is performed in parallel with the moving display of the symbol. In other words, it includes not only a configuration in which the movable member moves after the movement performance of the symbols is completed, but also a configuration in which the movable member moves before the movement performance of the symbols is completed. For example, it includes a configuration in which a movable member is moved so as to cover and hide a moving and displayed pattern.

[Aspect A9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-5,
After the first performance, the movable member moves from the second position to the first position to perform a third performance in which a failure in the predetermined lottery is announced.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-6,
It further includes an operation section that can be operated by the player,
performing a promotion performance that promotes operation of the operating unit in the first performance, and using the performance as an opportunity to perform the second performance or the third performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-6,
It further includes an operation section that can be operated by the player,
performing a promotion performance that promotes operation of the operating unit in the first performance, and using the performance as a trigger to execute the second performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol count continuous effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 78 to 80. This symbol count continuous performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. Specifically, the performance executed during the variation performance is performed continuously across multiple variations. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol count continuous performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. The symbol count continuous effects A to C are executed in a high-accuracy high base state or a low-accuracy high base state. It should be noted that the process can be executed in the same manner even in a low base state with low probability.

[Symbol count continuous production A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining symbol count continuous effect A.
After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally such that two of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the symbols is the same). In the normal game, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach mode, but in the symbol count continuous performance A, the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R form a reach mode. do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left performance symbol 8L, which has a different range of variation from the middle performance symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol in normal times. The same applies below. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. The explanation will continue assuming that the number of holds will not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at the "5" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is the "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is the "8" symbol. Three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The two reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "6" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is an "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be an "8" symbol. Two pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one pending icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. One reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "7" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is an "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be an "8" symbol. One hold icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. The fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally such that all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the symbols is the same). Here, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "8" symbol. The fluctuation icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the final stop.

The symbol count continuous performance A is a continuous performance spanning four variations. In symbol count continuous performance A, a reach is formed with "8" symbols every time the reach formation performance is executed. Then, the final stop symbol in the confirmed stop performance is counted up as "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "8" symbol. Further, after the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R stop at the same time, the left performance pattern 8L stops. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a jackpot or loss is notified at the second timing. Furthermore, in normal times, the middle presentation pattern 8C is the final stop pattern, while the left presentation pattern 8L is the final stop pattern.

Although the symbol count continuous effect A is a pattern that results in a jackpot in the final variation among the four variations, it is also possible to create a pattern that results in a loss. In that case, instead of the confirmed stop effect (win) in FIG. 78(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is performed. For example, it is conceivable that the left performance symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is a "7" symbol or a "9" symbol.

[Symbol count continuous production B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining symbol count continuous effect B.
After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally such that two of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the symbols is the same). In the normal game, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach mode, but in the symbol count continuous performance B, the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R form a reach mode. do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left production symbol 8L, which has a different range of variation from the middle production symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol in normal times. The same applies below. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. The explanation will continue assuming that the number of holds will not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is the "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at the "8" symbol. Three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "7" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The two reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be an "8" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "7" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be a "7" symbol. Two pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle presentation pattern 8C and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "6" pattern. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one pending icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. One reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "7" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be a "6" symbol. One hold icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(G), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "5" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. The fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally such that all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the symbols is the same). Here, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "5" symbol. The fluctuation icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the final stop.

The symbol count continuous performance B is a continuous performance spanning 4 variations. In symbol count continuous performance B, a reach is formed in the order of "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "6" symbol → "5" symbol every time the ready-to-reach formation performance is executed. The final stop symbols in the confirmed stop performance are "9" symbol → "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "5" symbol. This can be said to mean that the final stop symbols are counting down, except for the "5" symbol which is the final confirmed stop effect (hit). Moreover, after the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R stop at the same time, the left performance pattern 8L stops. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a jackpot or loss is notified at the second timing. Furthermore, in normal times, the middle presentation pattern 8C is the final stop pattern, while the left presentation pattern 8L is the final stop pattern.

Although the symbol count continuous performance B is a pattern that results in a jackpot in the final variation among the four variations, it is also possible to create a pattern that results in a loss. In that case, instead of the confirmed stop effect (win) in FIG. 79(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable that the left performance symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is a "6" symbol.

[Symbol count continuous production C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect C.
After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally such that two of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the symbols is the same). In the normal game, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach mode, but in the symbol count continuous performance C, the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R form a reach mode. do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left production symbol 8L, which has a different range of variation from the middle production symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol in normal times. The same applies below. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. The explanation will continue assuming that the number of holds will not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is fixed at the "4" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is the "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed at the "8" symbol. Three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle presentation pattern 8C and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The two reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "5" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "2" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be a "2" symbol. Two pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "0" symbol. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one pending icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. One reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is a "6" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "0" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is a "0" symbol and has been fixed and stopped. One hold icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

After the previous fluctuation is fixed and stopped, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, both the middle presentation pattern 8C and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. The fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally such that all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the symbols is the same). Here, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. The fluctuation icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the final stop.

The symbol count continuous performance C is a continuous performance spanning 4 variations. In symbol count continuous performance C, a reach is formed in the order of "8" symbol → "2" symbol → "0" symbol → "7" symbol every time the ready-to-reach formation performance is executed. This is an example where the reach symbols are selected at random. However, the last "7" symbol is selected based on the count-up of the left performance symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol in the confirmed stop performance is counted up as "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol. Further, after the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R stop at the same time, the left performance pattern 8L stops. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a jackpot or loss is notified at the second timing. Furthermore, in normal times, the middle presentation pattern 8C is the final stop pattern, while the left presentation pattern 8L is the final stop pattern.

Although the symbol count continuous performance C was a pattern that resulted in a jackpot in the final variation among the four variations, it is also possible to create a pattern that resulted in a loss. In that case, instead of the confirmed stop effect (win) in FIG. 80(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable that the left performance symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is a "6" symbol or an "8" symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the continuous symbol count effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeating the reach formation performance and the fixed stop performance in the reach loss mode, it is possible to encourage the performance symbols to stop in the jackpot mode indicating the transition to the jackpot game (FIG. 78(A) ) to (F), Fig. 79 (A) to (F), Fig. 80 (A) to (F)). According to this configuration, by repeating the reach-missing mode, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the reach formation effect and the confirmed stop effect (loss) correspond to the "reach loss effect", the left effect symbol 8L corresponds to the "final stop symbol", and the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to the "reach symbol". Equivalent to. Further, a jackpot mode in which the left-center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (more specifically, the identification information forming the symbols is the same) corresponds to a "special mode."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach formation effect and the confirmed stop effect (loss) are repeated in continuous fluctuations (FIGS. 78(A) to 78(F), FIGS. 79(A) to (F), FIG. 80( A) to (F)). According to this configuration, since the fixed stop effect (loss) of the reach-loss mode is executed in each successive variation, it is possible to give the player expectations for the next variation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R stop simultaneously in the reach formation performance, and the left performance symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, stops in the confirmed stop performance (loss). According to this configuration, a rhythm is created in a series of performances consisting of the reach formation performance and the confirmed stop performance (loss), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The stop timing of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R corresponds to the "first timing", and the stop timing of the left effect pattern 8L corresponds to the "second timing".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol during normal times, whereas the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol, and the fluctuation range of the final stop symbol is different from the normal time. ing. According to this configuration, the reach formation performance and the fixed stop performance (loss) performance stand out, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left performance symbol 8L is changed every time the reach formation performance and the confirmed stop performance (loss) are repeated. According to this configuration, by changing the final stop symbol, it is possible to give the player the expectation that he may hit the jackpot next time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, each time the reach formation effect and the confirmed stop effect (loss) are repeated, the left effect symbol 8L is counted up or down (FIGS. 78(A) to (F), FIG. 79( A) to (F), Fig. 80 (A) to (F)). According to this configuration, by counting up or down the final stopped symbol, it is possible to further give the player the expectation that he may hit the jackpot next time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the repeatedly executed reach formation performance and fixed stop performance (loss), the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R forming the reach mode are "8" symbols each time ( Figures 78(A) to (F)). Then, the left production symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is counted up. According to this configuration, the count-up of the left performance symbol 8L stands out, and the count-up of the left performance symbol 8L can make the player feel that he is approaching the jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the continuous symbol count performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the left performance symbol 8L is the final stop symbol on the premise that normally the symbols stop in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → middle performance symbol 8C. On the other hand, the right performance symbol 8R may be used as the final stop symbol. Further, the same medium performance symbol 8C as in the normal time may be used as the final stop symbol. In addition, by determining the final stop symbol, the remaining performance symbols become the ready-to-reach symbols that form the ready-to-win mode.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R, which are ready-to-reach symbols, are configured to stop at the same time. On the other hand, the production symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be stopped at a different timing. Further, any one of the performance symbols may be stopped first. In this case, if the three performance symbols are made to stop at similar intervals, including the stop timing of the final stop symbol, a rhythm will be created in the stopping of the performance symbols and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the reach formation performance and the confirmed stop performance (loss) are repeated in continuous fluctuations. On the other hand, within one change, the reach formation performance and the confirmed stop performance (loss) may be repeated. Alternatively, it may be repeated for both. For example, the first variation is repeated twice, and the next variation is repeated three times.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A10-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display screen that displays an image,
On the display screen, by repeatedly executing a reach loss effect in which symbols that are variably displayed in multiple rows are stopped so that the final stop symbol that stops last has a reach loss mode that is different from the reach pattern that forms the reach mode, Incites the game to stop in a special manner indicating the transition to a special game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1,
The reach loss effect is executed and repeated in continuous fluctuations,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1 or aspect A10-2,
In the reach loss performance, the reach symbol stops at a first timing, and then the final stop symbol stops at a second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-3,
In the reach-loss effect, on the display screen, the variation area of the final stop symbol is different from the variation area of the final stop symbol in normal times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4,
Each time the reach loss effect is repeatedly executed, the final stop symbol is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5,
The change of the final stop symbol is a count up or a count down,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5 or aspect A10-6,
In the reach-losing effect that is repeatedly executed, the reach-to-reach symbol is common;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5 or aspect A10-6,
In the repeatedly executed reach-losing performance, the reach symbol is changed by counting up or down.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-9]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5 or aspect A10-6,
In the repeatedly executed reach-losing effect, the reach-to-reach symbol is selected at random;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Image reversal expectation degree suggestion effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 81 to 83. This image reversal expectation level suggesting effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an image reversal expectation level suggestion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Image reversal expectation level suggestion effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining image reversal expectation level suggestion effect A. The image reversal expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that also suggests the expectation level of a win by inverting a specific image (pending icon) that suggests the expectation level of a win through a color change. In the image reversal expectation level suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pending icon 9A, a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C, and the like are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is displayed.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have the shape of a flag. The shape of this flag includes a basket part with the right side split in two, and a rod-shaped pole part located on the left side of the flag part. Note that the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can have any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the color of the four flag-shaped reservation icons 9A is blue.

During this variation, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the color of the second pending icon 9A from the right among the four pending icons 9A changes from blue to green due to pre-reading. The pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C indicate the expectation level of a jackpot at the time of fluctuation corresponding to the pending icon, depending on the color. Here, the expectation of jackpot is highest in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with the expectation of blue being 2%, the expectation of green being 10%, the expectation of purple being 20%, and the expectation of red. The degree of expectation is 30%, and the expectation level of gold is 40%. The color change of the second pending icon 9A from the right suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot at the time of the change (the next next change) corresponding to this pending icon 9A has increased from 2% to 10%. .

In FIG. 81(C), the state at the time of the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation in FIGS. 81(A) and (B) is shown. In FIG. 81(B), the pending icon 9A whose color has changed from blue to green is shifted one place to the right, and as shown in FIG. 81(C), the pending icon 9A is the rightmost of the three pending icons 9A. will be displayed. During this change, the rightmost pending icon 9A whose color has changed is displayed in reverse as shown in FIG. 81(D) by pre-reading. The inverted display here means that the object (flag) represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed in a horizontally inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the hold icon 9A is horizontally reversed, the pole part is located on the right side of the shank part, and the part where the flag part is divided into two parts is displayed on the left side of the flag part. When the pending icon 9A is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, when it is reversed, the expectation level is added by 43%. In this embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is reversed, the expectation level is the sum of the expectation level of the color of the hold icon 9A and the expected level of reversal of 43%. For example, when the blue pending icon 9A is reversed, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 2% to 45%. Here, since the green pending icon 9A has been inverted, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 10% to 53%. In this manner, in this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the pending icon 9A but also by whether it is inverted or not. In this embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is reversed, expectations are higher than when the color changes.

In FIG. 81(E), the state at the time of the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation in FIGS. 81(C) and (D) is shown. In FIG. 81(D), the inverted green pending icon 9A is shifted one place to the right and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C, as shown in FIG. 81(E), and this variable icon ( The change corresponding to the corresponding hold icon) 9C is performed. The expectation of a jackpot in this variation is 53%, and when a jackpot occurs, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode as shown in FIG. 81(F).

FIGS. 81(G) to (L) show other examples of the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect A. In another example, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), with the variation display corresponding to the special drawing 1 variation being displayed, the hold icons 9A are arranged horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One is displayed. The color of the four pending icons 9A is blue. During this variation, as shown in FIG. 81(G), the third pending icon 9A from the right among the four pending icons 9A is displayed in reverse video by pre-reading. The reverse display here is similar to the reverse display in FIG. 81(D). That is, when the hold icon 9A is highlighted, the expectation level is added by 43%, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is not flipped. Here, since the blue pending icon 9A has been inverted, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 2% to 45%. In this manner, in this embodiment, the hold icon 9A may be displayed in reverse not only after the color changes but also before the color changes.

In FIG. 81(H), the state at the time of the next special symbol variation following the special symbol variation in FIGS. 81(A) and (G) is shown. One pending icon 9A is added due to winning. In FIG. 81(G), the highlighted hold icon 9A is shifted two places to the right and is displayed on the rightmost of the three hold icons 9A, as shown in FIG. 81(H). . During this change, the color of the rightmost highlighted hold icon 9A changes from blue to green due to pre-reading, as shown in FIG. 81(I). The color change here is similar to the color change in FIG. 81(B). In other words, the expectation of jackpot is highest in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with the expectation of blue being 2%, the expectation of green being 10%, the expectation of purple being 20%, and the expectation of red. is 30%, and expectations for gold are 40%. When the color of the pending icon 9A changes while it is displayed in reverse, the expectation level corresponding to the change in color is added. Here, the color expectation increases from 2% to 10%, and 43% of the inverted display is added to this, so the overall expectation increases from 45% to 53%.

The green pending icon 9A may be further inverted to its original orientation (non-reversed display) at a specific timing. There is a 20% chance that the reversed display will return to its original state, and when it returns, it may occur during the same change or after the next change. Here, as shown in FIG. 81(J), during the same fluctuation as in FIG. 91(I), an effect is performed in which the held icon 9A, which was displayed in reverse, returns to its original orientation (non-reversed display). . As a result, the expectation level of a jackpot at the time of fluctuation corresponding to this hold icon 9A is lowered to the expectation level before the inverted display. Here, the expectation level decreases from 53% (43+10) to 10% (0+10).

In FIG. 81(K), the state at the time of the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation in FIGS. 81(H) to (J) is shown. In FIG. 81(J), the green pending icon 9A that has returned to its original orientation (non-endpoint display) is shifted one position to the right, and as shown in FIG. 81(K), the green pending icon )9C, and a change corresponding to this change icon (the pending icon) 9C is performed. The expectation of a jackpot in this variation is 10%, and when a loss occurs, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a loss state as shown in FIG. 81(L).

[Image reversal expectation level suggestion effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining image reversal expectation level suggestion effect B. The image reversal expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that also suggests the expectation level of a win by inverting a specific image (pending icon) that suggests the expectation level of a win through a color change. FIG. 82(A) shows the same state as FIG. 81(B) of image reversal expectation level suggestion effect A. That is, in the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect B, first, the same effect as the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 81(A) and 81(B) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 81(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and a variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The color of the second pending icon 9A from the right among the four pending icons 9A changes from blue to green due to pre-reading. The pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C indicate the expectation level of a jackpot at the time of fluctuation corresponding to the pending icon, depending on the color. Here, the expectation of jackpot is highest in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with the expectation of blue being 2%, the expectation of green being 10%, the expectation of purple being 20%, and the expectation of red. The degree of expectation is 30%, and the expectation level of gold is 40%. This change in color of the second pending icon 9A from the right suggests that the expectation of a jackpot at the time of the change (the next next change) corresponding to this pending icon 9A has increased from 2% to 10%. There is.

During this variation, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the second green pending icon 9A from the right is read in advance and a rotation effect is executed. Here, the second hold icon 9A from the right rotates counterclockwise around the normal line of the display screen 7a as the rotation axis. Thereafter, the rotational speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 82(C), the second hold icon 9A from the right becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82(D), the vortex image disappears and the reversed hold icon 9A is displayed at the display position of the second hold icon 9A from the right. The inverted display here means that the object (flag) represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed in a horizontally inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the hold icon 9A is horizontally reversed, the pole part is located on the right side of the shank part, and the part where the flag part is divided into two parts is displayed on the left side of the flag part. When the pending icon 9A is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, when it is reversed, the expectation level is added by 43%. In this embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is reversed, the expectation level is the sum of the expectation level of the color of the hold icon 9A and the expected level of reversal of 43%. For example, when the blue pending icon 9A is reversed, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 2% to 45%. Here, since the green pending icon 9A has been inverted, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 10% to 53%. In this manner, in this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the pending icon 9A but also by whether it is inverted or not. In this embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is reversed, expectations are higher than when the color changes.

In FIG. 82(E), the state at the time of the next special symbol variation following the special symbol variation in FIGS. 82(A) to (D) is shown. In FIG. 82(D), the inverted green pending icon 9A is shifted two places to the right, and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C, as shown in FIG. 82(E), and this variable icon ( The change corresponding to the corresponding hold icon) 9C is performed. The expectation of a jackpot in this variation is 53%, and when a jackpot occurs, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode as shown in FIG. 82(F).

FIGS. 82(G) to 82(L) show other examples of the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect B. In another example, first, as shown in FIG. 82(G), with the variation display corresponding to the special drawing 1 variation being displayed, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed below. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are shaped like blue flags. During this fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 82(H), the fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C is enlarged while moving upwards on the display screen 7a due to pre-reading, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R A rotation effect is performed that rotates at a first position that overlaps with the fluctuating display. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C rotates counterclockwise at the first position on the display screen 7a with the normal line of the display screen 7a as the rotation axis. Thereafter, the rotational speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 82(I), the fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82(J), a reversed fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C appears from the vortex image at the first position on the display screen 7a, and rotates at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. Move towards the second position. The inverted display here means that the object represented by the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in an inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the fluctuation icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is reversed horizontally, the pole is located on the right side of the flag part, and the part split into two parts of the flag part is displayed on the left side of the flag part. be done. Furthermore, the number displayed on the flag (here, "3") is also displayed in reverse video. When the fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in reverse, it suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is not reversed. Here, when it is reversed, the expectation level is added by 43%. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is reversed, the expectation level is the sum of the expectation level of the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C and the expected level of reversal of 43%. Here, since the blue change icon (the pending icon) 9C has been inverted, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 2% to 45%. In this manner, in this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C but also by whether it is inverted or not. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is reversed, the expectation level is higher than when the color changes. Thereafter, a countdown effect is performed using the reversely displayed numbers displayed on the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C displayed at the second position.

When the countdown effect starts, as shown in FIG. 82(K), one number is highlighted in the flag of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C displayed in the second position of the display screen 7a. Decremented. Here, the highlighted "3" is switched to the highlighted "2". Thereafter, the highlighted number continues to be decremented, and when the highlighted "0" is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. FIG. 82(L) shows an example in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Image reversal expectation level suggestion effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effect C. The image reversal expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that also suggests the expectation level of a win by inverting a specific image (pending icon) that suggests the expectation level of a win through a color change. In the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect C, first, the same effect as the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 81(A) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 81(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and a variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed. Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have the shape of a flag. The shape of this flag includes a basket part with the right side split in two, and a rod-shaped pole part located on the left side of the flag part. Note that the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can have any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the color of the four flag-shaped reservation icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C is blue.

During this fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "2" and "4", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a fluctuating state. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the pending icon 9A and the same flag-shaped image (design) as the pending icon 9C are stopped and displayed at the stop position as the medium decorative pattern 8C by pre-reading. The color of this image (design) is blue, and the size is larger than the pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a rotation effect is performed in which the image (design) that is stopped and displayed as the medium decorative design 8C rotates. Here, the image (design) that is stopped and displayed as the medium decorative design 8C rotates counterclockwise about the normal line of the display screen 7a as the rotation axis. Thereafter, the rotational speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 83(D), the image (design) that is stopped and displayed as the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(E), an inverted flag-shaped image appears from the vortex image at the stop position of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and rotates to the display position of the fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C. move towards. The inverted display here means that the object (flag) represented by the image (design) stopped and displayed at the stop position of the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in an inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the image (design) that is stopped and displayed at the stop position of the medium decorative pattern 8C is reversed horizontally, the pole part is located on the right side of the basket part, and the flag part is split into two. section is displayed to the left of the flag section. This flag-shaped image that is displayed in reverse is the same as that of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C in FIG. 83(A) that is displayed in reverse.

Due to the effect shown in FIG. 83(E), the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in reverse as shown in FIG. 83(F). When the fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in reverse, it suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is not reversed. Here, when it is reversed, the expectation level is added by 43%. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is reversed, the expectation level is the sum of the expectation level of the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C and the expected level of reversal of 43%. Here, since the blue change icon (the pending icon) 9C has been inverted, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 2% to 45%. In this manner, in this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C but also by whether it is inverted or not. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is reversed, the expectation level is higher than when the color changes.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were stopped and displayed at "2" and "4", are again displayed in a variable manner. Here, nothing is displayed on the medium decorative pattern 8C. In addition, after the number pattern is stopped and displayed on the medium decorative pattern 8C, a pseudo continuous performance may be performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed again.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed again at "2" and "4", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed from the state in which it is displayed in a variable manner due to the look-ahead. , the inverted flag-shaped image (design) is stopped and displayed at the stop position. The inverted flag-shaped image (design) is green, and has the same shape as the blue fluctuation icon (the pending icon) 9C, but a different color. The flag-shaped image (design) that is displayed in reverse is larger than the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the green flag-shaped image (design) that is stopped and displayed as the medium decorative pattern 8C moves toward the display position of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. At this time, the image (design) may or may not be rotated. As a result of this effect, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C changes to green, and the number (here, "3") is also displayed in reverse on the flag. Also, the size becomes larger. Specifically, the image has the same size as the image (design) that is stopped and displayed as the medium decorative design 8C. The color changes here are blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with the highest expectation of jackpot in the order of blue, 2% expectation of blue, 10% expectation of green, and 20% expectation of purple. %, the expectation level for red is 30%, and the expectation level for gold is 40%. When the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C changes while it is displayed in reverse, the expectation level corresponding to the change in color is added. Here, the color expectation increases from 2% to 10%, and 43% of the inverted display is added to this, so the overall expectation increases from 45% to 53%. Thereafter, a countdown effect using the highlighted numbers represented by the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is executed.

When the countdown effect is started, as shown in FIG. 83(J), the number highlighted in the flag of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is decremented by one. Here, the highlighted "3" is switched to the highlighted "2". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(K), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were stopped and displayed at "2" and "4", are again displayed in a variable manner. Here, nothing is displayed on the medium decorative pattern 8C. In addition, after the number pattern is stopped and displayed on the medium decorative pattern 8C, a pseudo continuous performance may be performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed again. The number highlighted in the flag portion of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C continues to be decremented, and when the highlighted "0" is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. FIG. 83(L) shows an example in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the expectation of winning is also suggested by the pending icon 9A, which indicates the expectation of winning by changing its color, being reversed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 82 and 83.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, after the hold icon 9A is displayed in a non-inverted state, a first effect is executed in which the hold icon 9A is inverted. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 82 and 83.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the first effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed in an uninverted state, then the hold icon 9A rotates, and after rotation, the hold icon 9A is placed on hold. The icon 9A is displayed in an inverted state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the hold icon 9A includes characters (including numbers), and after the first performance, the hold icon 9A includes characters. A second effect can be performed in which the characters change into other characters while they are inverted. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the first effect is executed during the special figure variation, and after the pending icon 9A is displayed in an uninverted state, the first effect is There are cases in which the pending icon 9A is reversed and cases in which it is not reversed, and the pending icon 9A indicates the expected degree of winning in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the first effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the first position of the display screen 7a in an uninverted state, and It is displayed inverted in the second position 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the image reversal expectation level suggestion effects A to C, when the pending icon 9A or the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in reverse, it is assumed to be horizontally reversed. However, the reversal method is not limited to horizontal reversal, and may be, for example, vertical reversal.

[Modification 2]
In the image reversal expectation level suggestion effects B and C, the characters displayed in reverse on the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C were numbers, but characters other than numbers may be displayed in reverse.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the image reversal expectation degree suggestion effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. Further, the specific image that indicates the expectation of winning by changing its color and also suggests the expectation of winning by reversing the color may be an image other than the pending icon.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that indicates the expectation of winning by changing color,
The inversion of the specific image also suggests the degree of expectation of winning;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
capable of executing a first effect in which the specific image is inverted after the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed in an uninverted state, then the specific image is rotated, and after the rotation, the specific image is displayed in an inverted state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2 or aspect B1-3,
The specific image includes characters,
After the first effect, a second effect can be performed in which the characters included in the specific image change to other characters in an inverted state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-2 to B1-4,
The first effect is executed during the special figure variation, and after the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state, the specific image may or may not be inverted during the variation, and the The specific image suggests the expected degree of winning in the fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-2 to B1-5,
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed in a non-reversed state at a first position of the display means, and is displayed in an inverted state at a second position of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The specific mode pseudo-continuous effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 84 to 86. This specific mode pseudo-continuous performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific mode pseudo continuous effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect C will be explained assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Specific aspect pseudo-continuous performance A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern. Furthermore, when the "NEXT" symbol stops, the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), image display effect A is executed. Image display performance A is a performance that moves and displays the first image G1 indicating the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. Here, the first image G1 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The first image G1 may frame out from the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate brightly, or by displaying only the first image G1. In the first image G1, the words "NEXT" and the words "Second Time" are written. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous performance, and "2nd time" indicates the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is an "8" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "4" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern. Furthermore, when the "NEXT" symbol stops, the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), image display effect B is executed. Image display performance B is a performance that moves and displays the second image G2 indicating the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. Here, the second image G2 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The second image G2 may be framed out of the display screen 7a, or may be bounced off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate brightly, or by displaying only the second image G2. In the second image G2, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "3rd time" are written. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous performance, and "3rd time" indicates the third variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that make up the production pattern (the same applies below). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the relevant variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Specific aspect pseudo-continuous performance B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "SPECIAL" pattern. The "SPECIAL" pattern is a pattern in which a character image "SPECIAL" is added to the "NEXT" pattern. Furthermore, when the "SPECIAL" symbol stops, the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), image display effect A is executed. Image display performance A is a performance that moves and displays the first image G1 indicating the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. Here, the first image G1 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The first image G1 may frame out from the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate brightly, or by displaying only the first image G1. In the first image G1, the words "NEXT" and the words "Second Time" are written. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo-continuous performance, and "2nd" indicates the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), image display effect B is executed. Image display performance B is a performance that moves and displays the second image G2 indicating the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. Here, the second image G2 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The second image G2 may be made to frame out from the display screen 7a, or may be made to bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate brightly, or by displaying only the second image G2. In the second image G2, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "3rd time" are written. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous performance, and "3rd time" indicates the third variation including the first variation. However, after the image display effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not temporarily stop, so this indicates the third variation in terms of effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), image display effect C is executed. Image display performance C is a performance that moves and displays a third image G3 that suggests the performance to be performed next. Here, the third image G3 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The third image G3 may be made to frame out from the display screen 7a, or may be made to bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. In the third image G3, the word "battle" is written. “Battle” indicates execution of a battle performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. In addition, the fluctuating performance symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-reach mode and are displayed at the corner of the display screen 7a. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are "3" symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB is rainbow-colored to notify the ally character CRA of victory.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left presentation symbol 8L, middle presentation symbol 8C, and right presentation symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Specific aspect pseudo-continuous performance C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, on the display screen 7a, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and are shown to be fluctuating at high speed. On the display screen 7b below the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "SPECIAL" pattern. The "SPECIAL" pattern is a pattern in which a character image "SPECIAL" is added to the "NEXT" pattern. Furthermore, when the "SPECIAL" symbol stops, the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), image display effect A is executed. Image display performance A is a performance that moves and displays the first image G1 indicating the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. Here, the first image G1 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The first image G1 moves out of the frame from the display screen 7a and enters the frame into the display screen 7b. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate brightly, or by displaying only the first image G1. In the first image G1, the words "NEXT" and the words "Second Time" are written. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous performance, and "2nd time" indicates the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), image display effect B is executed. Image display performance B is a performance that moves and displays the second image G2 indicating the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. Here, the second image G2 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The second image G2 moves out of the frame from the display screen 7a and enters the frame into the display screen 7b. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate brightly, or by displaying only the second image G2. In the second image G2, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "3rd time" are written. "NEXT" indicates execution of a pseudo continuous performance, and "3rd time" indicates the third variation including the first variation. However, after the image display effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not temporarily stop, so this indicates the third variation in terms of effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), image display effect C is executed. Image display performance C is a performance that moves and displays the third image G3 that suggests the performance to be performed next. Here, the third image G3 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The third image G3 moves out of the frame from the display screen 7a and enters the frame into the display screen 7b. The word "battle" is written in the third image G3. “Battle” indicates execution of a battle performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle performance, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. In addition, the fluctuating performance symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-reach mode and are displayed at the corner of the display screen 7a. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). Here, both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are "3" symbols. Furthermore, the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB is rainbow colored to notify the ally character CRA of victory. Furthermore, the ally character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, on the display screen 7a, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7b below the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the variation of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts, when the medium production symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol, the first image G1 indicating the first execution of the pseudo continuous production is displayed. Then, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed (FIGS. 84(A) to 84(C)). Furthermore, when the middle effect pattern 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol, a second image G2 indicating the second execution of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo continuous effect is executed (FIGS. 84(D) and (E)). On the other hand, after the variation of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts, when the medium production symbol 8C temporarily stops at the "SPECIAL" symbol, the first image G1 and the second image G2 are displayed successively to perform a pseudo continuous production. (Fig. 85(A) to (D), Fig. 86(A) to (D)). According to this configuration, since the pseudo continuous performance is performed continuously by stopping the "SPECIAL" symbol, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the mode in which the medium production pattern 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "first mode of the specific modes", and the mode in which it stops at the "SPECIAL" symbol corresponds to the "second mode among the specific modes". Equivalent to. Further, the first image G1 corresponds to a "first image", and the second image G2 corresponds to a "second image".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the medium effect pattern 8C stops at the "SPECIAL" image, the third image G3 suggesting the execution of a battle effect is displayed following the display of the first image G1 and the second image G2. Then, the battle performance is executed. According to this configuration, the pseudo continuous effect is performed continuously by stopping the "SPECIAL" symbol, and furthermore, the execution of the battle effect is suggested by the third image G3 afterwards, which gives the player even more surprise. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the battle performance corresponds to a "special performance", and the third image G3 corresponds to a "third image".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are displayed moving on the display screen 7a (7a and 7b) (FIGS. 84(C), (E), FIG. 85( C) to (E), FIGS. 86(C) to (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out compared to the case where the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are simply displayed. It can improve your interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first image G1, second image G2, and third image G3 are displayed in a moving manner, they are framed out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 86(C) to (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are displayed in a moving manner, they are frame-out from the display screen 7a and frame-in to the display screen 7b (see FIG. 86). C) to (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the display screen 7a corresponds to a "display screen" and the display screen 7b corresponds to "another display screen."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the "first mode" is a case where the medium production symbol 8C among the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the "NEXT" symbol. According to this configuration, the first mode in which execution of the pseudo-continuous performance is determined becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "special symbol".

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "second mode" is the "SPECIAL" symbol in which the middle production symbol 8C of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a "NEXT" symbol with a character image "SPECIAL" added thereto. It has become a case. According to this configuration, the second mode in which the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance and the execution of the special performance are determined is easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the character image "SPECIAL" corresponds to the "predetermined image".

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific aspect pseudo-continuous performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the pattern temporary stop production (FIGS. 84(B), 85(B), and 86(B), the symbols are stopped in the order of left production symbol 8L→right production symbol 8R→middle production symbol 8C) On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the left and right performance symbols 8L, 8R stop at the same time, or a configuration in which the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the pattern temporary stop production (FIGS. 84(B), (D), 85(B), and 86(B), the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are configured to stop at different symbols. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R stop at the same pattern (stop in a ready-to-reach mode).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the design temporary stop production (FIGS. 84(B), (D), 85(B), and 86(B), the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol are stopped at the medium production symbol 8C). On the other hand, it may be configured such that the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol are stopped on the left production symbol 8L, or the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol are stopped on the right production symbol 8R. Also, it may be configured such that the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol are stopped at two or more of the temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in the pattern temporary stop effect (FIGS. 84(B), 85(B), and 86(B), all of the left center right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. On the other hand, at least one of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right may be configured to temporarily stop.In this case, at least one of the production symbols to be temporarily stopped may be changed to the "NEXT" symbol. , it may be a "SPECIAL" symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has been described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the sub display screen 64 may be used to perform similar effects.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the third image G3 suggesting the execution of a battle effect is displayed, and then the battle effect is executed (FIGS. 85(E) to (G), FIGS. 86(E) to (G). )). On the other hand, a configuration may also be adopted in which effects other than battle effects can be selectively executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images,
The gaming machine is capable of executing a pseudo-continuous effect, which is a pseudo-continuous variation effect, when the fluctuating symbols stop in a specific manner on the display screen,
After the symbols start to fluctuate, when the symbols stop in the first of the specific modes, a first image indicating the first execution of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo continuous effect is executed, and then the pseudo continuous effect is executed. When the symbols stop in the first mode, a second image indicating the second execution of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo continuous effect is executed,
When the symbol stops in a second mode of the specific modes after the symbol starts to fluctuate, the first image and the second image are continuously displayed, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
When the symbols stop in the second mode after the symbols start to fluctuate, a third image suggesting a special effect to be executed next is displayed following the display of the first image and the second image. , then executing the special performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
at least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is displayed while moving on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is moved and displayed on the display screen, and then frames out from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
Of the first image, the second image, and the third image, the image that has been framed out of the display screen is framed in a display screen that is different from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least one of the stopped symbols is a special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-6,
The second aspect is an aspect in which at least one of the stopped symbols is a symbol obtained by adding a predetermined image to the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The continuous variations A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 87 to 89. This fluctuating continuous performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a continuous performance across fluctuations, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Variable straddling continuous performance A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the continuous variation straddling effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display performance is a performance that displays the NEXT image G in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a, as indicated by an arrow Y. Here, along with the display of the NEXT image G, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by clearly displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, or by displaying only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a symbol confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol fixed stop production is a production in which the left production symbol 8L, the middle production symbol 8C, and the right production symbol 8R are fixed and stopped. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is an "8" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "4" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

Next, when the next variation is started, an image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 87(E). The image display performance is a performance that displays the NEXT image G in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a, as indicated by an arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that make up the production pattern (the same applies below). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Variable straddling continuous performance B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the continuous variation straddling effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively. Below, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called the "third pending icon 9A". In addition, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called the "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called the "change area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display performance is a performance that displays the NEXT image G in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a, as indicated by an arrow Y. Here, along with the display of the NEXT image G, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be performed by clearly displaying that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, or by displaying only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon are displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changing. Specifically, the color changes from white to green. The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the expectation of a jackpot, for example, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a symbol confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol fixed stop production is a production in which the left production symbol 8L, the middle production symbol 8C, and the right production symbol 8R are fixed and stopped. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is an "8" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "4" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "5" pattern. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Here, the fluctuation icon 9C remains without disappearing. Then, when the next variation is started, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A in the pending area moves to the variable area as indicated by arrow Y3 and becomes the variable icon 9C. Also in the hold area, the second hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y2 and becomes the first hold icon 9C. The third hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y1 and becomes the second hold icon 9C. In particular, the green variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation remains in the variation area, and an effect is performed in which the first pending icon 9A collides with the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special symbol pending are displayed. In particular, due to the collision of the first hold icon 9A with the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change, the change icon 9C corresponding to the current change is changed to red. When the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation is green, the variation icon 9C corresponding to the current variation is green or a display color indicating a higher level of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, two holding icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding and the said fluctuation icon 9C which changed into holding in red are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Variable straddling continuous performance C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the continuous variation straddling effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively. Below, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called the "third pending icon 9A". In addition, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called the "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called the "change area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The pattern temporary stop performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stop. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display performance is a performance that displays the NEXT image G in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a, as indicated by an arrow Y. Here, along with the display of the NEXT image G, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This re-fluctuation may be such that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate clearly, or may be such that only the NEXT image G is displayed. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon are displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changing. Specifically, the color changes from white to green. The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the expectation of a jackpot, for example, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. Further, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed in a larger size than at the start of fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a symbol confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol fixed stop production is a production in which the left production symbol 8L, the middle production symbol 8C, and the right production symbol 8R are fixed and stopped. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is an "8" pattern, the right presentation pattern 8R is a "4" pattern, and the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Here, the fluctuation icon 9C remains without disappearing. Then, when the next variation is started, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A in the pending area moves to the variable area as indicated by arrow Y3 and becomes the variable icon 9C. Also in the hold area, the second hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y2 and becomes the first hold icon 9C. The third hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y1 and becomes the second hold icon 9C. In particular, the green variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation remains in the variation area, and an effect is performed in which the first pending icon 9A collides with the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), an image display effect is executed. The image display performance is a performance that displays the NEXT image G in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving rightward on the display screen 7a, as indicated by an arrow Y. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special symbol pending are displayed. In particular, due to the collision of the first hold icon 9A with the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change, the change icon 9C corresponding to the current change is changed to green. When the variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation is green, the variation icon 9C corresponding to the current variation is green or a display color indicating a higher level of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, two reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable icon 9C that has changed to green are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop. Note that the pending icon 9A has returned to its original size.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of continuous performance across fluctuations is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the middle effect pattern 8C among the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is fixed and stopped at the "NEXT" pattern, an image display effect is executed to display the NEXT image G at the beginning of the next variation. (Fig. 87(D)(E), Fig. 89(D)(E)). In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the fluctuation icon 9C has a pending change and remains without disappearing, a performance that takes over the pending change is performed. (Fig. 88(D)(E), Fig. 89(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the performance that was performed during one fluctuation can be performed across multiple fluctuations, so the range of performances can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the shift movement of the pending icon 9A after the fixed stop in the symbol fixed stop effect, the subsequent image display effect, and the fluctuation start effect correspond to the "variable straddle effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol is confirmed and stopped in the medium performance symbol 8C, the image display performance is executed in the next variation (FIGS. 87(D)(E), FIG. 89(D)(E) )). According to this configuration, since the stop of the "NEXT" symbol and the image display effect are executed across multiple variations, the range of effects is widened and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the aspect in which the medium rendering symbol 8C of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to a "specific format," and the image display rendering corresponds to a "specific rendering."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle effect pattern 8C, following this temporary stop, an image display effect is executed during the fluctuation (FIG. 87(B)(C) ), FIGS. 88(B)(C), FIG. 89(B)(C)). According to this configuration, since the stop of the "NEXT" symbol and the image display effect are executed in one movement, it is difficult to distinguish from the case where it is executed across multiple changes, and the effect is produced without giving a sense of discomfort. The range of play can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, if the relevant fluctuation icon 9C undergoes a pending change and remains without disappearing, a performance that inherits the pending change is performed (Fig. 88(D)(E), FIG. 89(D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the pending change is carried over across the fluctuations, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the shift movement of the hold icon 9A after the fixed stop in the pattern fixed stop effect, the subsequent image display effect, and the fluctuation start effect (Fig. 88 (D) (E), Fig. 89 (D) (E)) Corresponds to "suspension continuous performance".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the fluctuation icon 9C changes to green, the first reservation icon 9A in the reservation area moves to the fluctuation area. As a result, the fluctuation icon 9C becomes green or red, which is more expected than green (FIG. 88(D)(E), FIG. 89(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the same pending change or the highly anticipated pending change can be achieved across the fluctuations, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the green variable icon 9C corresponds to the "first hold mode," and the red variable icon 9C corresponds to the "second hold mode."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the symbol fixed stop performance, the green variation icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation remains in the variation area, and the first pending icon 9A is the variation corresponding to the previous variation. An effect of colliding with the icon 9C is performed (FIG. 88(D), FIG. 89(D)). According to this configuration, the handover effect of the hold change across the fluctuations is outstanding, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of continuous performance across fluctuations will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the symbol temporary stop effect (FIG. 87(B), FIG. 88(B), FIG. 89(B)) and the pattern confirmed stop effect (FIG. 87(D), FIG. 88(D), FIG. 89(D) )), it was configured to stop in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → middle performance symbol 8C. On the other hand, the left and right performance symbols 8L, 8R may be configured to stop at the same time, or the left center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be configured to stop at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the symbol temporary stop effect (FIG. 87(B), FIG. 88(B), FIG. 89(B)) and the pattern confirmed stop effect (FIG. 87(D), FIG. 88(D), FIG. 89(D) )), the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R were configured to stop at different patterns. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same symbol (stop in a reach mode).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the pattern temporary stop effect (FIG. 87(B), FIG. 88(B), FIG. 89(B)) and the pattern confirmed stop effect (FIG. 87(D), FIG. 89(D)), the medium effect is The configuration was such that the "NEXT" symbol stopped at symbol 8C. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the "NEXT" symbol stops on the left production symbol 8L, or a configuration in which the "NEXT" symbol stops on the right production symbol 8R. Further, it may be configured such that the "NEXT" symbol stops at two or more of the temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in the pattern temporary stop effect (FIGS. 87(B), 88(B), and 89(B)), all of the left center right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Ta. On the other hand, at least one of the left-center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be configured to temporarily stop. In this case, at least one of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped may be a "NEXT" symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the embodiment described above, as the change in the hold status of the change icon 9C occurs, the change icon 9C and hold icon 9A are displayed in an enlarged manner (FIGS. 89(C) to 89(F)). On the other hand, instead of the enlarged display, the icon may be changed to a character icon related to the theme of the gaming machine 1, for example. At this time, it is conceivable to use the variable icon 9C and at least one of the three pending icons 9C as a character icon.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images,
When the symbol that is fluctuating on the display screen is fixed and stopped, it is possible to execute a fluctuating straddling performance that is a performance that has continuity from the end of the current fluctuation to the beginning of the next fluctuation in the next fluctuation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The fluctuating straddle performance includes a performance in which when a symbol that is fluctuating on the display screen is fixed and stopped in a specific manner, a specific performance is executed in the next variation so as to be continuous with the fixed stop.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
When the symbol changing on the display screen temporarily stops in the specific manner, the specific effect can be executed in the variation so as to continue with the temporary stop;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
The fluctuation straddling performance includes a holding continuation performance that inherits the pending change of the relevant fluctuation icon in the next fluctuation when the relevant fluctuation icon displayed in the relevant fluctuation area is undergoing a pending change.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the hold continuation effect, when the change icon changes to hold and becomes the first hold mode, in the next change, the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area and changes to the change icon. , the game becomes the first holding mode, or becomes the second holding mode, which has a higher expectation of shifting to an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first holding mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-5,
When the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area, the change icon of the previous change remains in the change area, and the hold icon moves to the change icon of the previous change. Execute a conflicting performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold icon linked effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 90 to 92. This hold icon interlocking performance is executed during the special symbol variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and, if it contains an instruction to execute a pending icon linked effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Hold icon linked production A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon linked effect A. This pending icon interlocking performance A is a performance that is performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the pending icon interlocking performance A, as shown in FIG. 90(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holding section 9CC, the four pending icons 9A, and the four pending holding sections 9AA. is displayed. The variable icon holding section 9CC is a holding section that is placed under the variable icon 9C and supports the variable icon 9C. The four reservation holding parts 9AA are holding parts for supporting the reservation icon 9A, respectively. The reservation icons 9A are arranged on the reservation holding section 9AA from the left in the order of winning in the first starting port 20, up to a maximum of four. In the hold icon 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the oldest winning entry to the first starting port 20) is also called the first hold icon, and in the hold icon 9A, the second hold icon from the left (first start The third pending icon from the left (the second oldest winning entry to the first opening 20) is also called the third pending icon. , the fourth pending icon from the left (the latest prize entered into the first starting slot 20) is also referred to as the fourth pending icon. In addition, in the reservation holding section 9AA, the reservation holding section that holds the first reservation icon is also called the first reservation holding section, and the reservation holding section that holds the second reservation icon is also called the second reservation holding section, The reservation holding section that holds the third reservation icon is also called the third reservation holding section, and the reservation holding section that holds the fourth reservation icon is also called the fourth reservation holding section.
The four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are formed of white circles.
Furthermore, among the pending icons 9A, the fourth pending icon is also referred to as target pending, since it is a pending icon that triggers a pending icon movement effect, which will be described later. In other words, the hold icon moving performance described below is performed based on the display of the fourth hold icon (more specifically, the game ball has entered the first start opening 20 in the three hold states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), pending icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, both the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA move upward (rise). In this case, the moving speeds of the fourth reservation icon and the fourth reservation holding section are the same. Also in the hold icon movement effect described below, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, their moving speeds are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the hold icon and the hold holding part move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold holding part, or the hold holding part may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move fast. Note that the movement direction of the hold icon (hold holding unit) is a direction different from the shift direction (leftward direction) of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), pending icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise). At the same time, the third reservation icon among the reservation icons 9A and the third reservation holding section among the reservation holding sections 9AA both move upward (rise). In this case, the moving speeds of the third hold icon (third hold holding unit) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold hold unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section) may be faster than that of the fourth reservation icon (fourth reservation holding section). The fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding unit) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold hold unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), pending icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA change direction from the top and move downward. The third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise), and the hold icon 9A moves (goes down). Both the second reservation icon and the second reservation holding section of the reservation holding section 9AA move upward (rise). In this case, the moving speeds of the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) and the third hold icon (third hold hold unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section) may be faster than the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section), or the moving speed of the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section) may be faster than the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section). The third hold icon (third hold holding unit) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold hold unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), pending icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, The third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (downward), and the hold icon The second hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise), and the second hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding part of the hold icons 9AA move upward (rise), The first reservation holding part of the holding parts 9AA moves upward (raises) together. In this case, the moving speeds of the first hold icon (first hold holding unit) and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section), or the moving speed of the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section). The second hold icon (second hold holding unit) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), pending icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon moving effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A stops. The second holding icon and the second holding holding part of the holding holding part 9AA change direction from the upper direction to the downward direction and move downward (downward), and The first reservation icon and the first reservation holding section of the reservation holding section 9AA further move upward (rise), and the variable icon 9C moves upward (rises). In this case, the variable icon holding section 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable icon 9CC may move upward together with the variable icon holding section 9CC. Furthermore, the moving speeds of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding unit), and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than that of the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section), The second hold icon (second hold holding unit) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as out-of-order symbols of "2,""3," and "4," and the second pending icon of the pending icons 9A and the pending holding section 9AA are displayed. The second reservation holding unit among the holding icons, the first holding icon among the holding icons 9A, the first holding holding unit among the holding holding units 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are in the position before movement. Go back and stop.
In this way, in the hold icon movement effect, a wave-like effect can be performed by the movement of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding part 9AA, and the variable icon 9C.
In addition, in the above-mentioned pending icon movement effect, when the pending icon 9A moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, when the reservation holding section 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (for example, as if bouncing up and down).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a pending icon shift effect is performed. In this pending icon shift effect, among the pending icons 9A, the first pending icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, and the second pending icon moves to the first pending holding section. The third hold icon moves to the second hold holding section and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding section. This becomes the third hold icon.

After that, the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding part, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding part, and the new third hold icon are added. The above-mentioned pending icon movement effect is performed using the icon (target pending) and the third pending holding unit. Thereafter, each time the pending icon shift effect is performed, the above-described pending icon moving effect is performed after the pending shift. When the target pending becomes the variable icon, an effect is performed in which the variable icon 9C moves upward like the above-mentioned pending icon movement effect E, and this series of effects ends.

[Hold icon linked production B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect B. This pending icon interlocking performance B is a performance that is performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the pending icon interlocking performance B, as shown in FIG. 91(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holding section 9CC, the four pending icons 9A, and the four pending holding sections 9AA. is displayed. The variable icon holding section 9CC is a holding section that is placed under the variable icon 9C and supports the variable icon 9C. The four reservation holding parts 9AA are holding parts for supporting the reservation icon 9A, respectively. The reservation icons 9A are arranged on the reservation holding section 9AA from the left in the order of winning in the first starting port 20, up to a maximum of four. In the hold icon 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the oldest winning entry to the first starting port 20) is also called the first hold icon, and in the hold icon 9A, the second hold icon from the left (first start The third pending icon from the left (the second oldest winning entry to the first opening 20) is also called the third pending icon. , the fourth pending icon from the left (the latest prize entered into the first starting slot 20) is also referred to as the fourth pending icon. In addition, in the reservation holding section 9AA, the reservation holding section that holds the first reservation icon is also called the first reservation holding section, and the reservation holding section that holds the second reservation icon is also called the second reservation holding section, The reservation holding section that holds the third reservation icon is also called the third reservation holding section, and the reservation holding section that holds the fourth reservation icon is also called the fourth reservation holding section.
The four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are formed of white circles.
Furthermore, among the pending icons 9A, the fourth pending icon is also referred to as target pending, since it is a pending icon that triggers a pending icon movement effect, which will be described later. In other words, the hold icon moving performance described below is performed based on the display of the fourth hold icon (more specifically, the game ball has entered the first start opening 20 in the three hold states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), pending icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA both move upward (rise), The fourth hold icon (target hold) changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(B), the change to red is shown by cross hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the fourth reservation icon and the fourth reservation holding section are the same. Also in the hold icon movement effect described below, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, their moving speeds are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the hold icon and the hold holding part move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold holding part, or the hold holding part may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move fast. Note that the movement direction of the hold icon (hold holding unit) is a direction different from the shift direction (leftward direction) of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), pending icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise). At the same time, the third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA both move upward (rise), and the third hold icon changes from white to red. (In the example of FIG. 91(C), the change to red is shown by cross hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the third hold icon (third hold holding unit) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold hold unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section) may be faster than that of the fourth reservation icon (fourth reservation holding section). The fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding unit) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold hold unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), pending icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA change direction from the top and move downward. The third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise), and the hold icon 9A moves (goes down). Both the second reservation icon and the second reservation holding section of the reservation holding section 9AA move upward (rise), and the second reservation icon changes from white to red (Fig. 91 In the example (D), the change to red is shown by cross hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) and the third hold icon (third hold hold unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section) may be faster than the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section), or the moving speed of the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section) may be faster than the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section). The third hold icon (third hold holding unit) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold hold unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), pending icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, The third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (downward), and the hold icon The second hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise), and the second hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding part of the hold icons 9AA move upward (rise), The first reservation holding section of the holding section 9AA moves upward (rises), and the first reservation icon changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(E), it changes to red). The changes are shown by cross-hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the first hold icon (first hold holding unit) and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section), or the moving speed of the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section). The second hold icon (second hold holding unit) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), pending icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon moving effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A stops. The second holding icon and the second holding holding part of the holding holding part 9AA change direction from the upper direction to the downward direction and move downward (downward), and The first reservation icon and the first reservation holding section of the reservation holding section 9AA further move upward (rise), the fluctuation icon 9C moves upward (rise), and the fluctuation icon 9C moves upward (rise). The icon 9C changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(F), the change to red is shown by cross hatching). In this case, the variable icon holding section 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable icon 9CC may move upward together with the variable icon holding section 9CC. Furthermore, the moving speeds of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding unit), and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than that of the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section), The second hold icon (second hold holding unit) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as out-of-order symbols of "2,""3," and "4," and the second pending icon of the pending icons 9A and the pending holding section 9AA are displayed. The second reservation holding unit among the holding icons, the first holding icon among the holding icons 9A, the first holding holding unit among the holding holding units 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are in the position before movement. Go back and stop. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to red hold.
In this manner, in the hold icon moving effect, each time the hold icon 9A moves, it changes to red hold, and a wave-like effect is performed by the movements of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding part 9AA, and the variable icon 9C. be able to.
In addition, in the above-mentioned pending icon movement effect, when the pending icon 9A moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, when the reservation holding section 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (for example, as if bouncing up and down).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a pending icon shift effect is performed. In this pending icon shift effect, among the pending icons 9A, the first pending icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, and the second pending icon moves to the first pending holding section. The third hold icon moves to the second hold holding section and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding section. This becomes the third hold icon.

After that, the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding part, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding part, and the new third hold icon are added. The above-mentioned pending icon movement effect is performed using the icon (target pending) and the third pending holding unit. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain as smiling characters. Thereafter, each time the pending icon shift effect is performed, the above-described pending icon moving effect is performed after the pending shift. Then, when the target pending becomes the variable icon, an effect is performed in which the variable icon 9C moves upward like the above-mentioned pending icon movement effect E while the variable icon is red pending, and these series of effects are performed. ends.

[Hold icon linked production C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect C. This pending icon interlocking performance C is a performance performed during one variation of the special symbol. In the pending icon interlocking performance C, as shown in FIG. 92(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holding section 9CC, the four pending icons 9A, and the four pending holding sections 9AA. is displayed. The variable icon holding section 9CC is a holding section that is placed under the variable icon 9C and supports the variable icon 9C. The four reservation holding parts 9AA are holding parts for supporting the reservation icon 9A, respectively. The reservation icons 9A are arranged on the reservation holding section 9AA from the left in the order of winning in the first starting port 20, up to a maximum of four. In the hold icon 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the oldest winning entry to the first starting port 20) is also called the first hold icon, and in the hold icon 9A, the second hold icon from the left (first start The third pending icon from the left (the second oldest winning entry to the first opening 20) is also called the third pending icon. , the fourth pending icon from the left (the latest prize entered into the first starting slot 20) is also referred to as the fourth pending icon. In addition, in the reservation holding section 9AA, the reservation holding section that holds the first reservation icon is also called the first reservation holding section, and the reservation holding section that holds the second reservation icon is also called the second reservation holding section, The reservation holding section that holds the third reservation icon is also called the third reservation holding section, and the reservation holding section that holds the fourth reservation icon is also called the fourth reservation holding section.
The four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are formed of white circles.
Furthermore, among the pending icons 9A, the fourth pending icon is also referred to as target pending, since it is a pending icon that triggers a pending icon movement effect, which will be described later. In other words, the hold icon moving performance described below is performed based on the display of the fourth hold icon (more specifically, the game ball has entered the first start opening 20 in the three hold states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), pending icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA both move upward (rise), The fourth hold icon (target hold) changes from a circular shape to a smiling character (hereinafter also referred to as a smiling character). In this case, the moving speeds of the fourth reservation icon and the fourth reservation holding section are the same. Also in the hold icon movement effect described below, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, their moving speeds are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the hold icon and the hold holding part move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold holding part, or the hold holding part may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move fast. Note that the movement direction of the hold icon (hold holding unit) is a direction different from the shift direction (leftward direction) of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), pending icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise). At the same time, the third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA both move upward (rise), and the third hold icon changes from the circular shape to Changes into a smiling character. In this case, the moving speeds of the third hold icon (third hold holding unit) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold hold unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section) may be faster than that of the fourth reservation icon (fourth reservation holding section). The fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding unit) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold hold unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), pending icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA change direction from the upper direction and move downward. The third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise), and the hold icon 9A moves (goes down) to Both the second hold icon and the second hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA move upward (rise), and the second hold icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. . In this case, the moving speeds of the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) and the third hold icon (third hold hold unit) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section) may be faster than that of the third reservation icon (third reservation holding section), The third hold icon (third hold holding unit) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold hold unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), pending icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, The third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (downward), and the hold icon The second hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA further move upward (rise), and the second hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding part of the hold icons 9AA move upward (rise), The first reservation holding section of the holding section 9AA moves upward (rises), and the first reservation icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the moving speeds of the first hold icon (first hold holding unit) and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) are the same. However, the moving speed is not limited to this, and the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section), or the moving speed of the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section). The second hold icon (second hold holding unit) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), pending icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon moving effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding part of the hold holding parts 9AA return to the position before movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A stops. The second holding icon and the second holding holding part of the holding holding part 9AA change direction from the upper direction to the downward direction and move downward (downward), and The first reservation icon and the first reservation holding section of the reservation holding section 9AA further move upward (rise), and the change icon 9C moves upward (rise), and the change The icon 9C changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the variable icon holding section 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable icon 9CC may move upward together with the variable icon holding section 9CC. Furthermore, the moving speeds of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding unit), and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the first reservation icon (first reservation holding section) may be faster than that of the second reservation icon (second reservation holding section), The second hold icon (second hold holding unit) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as out-of-order symbols of "2,""3," and "4," and the second pending icon of the pending icons 9A and the pending holding section 9AA are displayed. The second reservation holding unit among the holding icons, the first holding icon among the holding icons 9A, the first holding holding unit among the holding holding units 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are in the position before movement. Go back and stop. In this case, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to smiling characters.
In this way, in the hold icon movement effect, each time the hold icon 9A moves, it changes into a smiling character, and a wave-like effect is performed by the movements of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding part 9AA, and the variable icon 9C. be able to.
In addition, in the above-mentioned pending icon movement effect, when the pending icon 9A moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, when the reservation holding section 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (for example, as if bouncing up and down).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a pending icon shift effect is performed. In this pending icon shift effect, among the pending icons 9A, the first pending icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, and the second pending icon moves to the first pending holding section. The third hold icon moves to the second hold holding section and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding section. This becomes the third hold icon.

After that, the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding part, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding part, and the new third hold icon are added. The above-mentioned pending icon movement effect is performed using the icon (target pending) and the third pending holding unit. At this time, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain as smiling characters. Thereafter, each time the pending icon shift effect is performed, the above-described pending icon moving effect is performed after the pending shift. Then, when the target hold is the variable icon, the variable icon 9C is moved upward like the hold icon moving effect E while the variable icon is in the state of a smiling character, and a series of these effects is performed. ends.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned hold icon linked production C, when the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C moves in the hold icon movement effect, all the characters change to smiling characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each icon has a different character. It may be changed to . For example, in hold icon movement performance B, when the third hold icon moves, the character changes from a circle to a character AA different from the smiling character, and in hold icon movement performance C, when the second hold icon moves, it changes to a circular character AA. In the hold icon moving effect D, when the first hold icon moves, the character changes from a circle to a character CC different from the smiling character, and in the hold icon moving effect E, When the variable icon moves, it may change from a circular shape to a character DD different from the smiling character. In this way, it is possible to create an impactful performance.

In the above-mentioned hold icon interlocking performance C, after the hold icon has been shifted in the hold icon shift performance, when performing the hold icon moving performance again, it is performed with the smiling character, but this is not limited to this. After the icon shift performance, when the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts moving in the pending icon movement performance, it may change to a character different from the smiling character. For example, after the pending icon shifts in the pending icon shift effect (for example, after FIG. 92(H)), when the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts moving in the pending icon moving effect, the smiling face The character changes to a different character XX. Then, the pending icon is shifted again by the pending icon shift effect, and when the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts moving by the pending icon moving effect, it changes into a character YY different from the character XX. . In this way, it is possible to create an impactful performance.

In the above-mentioned hold icon linked effects A to C, the hold icon moving effect is performed based on the display of the fourth hold icon among the hold icons 9A, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the hold icon movement effect is performed based on the display of a hold icon different from the fourth hold icon. For example, the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the third hold icon being displayed among the hold icons 9A, or the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of the second hold icon among the hold icons 9A. It may be a configuration in which a pending icon moving effect is performed, or a configuration in which a pending icon moving effect is performed based on the display of the first pending icon among the pending icons 9A.

[Effect example]
In the holding icon interlocking effects A to C, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed that displays the holding icon 9A and the holding holding part 9AA for holding the holding icon 9A, and then the holding icon 9A and the holding holding part 9AA are displayed. A pending icon movement effect is performed in which the icons move together. According to this configuration, the effect of moving the reservation icon 9A and the movement of the reservation holding section 9AA can improve the expectation of a jackpot for the target reservation, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned hold icon interlocking performances B and C, the hold icon 9A changes from the first mode (white hold) to the second mode (green hold or first character hold) while moving together with the hold holding section 9AA. do. According to this configuration, in addition to the effect that the hold icon 9A moves and the hold holding part 9AA moves, the hold icon 9A changes from the first mode (white hold) to the second mode (green hold or green hold). 1 character pending), it is possible to further improve the expectation of a jackpot with respect to the target pending, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned pending icon interlocking effects A to C, the pending icon 9A and the pending holding section 9AA are displayed, and the variable icon 9C and the variable icon holding section 9CC for holding the variable icon 9C are displayed, and then, The fluctuation icon 9C moves according to the movement of the hold icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA. According to this configuration, as the pending icon 9A and the pending holding unit 9AA move, the variable icon 9C also moves, so it is possible to further improve expectations for a jackpot for the target pending, and improve the game. It can improve your interest.

In the above-described pending icon interlocking effects A to C, the variable icon holding section 9CC does not move even though the variable icon 9C moves. According to this configuration, as the pending icon 9A and the pending holding unit 9AA move, the variable icon 9C also moves, but the variable icon holding unit 9CC also does not move together, so that it is possible to It is possible to emphasize the variable icon 9C without losing the sense of physical sensation, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the expectation of a jackpot for the target pending, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned hold icon linked effects A to C, the hold icon 9A includes a first hold icon (for example, the leftmost hold icon) and a second hold icon (for example, the second hold icon from the left), The reservation holding section 9AA includes a first reservation holding section that holds a first reservation icon and a second reservation holding section that holds a second reservation icon. At the same time, the second reservation icon and the second reservation holding section are displayed, and then the first reservation icon and the first reservation holding section move together, and the second reservation holding section is displayed. The reservation icon and the second reservation holding section move together, and the moving direction of the first reservation holding section and the moving direction of the second reservation holding section may be different. According to this configuration, the movement of the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit and the movement of the second hold icon and the second hold hold unit move toward each other or pass each other, and The movements of the icon 9A and the reservation holding section 9AA can give an impression, and as a result, the expectation of a jackpot for the target reservation can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect that displays a hold icon and a hold holding part for holding the hold icon,
The second display effect is a display effect in which the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the hold icon changes from a first aspect to a second aspect while moving together with the hold holding unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the pending icon and the pending holding section are displayed, and the variable icon and the variable icon holding section for holding the variable icon are displayed, and then , in the second display effect, the variable icon moves in accordance with movement of the hold icon and the hold holding unit;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, although the variable icon moves, the variable icon holding section does not move.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
The hold icon includes a first hold icon and a second hold icon,
The pending icon holding section includes a first pending holding section that holds the first pending icon, and a second pending icon holding section that holds the second pending icon,
In the combination effect, the first hold icon and the first hold holding part are displayed in the first display effect, and the second hold icon and the second hold hold part are displayed. is displayed, and then, in the second display effect, the first hold icon and the first hold holding section move together, and the second hold icon and the second hold holding section move together. may move together, and the moving direction of the first holding holding part and the moving direction of the second holding part may be different.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special hold change performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 93 to 95. This special pending change performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special pending variation production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Special hold change effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the special reservation change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a fluctuating effect is executed. The fluctuating performance is a performance in which the performance symbols fluctuate at high speed. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively. Below, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called the "third pending icon 9A". In addition, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called the "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called the "change area". Further, an information image IG indicating "544 rotations left" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. This indicates the so-called number of revolutions (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "1" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be a "2" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop. Further, an information image IG indicating "544 rotations left" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a variation start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start performance (first half) is a performance performed before the performance symbols start changing. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area changes from "white" to "green". The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the expectation of a jackpot, for example, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. Furthermore, the information image at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a has been updated to read "543 rotations left." In particular, the aspect of the information image IG has changed. Specifically, the characters in the information image IG that were displayed in black have become white characters. In addition, the change in the aspect of the information image IG is performed based on the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a variation start effect (second half) is executed. The fluctuation start performance (second half) is a performance in which the first pending icon 9A, which has turned green in the pending area, moves to the relevant fluctuation area and becomes the relevant fluctuation icon 9C, and the performance symbols begin to fluctuate. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, an information image IG with white characters is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that make up the production pattern (the same applies below). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The variation icon 9C is "green". Further, an information image IG is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle performance, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Special pending change performance B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a fluctuating effect is executed. The fluctuating performance is a performance in which the performance symbols fluctuate at high speed. Here, on the display screen 7a, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively. Below, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called the "third pending icon 9A." Further, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called the "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called the "change area". Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG indicating "544 rotations left" is displayed. This indicates the so-called number of revolutions (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling. It is assumed that the display screen 7b is placed overlapping the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "1" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be a "2" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop. Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG indicating "544 rotations left" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a variation start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start performance (first half) is a performance performed before the performance symbols start changing. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area changes from "white" to "green". The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the expectation of a jackpot, for example, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. Additionally, the information image on the display screen 7b has been updated to read "543 rotations left." In particular, the aspect of the information image IG has changed. Specifically, the characters in the information image IG that were displayed in black have become white characters. In addition, the change in the aspect of the information image IG is performed based on the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), a variation start effect (second half) is executed. The fluctuation start performance (second half) is a performance in which the first pending icon 9A, which has turned green in the pending area, moves to the relevant fluctuation area and becomes the relevant fluctuation icon 9C, and the performance symbols begin to fluctuate. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. An information image IG with white characters is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The variation icon 9C is "green". Further, an information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. In the battle performance, the information image IG on the display screen 7b is not displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, the display screen 7b displays an image of the portion that covers the display screen 7a. Such a display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed during the battle performance, and the enemy character CRB may also be displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow. At this time, the ally character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, even in the jackpot confirmation performance, the display screen 7b displays the image of the portion that covers the display screen 7a. Such a display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed during the jackpot confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left presentation symbol 8L, middle presentation symbol 8C, and right presentation symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b. This is because the information image GI showing the ceiling becomes unnecessary information in the event of a jackpot.

[Special hold change effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a fluctuating effect is executed. The fluctuating performance is a performance in which the performance symbols fluctuate at high speed. Here, on the display screen 7a, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively. Below, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon corresponding to the third storage area. 9A is called the "third pending icon 9A." In addition, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called the "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called the "change area". Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG indicating "544 rotations left" is displayed. This indicates the so-called number of revolutions (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling. It is assumed that the display screen 7b is placed overlapping the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be a "1" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is fixed to a "2" symbol. Furthermore, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop. Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG indicating "544 rotations left" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a variation start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start performance (first half) is a performance performed before the performance symbols start changing. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area changes from "white" to "green". The color of the pending icon is set in stages according to the expectation of a jackpot, for example, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. Additionally, the information image on the display screen 7b has been updated to read "Congratulations." In other words, the aspect of the information image IG has changed. In addition, the change in the aspect of the information image IG is performed based on the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a variation start effect (second half) is executed. The fluctuation start performance (second half) is a performance in which the first pending icon 9A, which has turned green in the pending area, moves to the relevant fluctuation area and becomes the relevant fluctuation icon 9C, and the performance symbols begin to fluctuate. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. An information image IG reading "Congratulations" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The variation icon 9C is "green". Further, an information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other. In the battle performance, the information image IG on the display screen 7b is not displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, the display screen 7b displays an image of the portion that covers the display screen 7a. Such a display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed during the battle performance, and the enemy character CRB may also be displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow. At this time, the ally character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, even in the jackpot confirmation performance, the display screen 7b displays the image of the portion that covers the display screen 7a. Such a display on the display screen 7b is continuously performed during the jackpot confirmation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the special hold change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the holding change (aspect change) of the fluctuation icon 9C at the start of the fluctuation of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed after the first holding icon 9A is changed into holding in the holding area. This is done by moving the changed first hold icon 9A to the relevant variation area (FIG. 93(C)(D), FIG. 94(C)(D), FIG. 95(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the change in the hold icon becomes noticeable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the variable icon 9C corresponds to the "variable icon", and the first pending icon 9A corresponds to the "pending icon".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the aspect of the information image IG is changed in accordance with the change in the first reservation icon 9A (FIG. 93(C), FIG. 94(C), FIG. 95(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the information image IG corresponds to an "information image."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the aspect is changed by changing the information image IG of black characters to white characters (FIGS. 93(C) and 94(C)). According to this configuration, the change in the aspect of the information image IG becomes noticeable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the so-called number of revolutions (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling is used as the information image IG (Figs. 93(A) to (E), Figs. 94(A) to (E), Fig. 95 A)(B)). According to this configuration, since the information image IG is useful information, the change in the aspect of the information image IG becomes noticeable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b that is different from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 94(A) to (E), FIGS. 95(A) to (E)). According to this configuration, the change in the aspect of the information image IG becomes noticeable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the display screen 7a corresponds to a "display screen" and the display screen 7b corresponds to "another display screen."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the aspect of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation for a jackpot. According to this configuration, the change in the aspect of the information image IG can create a sense of expectation in the player, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the special reservation change performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the information image IG indicates the number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling, but the information image IG is not particularly limited. For example, any information that is likely to be visually recognized by the player during the game may be used, such as the number of fluctuations (number of games) since the jackpot, the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive games, etc.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the display color of the variable icon 9C (first pending icon 9A) is changed. On the other hand, the shape of the variable icon 9C (first pending icon 9A) may be changed. For example, it is conceivable to change the variable icon 9C (first pending icon 9A) to a character icon of the theme of the gaming machine 1.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, as a change in the aspect of the information image IG, the black characters are changed to white characters (FIGS. 93(C) and 94(C)). However, the display color may be changed to any display color. For example, the color may be changed to blue, green, purple, red, gold, etc.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, the aspect of the information image IG was changed based on the degree of expectation of transition to a jackpot game. On the other hand, the aspect of the information image IG may be changed based on the degree of expectation for transition to a small winning game or the degree of expectation for the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
It is possible to perform a fluctuating display of symbols on the display screen, and before the symbol starts to fluctuate, a hold icon displayed in a hold area on the display screen moves to the relevant fluctuating area on the display screen to display the fluctuation. A gaming machine in which the symbol starts changing as it becomes an icon,
The change in the aspect of the fluctuation icon with the start of fluctuation of the symbol is performed by changing the appearance of the reservation icon in the reservation area, and then moving the reservation icon whose appearance has been changed to the fluctuation area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
changing the aspect of an information image displaying predetermined information in accordance with the timing of the change in the aspect of the hold icon;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2,
The change in the aspect of the information image is performed by changing the display color of the information image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2 or aspect C2-3,
The information image is an image that displays information related to the variation of the symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-4,
The information image is an image displayed on a display screen different from the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-5,
The change in the aspect of the information image is performed based on the expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-6,
The change in the aspect of the information image changes the predetermined information displayed by the information image, and can notify the player that the transition to an advantageous gaming state has been established.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending expectation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 96 to 98. This pending expectation level performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold expectation performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The pending expectation effects A to C are executed in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state. It should be noted that the same process can be performed even in a low base state with low probability. Further, in the hold expectation level performance B, it is assumed that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Holding expectations performance A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the pending expectation level production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. Note that the hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as "first hold icon 9B," the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as "second hold icon 9B," and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. is called the "third pending icon 9B". Further, the area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed is referred to as a "hold area," and the area in which the variable icon 9C is displayed is referred to as a "change area."

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), pending change effect A is executed. Pending change effect A is a effect in which the pending icon 9B changes to an expectation level icon imitating an expectation level image. Here, the aspect of the third pending icon 9B has changed to the expectation level icon "Is it hot?" The expectation level icon "Is it hot?" means that it is unclear whether it is hot or not, and is a first mode icon that suspends suggestions of the expectation level.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols are fixed and stopped in the form of a loss. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Then, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Note that the order in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped is not limited to this. Further, two or more of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "6" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Furthermore, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One of these is an expectation level icon (first mode icon) that says "Is it hot?" The fluctuation icon 9C becomes hidden at the same time as the final stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. One of the pending icons 9B is an expectation level icon (first mode icon) "Is it hot?"

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), pending change effect B is executed. The pending change performance B is a performance in which the expectation degree icon of the first aspect (first aspect icon) changes to the expectation degree icon of the second aspect (second aspect icon). Here, the expectation level icon (first mode icon) "Is it hot?" has changed to the expectation level icon (second mode icon) "hot". With the change to the second mode icon, the "hot" expectation level image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the expectation level icon is configured to include an image obtained by reducing the expectation level image MG. Specifically, it is configured to include images obtained by reducing character images of the words "hot" and "ii" for "hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), an image movement effect is executed. The image movement performance is a performance in which the expectation level image MG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed to the lower left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. At this time, the expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its appearance is changed. Specifically, "hot" written horizontally has changed to "hot" written vertically.

Thereafter, after a plurality of fluctuations, the expectation level icon (second mode icon) moves to the relevant fluctuation area, and a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 96(G). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an expectation level icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the variable area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally such that the three production symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the production symbols is the same). The identification information indicates the numbers that make up the production pattern (the same applies below). Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. The expectation level icon (second mode icon) of the fluctuation area disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Holding expectations performance B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the pending expectation level production B. In the hold expectation performance B, the screen display device 7 has a display screen 7a and a display screen 7b arranged adjacent to the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. Note that the hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as "first hold icon 9B," the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as "second hold icon 9B," and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. is called the "third pending icon 9B". Further, the area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed is referred to as a "hold area," and the area in which the variable icon 9C is displayed is referred to as a "change area."

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the pending change effect A is executed on the display screen 7a. Pending change effect A is a effect in which the pending icon 9B changes to an expectation level icon imitating an expectation level image. Here, the aspect of the third pending icon 9B has changed to the expectation level icon "Is it hot?" The expectation level icon "Is it hot?" means that it is unclear whether it is hot or not, and is a first mode icon that suspends suggestions of the expectation level.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols are fixed and stopped in the form of a loss. First, the moving speed (variation speed) of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (variation speed) of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow, and the medium performance symbol 8C temporarily stops. Then, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Note that the order in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped is not limited to this. Further, two or more of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "6" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is a "2" pattern. Furthermore, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One of these is an expectation level icon (first mode icon) that says "Is it hot?" The fluctuation icon 9C becomes hidden at the same time as the final stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. One of the pending icons 9B is an expectation level icon (first mode icon) "Is it hot?"

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), pending change effect B is executed. The pending change performance B is a performance in which the expectation degree icon of the first aspect (first aspect icon) changes to the expectation degree icon of the second aspect (second aspect icon). Here, the expectation level icon (first mode icon) "Is it hot?" has changed to the expectation level icon (second mode icon) "hot". With the change to the second mode icon, the "hot" expectation level image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the expectation level icon includes an image obtained by reducing the expectation level image MG. Specifically, it is configured to include images obtained by reducing the character images of the characters ``netsu'' and ``ii'' of ``hot''.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), an image movement effect is executed. The image movement performance is a performance in which the expectation image MG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a is moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y, and then displayed on the display device 7b. At this time, the expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its appearance is changed. Specifically, "hot" written horizontally has changed to "hot" written vertically.

Thereafter, after a plurality of fluctuations, the expectation level icon (second mode icon) moves to the relevant fluctuation area, and a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 97(G). The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an expectation level icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the variable area. Further, on the display screen 7b, an expectation image MG of "hot" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. The jackpot mode is generally such that the three production symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the production symbols is the same). Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. The expectation level icon (second mode icon) of the fluctuation area disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. Further, on the display screen 7b, an expectation image MG of "hot" is displayed. Of course, the expectation level image MG on the display screen 7b may be hidden in conjunction with the confirmed stop.

[Holding expectations performance C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the pending expectation level performance C.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. Note that the hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as "first hold icon 9B," the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as "second hold icon 9B," and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area. is called the "third pending icon 9B". Further, the area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed is referred to as a "hold area," and the area in which the variable icon 9C is displayed is referred to as a "change area."

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), an expectation level image display effect is executed. The expectation level image display performance is a performance that displays an expectation level image in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a. Here, an expectation image MG of "hot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), an image movement effect is executed. The image movement performance is a performance in which the expectation level image MG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed to the lower left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. At this time, the expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its appearance is changed. Specifically, "hot" written horizontally has changed to "hot" written vertically.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left presentation symbol and the right presentation symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information forming the presentation symbol is the same). Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special symbol pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, a jackpot is guaranteed. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB is rainbow-colored to notify the ally character CRA of victory.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a jackpot manner. Generally, the jackpot mode is such that the left-center right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information forming the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at the "3" symbol. Furthermore, three pending icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C disappears at the same time as the final stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold expectation level effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an expectation level image MG indicating the level of expectation of transition to a jackpot game is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 98(B)). Under this configuration, when changing the mode of the pending icon 9B displayed in the pending area of the display screen 7a to suggest the level of expectation, the mode of the pending icon 9B is changed to an expectation level icon imitating the expectation level image MG. (FIG. 96(B)(E), FIG. 97(B)(E)). According to this configuration, since the pending icon changes to an expectation level icon imitating the expectation level image, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the jackpot game corresponds to an "advantageous gaming state", the expectation level image MG corresponds to an "expectation level image", and the central area of the display screen 7a where the expectation level image MG is displayed is a "predetermined area". Equivalent to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation level icon includes images obtained by reducing the character images of "Netsu" and "I" in the expectation level image MG (FIGS. 96(B), (E), FIG. 97( B)(E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation level icon indicates the expectation level like the expectation level image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, there is an expectation level icon in the first form of "Is it hot?" which suspends the suggestion of the level of expectation, and an expectation level icon in the second form of 'Hot' which suggests the level of expectation ( 96(B)(E), FIG. 97(B)(E)). According to this configuration, the player expects the expectation level icon of the first aspect to change to the expectation level icon of the second aspect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the expectation level icon in the first mode changes to the expectation level icon in the second mode, the expectation level image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 96(E), Figure 97(E)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player's expectations will increase due to the display of the expectation level image MG in addition to the change in the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in another area (FIG. 96(F), FIG. 97(F), FIG. 98(C)). . According to this configuration, compared to the case where the expectation image MG is only displayed, there is a high possibility that the player will pay attention to the expectation image MG, and the expectation image MG stands out, which gives the player even more attention. It can create a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation level image MG is moved and displayed on a display screen 7b different from the display screen 7a (FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will pay close attention to the expectation image MG, and by making the expectation image MG stand out, it is possible to make the player feel even more hopeful, thereby increasing the interest of the game. be able to. Furthermore, by displaying on another display screen 7b, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without interfering with the performance on the display screen 7a. Note that the display screen 7a corresponds to a "display screen" and the display screen 7b corresponds to "another display screen."

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the expectation image MG is displayed in a different area, it is changed to a different aspect from when it is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, "hot" written horizontally is changed to "hot" written vertically. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a performance that effectively utilizes the area of the display screen 7a (7b), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pending expectation level performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expectation image MG that is moved and displayed in the image movement effect is not displayed in subsequent effects (FIGS. 96(F) to (H), FIGS. 98(C) to (G)). On the other hand, the moving and displayed expectation level image MG may be continuously displayed until the change in the corresponding pending memory is completed. Of course, the display may be temporarily hidden while the corresponding pending memory is being changed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart. Further, the display screen 7b may be arranged so as to overlap the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has been described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the sub display screen 64 may be used to perform similar effects.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying an expectation level image in a predetermined area of a display screen that indicates the expectation level of transition to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player,
In suggesting the expectation level by changing the mode of the pending icon displayed in the pending area of the display screen, it is possible to change the mode of the pending icon to an expectation level icon imitating the expectation level image. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
The expectation level icon includes a reduced image obtained by reducing at least a portion of the expectation level image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
The expectation level icon includes a first mode icon that suspends the suggestion of the expectation level, and a second mode icon that suggests the expectation level.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
After the pending icon changes to the first mode icon, when the first mode icon changes to the second mode icon, the expectation level image is displayed in the predetermined area of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4,
The expectation level image displayed in a predetermined area of the display screen is then moved and displayed in an area different from the predetermined area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
the another area is set on a display screen different from the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5 or aspect C3-6,
When the expectation level image is displayed in the other area, it is changed in a different manner from when it is displayed in the predetermined area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operating means operation state notification effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 99 to 101. This operation means operation state notification performance is executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation state notification effect of the operating means, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). Further, the corresponding sound data is read from the ROM 103 and the sound is output from the speaker 67.

[Operation means operation status notification effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect A. FIG. 99 shows the state of the display screen 7a and the effect button 63. The operation means operation state notification performance is a performance in which a predetermined notification is given to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while the performance button 63 is being operated. The production button 63 has two states: a first state (popped-out state) when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, and a second state (a state in which the amount of protrusion is reduced or it does not protrude) when it is operated (pressed). The state can be changed to the first state), and when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image reversal expectation level suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a. The performance button 63 is in a state (OFF) in which it is not operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 99(A), in a state where the display screen 7a does not prompt the player to operate the production button 63 (outside the valid operation period), ), when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), a message appears on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 99(C). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed, and a character image of "Oi oi oi" is also displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(D), an enlarged character image and a text image of "How long have you been holding down the button?" are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the production button 63 is in an operated (pressed) state. Thereby, if the player presses the performance button 63 unintentionally, the player can be informed of this fact.

FIG. 99(E) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the performance button 63 after the notification shown in FIG. 99(D). When the player stops pressing (applying force) on the production button 63, the character image and the display of the text image "How long have you been pressing the button?" disappear. The timing at which the display of the character image and text image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the production button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the detection. You can.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a loss of "567".

When the next special pattern variation after the special pattern variation that ended in FIG. 99(F) is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 99(G). Ru. When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 again in a state where the display screen 7a does not prompt the player to operate the performance button 63 (outside the valid operation period), the counter (not shown) starts counting again. Start.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the display screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 99(H). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed at 7a, and a character image of "Oi oi oi" is also displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(I), an enlarged character image and a text image of "Press and hold again?" are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the production button 63 is being operated (pressed) again. This is because the performance button 63 was pressed for a predetermined period of time twice in a state where the player was not prompted to operate the performance button 63 (outside the valid operation period). Here, since the production button 63 was operated twice in a row: the previous change and the current change, after the character image "Oi oi oi", instead of the character image "How long are you holding down the button?" in FIG. 99(D). , the character image "Press and hold again?" in FIG. 99(I) is displayed. In addition, if the production button 63 is operated again within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the text image "How long have you held down the button?" has been displayed for the first time, the message "Hold down the button again?" will be displayed. ” is displayed.

Even if a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the character image "Press and hold again?" is displayed, the player is still operating (pressing) the production button 63 (maintaining the pressed state). ), the content of the character image changes as shown in FIG. 99(J). Here, the text image switches (changes) from "Press and hold again?" to "Please take your hand off the button!" Here, since there is a high possibility that the player is intentionally pressing the performance button 63, the character image is switched to a stronger expression to make the player stop pressing the performance button 63.

FIG. 99(K) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the performance button 63 after the notification in FIG. 99(J). When the player stops pressing (applying force) on the production button 63, the content of the character image changes while the character image continues to be displayed. Here, the text image switches from "Please take your hand off the button!" to "Yes. Great job." Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after displaying the character image "Yes. Good job," both the character image and the character image disappear.

On the other hand, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again in the state of FIG. 99(K), the character image and the character image "Oi oi oi" are displayed immediately after the operation. Here, there is a high possibility that the player is intentionally pressing the performance button 63, and is making a prank.

[Operation means operation status notification performance B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect B. FIG. 100 shows the state of the display screen 7a and the effect button 63. The operation means operation state notification performance is a performance in which a predetermined notification is given to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while the performance button 63 is being operated. The production button 63 has two states: a first state (popped-out state) when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, and a second state (a state in which the amount of protrusion is reduced or it does not protrude) when it is operated (pressed). The state can be changed to the first state), and when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In image reversal expectation level suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a. The performance button 63 is in a state (OFF) in which it is not operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 100(A), in a state where the display screen 7a does not prompt the player to operate the production button 63 (outside the valid operation period), FIG. 100(B) ), when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed, turned ON) by the player, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

As shown in FIG. 100(B), the player presses the effect button 63 before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (before the counter reaches a predetermined value) while operating (pressing) the effect button 63. When you release your hand from 63 (stop pressing), the counter stops counting and the counter value is reset. Thereafter, in a state where the player is not prompted to operate the production button 63 (outside the valid operation period), the production button 63 is operated (pressed, turned ON) by the player again, as shown in FIG. 100(D). ), the counter starts counting again.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), a message appears on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 100(E). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed, and a character image of "Oi oi oi" is also displayed. Thereby, if the player presses the performance button 63 unintentionally, the player can be informed of this fact. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at "2".

FIG. 100(F) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the performance button 63 after the notification shown in FIG. 100(E). When the player stops pressing (applying force) on the performance button 63, the display of the character image and the character image "Oi oi oi" disappears. The timing at which the display of the character image and text image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the production button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the detection. It's okay. Note that if the player continues to press the performance button 63 without stopping, the character image and text image of FIG. 99(D) of image reversal expectation level suggestion performance A are displayed. In FIG. 100(F), the right decorative pattern 8R is also stopped and displayed at "2" and is in a ready-to-reach state.

In FIG. 100 (G), in the reach state of "2↓2", a button image BTN, an operation promotion image RND consisting of the words "Press!!", and a timer bar image TBI indicating the operation validity period are displayed. has been done. Here, the player is urged to operate the performance button 63 (operation valid period). At this time, if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the counter does not start counting. This is because the operation of the effect button 63 is executed at an appropriate timing, so there is no need to call attention to an unintended operation.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(H), after the performance has progressed by operating the performance button 63 during the valid operation period, that is, after the valid operation period has passed, the player moves his hand from the performance button 63. If the press is continued without being released, a counter (not shown) starts counting again.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) passes while the player operates (presses) the production button 63 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the display screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 100(I). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed at 7a, and a character image of "Oi oi oi" is also displayed. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as "3", and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as "232" in a losing manner.

When the next special pattern variation after the special pattern variation that ended in Figure 100 (I) is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 100 (J). Ru. At this time, if the player continues to press the effect button 63 without stopping, the display of the character image and the character image "Oi oi oi" continues, and then the image reversal is shown in FIG. 99 of the expectation level suggestion effect A. The character image and text image of (D) are displayed. On the other hand, when the player stops pressing the performance button 63, the display of the character image and the character image "Oi oi oi" disappears, as shown in FIG. 100(J). The timing at which the display of the character image and text image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the production button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the detection. You can.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(K), the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, and immediately before the operation validity period starts, the player presses the production button 63. When the operation (press) of is started, the counter starts counting. This is because even if it is immediately before the operation validity period, it is still outside the operation validity period. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(L), in addition to the button image BTN, a timer bar image TBI is displayed, and when the operation validity period is reached, even if the player continues to operate (press) the production button 63. The counter's counter is stopped and the count value is reset.

[Operation means operation status notification production C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect C. 101A to 101F show the states of the left sub-display screen 64L and the sword member 65. 101 (G) to (L) show the states of the left sub-display screen 64L and the select button 68. The operation means operation state notification performance is a performance in which a predetermined notification is given to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while operating the operation unit such as the sword member 65 or the select button 68. The state of the sword member 65 can be changed between a first state in which it is not pushed downward by the player (a state in which it protrudes) and a second state in which it is pushed downward (a state in which the amount of protrusion is reduced), and the state of the sword member 65 can be changed to When not pushed downward by someone, it is maintained in the first state by the force of an internal spring. The select button 68 has two states: a first state (protruding state) when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, and a second state (a state in which the amount of protrusion is reduced or it does not protrude) when it is operated (pressed). The state can be changed to the first state), and when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image reversal expectation level suggestion performance C, first, as shown in FIG. (operation) is not being performed (OFF). , at least a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, the function display image of the gaming machine 1, the hold icon 9A, the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C, etc. may be displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

From the state shown in FIG. 101(A), in a state where the player is not prompted to operate the sword member 65 (outside the valid operation period), as shown in FIG. 101(B), the sword member 65 is When is operated (pushed downward, turned on), a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

When the player operates the sword member 65 (pushing it downward) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. 101(C), the left On the sub-display screen 64L, a character image "The sword is being pushed in" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword member 65 is placed are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the sword member 65 is in an operated (pushed downward) state. Thereby, if the player is pushing the sword member 65 in unintentionally, the player can be informed of this fact.

FIG. 101(D) shows the left sub-display screen 64L when the player stops pushing the sword member 65 after the notification in FIG. 101(C). When the player stops pushing (applying force) on the sword member 65, the text image "The sword is pushed in" and the arrow image disappear. The display of the character image and the arrow image may disappear immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pushing the sword member 65, or after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the detection. You can.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(E), in a state where the player is not prompted to operate the sword member 65 (outside the valid operation period), the sword member 65 is operated (pushed downward) again by the player. ), a counter (not shown) starts counting again.

When the player operates the sword member 65 (pushing it downward) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), the player operates the sword member 65 (pushing it downward), and when the counter reaches the predetermined value, the sword member 65 is pressed down again. , the left sub-display screen 64L displays a text image of "Therefore, don't push the sword in" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword member 65 is placed. That is, the character image shows that the sword member 65 has been operated (pressed downward) again. This is because the pressing of the sword member 65 for a predetermined period of time is repeated twice in a state where the player is not prompted to operate the sword member 65 (outside the valid operation period). Here, since the sword member 65 was operated twice in a row in the same change, the character image of "The sword is pushed in" in FIG. An image of the text "Do not push in" is displayed. In addition, if the sword member 65 is operated again within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the text image "The sword is pushed in" is displayed for the first time, the message "Therefore, the sword is pushed in" will be displayed. An image of the text "Do not push in!" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 101(G), after FIG. 101(F), when the player stops operating the sword member 65 and presses the right side of the select button 68, the message "So, don't push the sword in" appears. While the character image and arrow image disappear, the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the sword member 65 is operated.

When the player operates (long presses) the right side of the select button 68 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. On the sub-display screen 64L, a character image "The right side of the select button is pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the right side of the select button 68 is being operated (long pressed). Thereby, if the player unintentionally presses the right side of the select button 68 for a long time, the player can be informed of this fact.

As shown in FIG. 101(I), after FIG. 101(H), when the player stops operating the right side of the select button 68 and presses the left and bottom of the select button 68, the "right side of the select button is pressed." While the text image and the arrow image disappear, the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period in which the right side of the select button 68 is operated.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses while the player operates (long presses) the left and bottom of the select button 68 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. 101 (J), , the left sub-display screen 64L displays a character image "The left and bottom of the select button are pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged. That is, the character image shows that the left and bottom of the select button 68 are being operated (long-pressed). Thereby, if the player unintentionally presses the left and bottom of the select button 68 for a long time, the player can be informed of this fact.

As shown in FIG. 101(K), after FIG. 101(J), the player stops operating the left and bottom of the select button 68, but presses the top of the select button 68. The text image "is pressed" and the arrow image disappear, while the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the left and bottom of the select button 68 are operated.

When the player operates (long presses) the top of the select button 68 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in FIG. 101(L), the left On the sub-display screen 64L, a character image "The upper part of the select button is pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the upper part of the select button 68 is being operated (long-pressed). Thereby, if the player unintentionally presses the top of the select button 68 for a long time, the player can be informed of this fact.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means operation state notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the gaming machine is equipped with an effect button 63 whose state can be changed from a first state (protruding state) to a second state (non-protruding state) by the player. The production button 63 is in the first state when no force is applied by the player, and when the player maintains the production button 63 in the second state and a predetermined period has elapsed, the production button 63 is in the first state. Make prescribed notifications. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance executed by the gaming machine from not going as intended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, and it is possible to improve interest. For example, if an operation is unintentionally performed outside the valid operation period, when the valid operation period comes, the performance will progress so quickly that the player will not be able to understand what happened. Sometimes. According to this configuration, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the player maintains the effect button 63 in the second state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance executed by the gaming machine from not going as intended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, and it is possible to improve interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, after the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player returns the production button 63 to the first state, the predetermined image is displayed from the display screen 7a. disappears. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as obscuring the original performance due to the predetermined image after the unintended operation or operation state by the player is resolved, and it is possible to improve the game's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, after the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, if the player continues to hold the production button 63 in the second state, the content of the predetermined image is changes. According to this configuration, when there is a high possibility that the player is intentionally operating the performance button 63 outside the operation validity period of the performance button 63, a message can be displayed in accordance with the state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance executed by the gaming machine from not going as intended, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the predetermined image suggests that the effect button 63 is in the second state. This makes it easier for the player to notice when the player is playing the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance executed by the gaming machine from not going as intended, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the player maintains the performance button 63 in the second state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the speaker 67 outputs a predetermined sound. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance executed by the gaming machine from not going as intended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the operation means operation state notification effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means operation state notification effect A, the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(G) to (L) have been explained as the subsequent fluctuations after the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(A) to (F). However, the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(G) to (L) are not the next fluctuations after the fluctuations in FIGS. 99(A) to (F), but the fluctuations within a predetermined number of fluctuations in FIGS. 99(G) to (L). It may be.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means operation state notification effects A to C, the portions displayed as character images may be output as audio from the speaker 67. For example, "Oi oi oi" in FIG. 99(C) or "How long have you been holding down the button?" in FIG. 99(D) may be output as audio from the speaker 67. Even in this case, the player can be informed of this fact. Further, in addition to displaying the text image on the display screen 7a or the left sub-display screen 64L, the same content may be output as audio from the speaker 67.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine comprising a movable part whose state can be changed from a first state to a second state by a player,
The movable part is in the first state when no force is applied by the player,
When the player maintains the movable part in the second state for a predetermined period of time, a predetermined notification is given to the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further comprising:
Equipped with display means that can display multiple types of images,
Displaying a predetermined image on the display means when a predetermined period of time has elapsed with the player maintaining the movable part in the second state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, when the player returns the movable part to the first state, the display of the predetermined image disappears from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2 or aspect D1-3,
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, if the player continues to maintain the movable part in the second state, the content of the predetermined image changes.
◇[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-2 to D1-4,
The predetermined image suggests that the movable part is in a second state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further comprising:
Equipped with sound output means,
When the player maintains the movable part in the second state for a predetermined period of time, outputting a predetermined sound from the sound output means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The load imparting effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 102 to 104. In FIGS. 102 to 104, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This load-applying performance is achieved by applying a predetermined vibration to the performance button 63 in a so-called left-handed game state and a right-handed game state. It is possible to perform an effect of giving (transmitting) a message to the player's palm. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and, if an instruction to execute a load application effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the command on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the relay board 108 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and sends a signal to the vibration motor arranged inside the performance button 63 if an instruction to execute a load application performance is included. The signal is output and driven to generate a predetermined vibration in the production button 63, and a signal is output to a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted, which is arranged inside the production button 63. The full color LED is driven to set the effect button 63 in a predetermined light emitting mode. The load-applying performance is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading performances, but the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the load-applying performance during the performance.

The various background images for the fluctuating display of decorative patterns correspond to the production modes described below. Examples include a background image imitating ``'' and a background image imitating ``snow.'' These various background images may be still images or moving images. Here, a video is used as the background image.

Here, load imparting effect A will be explained first, load imparting effect B, and then load imparting effect C will be explained in order.

[Load imparting performance A]
First, load imparting effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining load imparting effect A. The load-applying performance A applies a predetermined vibration to the performance button 63 in a right-handed game state, thereby applying the vibration of the performance button 63 as a load to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63. It is possible to carry out the performance of (conveying). In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

The load imparting performance A in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In addition, if the image "Right-handed hit" becomes an eyesore in the various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "Right-handed hit" is started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stationary display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode in which it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low to downward, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed.In addition, the sub-variation area may not have a background image; in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that the sub-variation area has an opaque small size. Only the fluctuation effects (fluctuation display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-fluctuation area is placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are currently fluctuating as part of the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 102(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special figure reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap with the fluctuation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image will not be blocked. is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. In addition, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific production called battle production, which is a super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a. It is hidden (disappeared) from 7a onwards.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon exists at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from then on.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a (that is, the frontmost side). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in the load application effect A.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and the number of reserved games based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. 2 Number of reserved special figures (red numbers) These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that the green spherical icon may be replaced by a smiling spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number of first special symbols held (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 described above are displayed. The number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the game ball, and above the arrangement of these numbers, there is a production mode selection section SEL that allows you to select the production mode. Is displayed. In the production mode selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels are rotated. By rotating, the effect mode that has reached the specific area SELa is displayed larger than other effect modes. The performance mode located in this specific area SELa becomes the selected performance mode. In this embodiment, B mode is selected, and a theme image of this B mode (here, an image imitating a "cloud") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown. It has become.

In addition, the period during which the production mode can be selected is the period in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, as well as the period in which the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 as the decorative patterns start to fluctuate. A message "Change mode with production button" informing the user that the effect can be performed is placed at a predetermined position (for example, above the production mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The period is displayed as follows. The load imparting performance A is performed after a period during which the performance mode can be selected has elapsed. In other words, when the load imparting performance A is performed, the performance mode cannot be selected, but the performance mode that was selected before the load applying performance A is performed continues in the load applying performance A. There is.

In addition, although the production mode selection section SEL overlaps with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( In other words, since it is displayed rearward with respect to the frontmost image, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, the production mode selection section SEL is displayed even when the variation production (variation display) of the decorative pattern is being performed or when the variation production (variation display) of the decorative pattern is finished, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is possible to visually recognize the load application effect A as well. The production mode selection section SEL is designed to be hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a specific production called a battle production, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. . Further, if the performance mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore in various performances performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , the D mode, which is placed below the A mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "clouds." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where B mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , the A mode placed below the B mode will be displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode will be displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is performed, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "rain." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , B mode, which is placed below C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above C mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "snow." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where D mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , C mode, which is placed below D mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from below to above, and A mode, which is placed above D mode, is displayed from above toward a specific area SELa. The reels are then displayed in a rotating manner, and the A mode is again positioned in the specific area SELa.

In addition, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the production mode, in the three production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, the type of load application (mode of load application) ) (hereinafter referred to as a "single load application mode"), and this single load application mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one production mode (single production mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (load application modes) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"). Any one of the plurality of load application modes may be selected and performed. In the load imparting effect A in this embodiment, mode B is selected, and a single load imparting mode is performed.

Here, a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes will be briefly explained. Among the single load application modes, there is only a normal load application mode in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 like a "buzz". On the other hand, the plurality of load application modes include a first specific time load application in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the production button 63 such as "bubbu", "bubbu", "bubbu", and "bub"; A second specific load application mode in which a single tightening vibration is applied three times and a triple tightening vibration is applied, a 337-beat vibration is applied such as "bububu", "bububu", and "bububububububu". The third specific time load application mode, vibrations are applied in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) in the following manner: A fourth specific time load application mode in which a long vibration is applied in a "booooooooooooooo" manner (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds). There are aspects.

It should be noted that the expected winning degree in the variation is set in advance for a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes. For a single load application mode (one-tightening vibration), a hit expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned white spherical icon is set in advance. Among the plurality of load application modes, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has a hit expectation corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above, and the fourth specific The expected hit level corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon in which the time load application mode (vibration where the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one)) is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration) corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above. The winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned red spherical icon for the three-pin tightening vibration) is set in advance, and the winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned green spherical icon for the first specific load application mode (one-pin tightening vibration) is set in advance. The winning expectation corresponding to the white spherical icon described above is set in advance in the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration). For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest probability of winning, and the fourth specific time load application mode (the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) ) vibration) is expected to be the second hit, the second specific time load application mode (three-tightening vibration) is expected to be third, and the first specific time load application mode (single-tightening vibration) is expected to be the third best. The expectation of winning is the fourth highest, and the fifth specific load application mode (long vibration) and the single load application mode (one-tightening vibration) have the lowest expectation of winning.

Arrangement of a sub-variation area on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the above-mentioned small-sized left decorative pattern, small-sized medium decorative pattern, and small-sized right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed). Above is displayed a load imparting execution permission selection section FG indicating whether execution of the load imparting effect A is permitted. When execution of load application effect A is permitted, the image "Load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection section FG, whereas when execution of load application effect A is not permitted. , an image "Load assignment OFF" is displayed in the load assignment execution permission selection section FG. In this embodiment, execution of the load application performance A is permitted, and an image "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection section FG. The period during which the execution of the load imparting effect A can be selected is the same period as the above-mentioned period during which the effect mode can be selected, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. , With the start of the variation of the decorative patterns, the above-mentioned message "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) during which the display is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the performance mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. During this period, each time the select button 68, which is a button different from the performance button 63, is operated, execution of the load-applying performance A is permitted and execution of the load-applying performance A is not permitted (execution of the load-applying performance A is prohibited). You can now choose.

Although the load application execution permission selection section FG overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that the right decorative pattern 8R and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed rearward with respect to the side (that is, the frontmost side), visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images. In other words, the load application execution permission selection section FG is displayed even when the decorative pattern variation presentation (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variation presentation (variation display) is finished, and the right decorative pattern 8R Since the visibility is not obstructed by other images, it can be seen even in the load application A. When a specific performance called a battle performance that is a super reach is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. ing. Furthermore, if the load assignment execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in the various effects that are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. .

In the game state of right-handed hitting, load imparting effect A may be started. As shown in FIG. 102(A), when the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), the right The decorative pattern 8R (number "3" here) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state where the light is turned off.

Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position. As a result, the two pending icons are in stock.

Next, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, and then change at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which change at high speed, become the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decoration. The pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1". , and the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of number "3", then the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the order of number "2", the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the order of number "3", and the right The decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the miss is confirmed and displayed. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously), and the miss is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, in the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern in FIGS. 102(B) and (C), the presentation button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the presentation button 63 is in a state where the light is turned off. There is.

Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position to the fourth hold display position. As a result, one pending icon is kept in stock. In addition, in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern in FIG. 102(D), the performance button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the performance button 63 is in a state where the light is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(E), in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are in a semi-transparent state and are in a display mode that changes at high speed, load application effect A is started. In this embodiment, as described above, the B mode is selected. Therefore, as the load application performance A, a single load application mode performed in the B mode, C mode, and D mode is performed. When the load application performance A is started, a vibration is applied to the performance button 63, and when the state in which the performance button 63 does not vibrate starts to change to the normal load application state, the performance button 63 is changed to " It vibrates like "beep". The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load. In addition, in the load application performance A, before applying the one-chop vibration to the performance button 63 (or immediately before or at the same time as applying the one-choice vibration to the performance button 63), the performance button 63 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (here Now, the light emission mode corresponding to the normal load application mode is set to white blinking), and this predetermined light emission mode is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 ends. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load imparting effect A ends.

When the load imparting effect A is finished, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that change at high speed change to the left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern. It decelerates in the order of 8C and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the number "1", then the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decoration The symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the miss is confirmed and displayed. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (simultaneously), and the miss is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, in the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern in FIG. 102(F), with the end of load imparting effect A, the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is turned off. The situation is as follows.

Subsequently, in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, when the user starts moving towards the variable display position 9Cd, a variable display of the decorative pattern (fluctuating display) is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B is placed at the first hold display position to the fourth hold display position. There will be no. This results in a state in which no pending icons are stocked at all.

Note that some players like the operation of the performance button 63 and others dislike the operation of the performance button 63, so the player presses the select button 68 during the demonstration performance for waiting for customers or during the game. By doing so, it is possible to set the prohibition of the operation of the effect button 63 or to cancel the prohibition of the operation of the effect button 63.

Further, the load imparting effect A is executed only when the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be canceled. In other words, the load imparting performance A is not executed at all when the activation of the performance button 63 is set to be prohibited. On the other hand, the plurality of full-color LEDs arranged inside the production button 63 and capable of emitting multicolor light are driven in accordance with the progress of the production, regardless of whether or not the inhibition of operation of the production button 63 is set to be canceled. The effect button 63 can be set in a predetermined light emitting mode indicating the degree of expectation of winning. For example, in FIG. 102(E), the effect button 63 flashes white as the light emission mode corresponding to the normal load application mode, regardless of whether or not the prohibition of the operation of the effect button 63 is set to be canceled. . As a result, although some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and others dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the effect of the effect button 63 in a predetermined light emitting mode can indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, even if the production button 63 is set to be prohibited from operating and the player is prevented from executing the load-applying production A, the production button 63 can be set in a predetermined light emitting mode. is now possible.

The predetermined lighting modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting The expectation of winning increases in the order of → golden color (yellow) lighting → rainbow color lighting (high probability of winning). In addition to lighting in each color, there are also flashes in each color, such as white flashing, blue flashing, green flashing, red flashing, purple flashing, golden (yellow) flashing, and rainbow color flashing, such as white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → The expectation of winning increases in the following order: red flashing → purple flashing → golden color (yellow) flashing → rainbow color flashing (high chance of winning). In addition, the expectation of winning is basically higher when each color blinks compared to when each color lights up. For example, a blinking white color has a higher chance of winning than a lit white light, but a blinking white color has a lower chance of winning than a blinking blue light, which has the second highest probability of winning, and a blinking rainbow color is the same as a lit rainbow color. The same holds true for flashing other colors, except that the winning expectation (high probability of winning) is as follows.

[Load imparting performance B]
Next, load imparting effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining load imparting effect B. Load-applying performance B applies a predetermined vibration to the performance button 63 in a right-handed game state, thereby applying the vibration of the performance button 63 as a load to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63. It is possible to carry out the performance of (conveying). In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

The load imparting performance B in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of ``right-handed hitting'' is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it so that it is the closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', so that the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In addition, if the image "Right-handed hit" becomes an eyesore in various performances that are played out on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "Right-handed hit" is started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stop display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern will move from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing its speed from low to downward (after the decorative pattern is in the display mode in which it is about to move). The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed.In addition, the sub-variation area may not have a background image; in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that the sub-variation area has an opaque small size. Only the fluctuation effects (fluctuation display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the expiration of the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 103(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special symbol reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the fluctuation areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, other effect images is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a. It is hidden (disappeared) from 7a onwards.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon exists at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from then on.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the closest side of the display screen 7a (that is, at the forefront). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in load application B.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 Number of reserved special figures (red numbers) These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the fluctuating icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in shape and color can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that the green spherical icon may be replaced by a smiling spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number of first special symbols held (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 described above are displayed. The number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the game ball, and above the arrangement of these numbers, there is a production mode selection section SEL that allows you to select the production mode. Is displayed. In the production mode selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels are rotated. By rotating, the effect mode that has reached the specific area SELa is displayed larger than other effect modes. The performance mode located in this specific area SELa becomes the selected performance mode. In this embodiment, A mode is selected, and a theme image of this A mode (here, an image imitating a "sun") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown. It has become.

Note that the period during which the production mode can be selected is the period in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, as well as the period in which the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 as the decorative patterns start to fluctuate. A message "Change mode with production button" informing that it is possible is placed at a predetermined position (for example, above the production mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The period is displayed as follows. The load imparting performance B is performed after a period during which the performance mode can be selected has elapsed. In other words, when load-applying performance B is performed, it becomes impossible to select the performance mode, but the performance mode that was selected before load-applying performance B is performed continues in load-applying performance B. There is.

In addition, although the production mode selection section SEL overlaps with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( In other words, since it is displayed rearward with respect to the frontmost image, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, the production mode selection section SEL is displayed even when the variation production (variation display) of the decorative pattern is being performed or when the variation production (variation display) of the decorative pattern is finished, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other Since the visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is possible to visually recognize it even in the load application effect B. The production mode selection section SEL is designed to be hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a specific production called a battle production, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. . Furthermore, if the performance mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore during various performances performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , the D mode, which is placed below the A mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "clouds." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where B mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , the A mode placed below the B mode will be displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode will be displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "rain." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , B mode, which is placed below C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above C mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "snow." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where D mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , C mode, which is placed below D mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from below to above, and A mode, which is placed above D mode, is displayed from above toward a specific area SELa. The reels are then displayed in a rotating manner, and the A mode is again positioned in the specific area SELa.

In addition, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the production mode, in the three production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, the type of load application (mode of load application) ) (hereinafter referred to as a "single load application mode"), and this single load application mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one production mode (single production mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (load application modes) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"). Any one of the plurality of load application modes may be selected and performed. In load application performance B in this embodiment, mode A is selected, and any one of the load application modes is selected from a plurality of load application modes.

Here, a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes will be briefly described. Among the single load application modes, there is only a normal load application mode in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 like a "buzz". On the other hand, the plurality of load application modes include a first specific time load application in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the production button 63 such as "bubbu", "bubbu", "bubbu", and "bub"; A second specific load application mode in which a single tightening vibration is applied three times and a triple tightening vibration is applied, a 337-beat vibration is applied such as "bububu", "bububu", and "bububububububu". The third specific time load application mode, vibrations are applied in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) in the following manner: A fourth specific time load application mode in which a long vibration is applied in a "booooooooooooooo" manner (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds). There are aspects.

It should be noted that the expected winning degree in the variation is set in advance for a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes. For a single load application mode (one-tightening vibration), a hit expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned white spherical icon is set in advance. Among the plurality of load application modes, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has a hit expectation corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above, and the fourth specific The expected hit level corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon in which the time load application mode (vibration where the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one)) is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration) corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above. The winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned red spherical icon for the three-pin tightening vibration) is set in advance, and the winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned green spherical icon for the first specific load application mode (one-pin tightening vibration) is set in advance. The winning expectation corresponding to the white spherical icon described above is set in advance in the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration). For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest probability of winning, and the fourth specific time load application mode (the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) ) vibration) is expected to be the second hit, the second specific time load application mode (three-tightening vibration) is expected to be third, and the first specific time load application mode (single-tightening vibration) is expected to be the third best. The expectation of winning is the fourth highest, and the fifth specific load application mode (long vibration) and the single load application mode (one-tightening vibration) have the lowest expectation of winning.

Arrangement of a sub-variation area on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the above-mentioned small-sized left decorative pattern, small-sized medium decorative pattern, and small-sized right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed). Above is displayed a load imparting execution permission selection section FG indicating whether execution of the load imparting effect B is permitted. When execution of load application effect B is permitted, the image "Load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection section FG, whereas when execution of load application effect B is not permitted. , an image "Load assignment OFF" is displayed in the load assignment execution permission selection section FG. In this embodiment, the execution of load application performance B is permitted, and an image "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection section FG. The period during which the execution of the load imparting effect B can be selected is the same period as the above-mentioned period during which the effect mode can be selected, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. , With the start of the variation of the decorative patterns, the above-mentioned message "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) during which the display is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the performance mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. During this period, each time the select button 68, which is a button different from the performance button 63, is operated, execution of the load-applying performance B is permitted and execution of the load-applying performance B is not permitted (execution of the load-applying performance B is prohibited). You can now choose.

Although the load application execution permission selection section FG overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that the right decorative pattern 8R and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed rearward with respect to the side (that is, the frontmost side), visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images. In other words, the load application execution permission selection section FG is displayed even when the decorative pattern variation presentation (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variation presentation (variation display) is finished, and the right decorative pattern 8R Since the visibility is not obstructed by other images, it can be seen even in the load application effect B. When a specific performance called a battle performance that is a super reach is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. ing. Furthermore, if the load application execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in the various effects that are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. .

In the game state of right-handed hitting, load imparting effect B may be started. As shown in FIG. 103(A), when the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), the right The decorative pattern 8R (number "3" here) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state where the light is turned off.

Subsequently, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, the variable effect of the decorative pattern ( The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position. As a result, the two pending icons are in stock.

Here, the load imparting effect B is started in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a translucent state and are in a display mode that changes at high speed. In this embodiment, as described above, the A mode is selected. Therefore, as the load application performance B, one load application mode is selected from among the plurality of load application modes that are performed only in the A mode.

When the load application performance B is started, as one of the load application modes among the plurality of load application modes, 337 rhythmic vibrations such as "bububu", "bubububu", and "bububububububu" are given here. The third specific time load application mode is selected, and first, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the application of 337 beat vibrations to the production button 63 is started and the production button 63 is not vibrated. The change to the third specific time load application mode is started, and the production button 63 vibrates three times in a row. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time corresponding to the time when the "buzz" vibrates), and then, as shown in FIG. “B” vibrates only three times in a row. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time corresponding to the time when the vibration makes a "buzz"), and then, as shown in FIG. The "b" vibrates only 7 times in a row. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load. In addition, in load application performance B, before applying the 337 time signature vibration to the performance button 63 in FIGS. ), the effect button 63 is set to a predetermined light emission mode (here, yellow (gold) blinking is the light emission mode corresponding to the third specific time load application mode in which 337 beat vibration is applied), and this predetermined light emission is performed. The mode is maintained until the vibration of the production button 63 ends. The reason why the production button 63 uses yellow (gold) as the emission color of the predetermined emission mode in FIGS. This is because the winning expectation corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon mentioned above is set in advance, so the color is the same as the yellow (gold) colored in this star-shaped icon. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load imparting effect B ends.

When the load imparting performance B ends, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the left decoration is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2". The pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (number "2" here) to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to have a variable effect (fluctuating display), is in a state where no vibration is generated in the effect button 63, and is in a state where the effect button 63 is turned off.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a battle performance that is a super reach is started. When the battle effect starts, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It unfolds. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation level of a jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first pending display position 9Bd, the second pending display position 9Bd, and the third pending display position 9Bd. , the fourth pending display position 9Bd, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9B disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the production mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. In addition, in the battle performance, with the end of the load imparting performance B, the performance button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the performance button 63 is in a state where the light is turned off.

In the battle performance, when the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (confirmed display), and after that it becomes a hit. A winning game (winning effect) is started. When a win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a again, Furthermore, the production mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and do not line up and are out of alignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further, The production mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation.

Note that some players like the operation of the performance button 63 and others dislike the operation of the performance button 63, so the player presses the select button 68 during the demonstration performance for waiting for customers or during the game. By doing so, it is possible to set the prohibition of the operation of the effect button 63 or to cancel the prohibition of the operation of the effect button 63.

Further, the load imparting performance B is executed only when the inhibition of operation of the performance button 63 is set to be canceled. In other words, the load imparting effect B is not executed at all when the actuation of the effect button 63 is set to be prohibited. On the other hand, the plurality of full-color LEDs arranged inside the production button 63 and capable of emitting multicolor light are driven in accordance with the progress of the production, regardless of whether or not the inhibition of operation of the production button 63 is set to be canceled. The effect button 63 can be set in a predetermined light emitting mode indicating the degree of expectation of winning. For example, in FIGS. 103(B) to 103(D), regardless of whether the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be canceled or not, the effect button 63 is set to the third specific time load to which 337 beat vibrations are applied. Yellow (gold) blinks as a light emission mode corresponding to the application mode. As a result, although some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and others dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the effect of the effect button 63 in a predetermined light emitting mode can indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, even if the operation of the performance button 63 is set to be prohibited and the player is prevented from executing the load imparting performance B, the performance button 63 can be set in a predetermined light emitting mode. is now possible.

The predetermined lighting modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting The expectation of winning increases in the order of → golden color (yellow) lighting → rainbow color lighting (high probability of winning). In addition to lighting in each color, there are also flashes in each color, such as white flashing, blue flashing, green flashing, red flashing, purple flashing, golden (yellow) flashing, and rainbow color flashing, such as white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → The expectation of winning increases in the following order: red flashing → purple flashing → golden color (yellow) flashing → rainbow color flashing (high chance of winning). In addition, the expectation of winning is basically higher when each color blinks compared to when each color lights up. For example, a blinking white color has a higher chance of winning than a lit white light, but a blinking white color has a lower chance of winning than a blinking blue light, which has the second highest probability of winning, and a blinking rainbow color is the same as a lit rainbow color. The same holds true for flashing other colors, except that the winning expectation (high probability of winning) is as follows.

[Load imparting effect C]
Next, the load imparting effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the load imparting effect C. The load-applying performance C applies a predetermined vibration to the performance button 63 in a right-handed game state, thereby applying the vibration of the performance button 63 as a load to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63. It is possible to carry out the performance of (conveying). In addition, the gaming state of right-handed hitting can include a state of shifting to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state of shifting to a so-called b-time saving (play time).

The load application performance C in this embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this gaming state of right-handed hitting, an image (not shown) of “right-handed hitting” is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image "Right hit" is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by placing it closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images are arranged behind the image ``Right-handed hit'', and the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images do not block the image ``Right-handed hit''. In other words, the visibility of the image "Right hit" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In addition, if the image "Right-handed hit" becomes an eyesore in the various performances unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state "Right-handed hit" is started until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (or until the number of variations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), the image "Right hit" continues to be displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the "Right hit" image is displayed. The image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, to briefly explain the plurality of decorative patterns, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the fluctuating display of multiple decorative designs, each decorative design changes from number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" ”→Number “8”→Number “9”→Number “1”→Number “2”→… The reels are rotated in this order (fluctuating display).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) in a floating display mode, and then ( In other words, since the stationary display of the decorative pattern has been canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode in which it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low to downward, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. The state changes and the display mode changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a small opaque left decorative pattern, a small opaque medium decorative pattern, and a small opaque left decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. A sub-fluctuation area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is fluctuated (variably displayed). The background image of the sub-variation area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.The sub-variation area is Since it is placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by arranging the sub variable area so that it is closest to you, the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a sub-variable area. The sub-variation area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, which is placed behind the variation area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variation area and is blocked by the other effect image. The sub-variation area is not obstructed.Furthermore, the sub-variation area is placed to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and the fourth hold display position and the hold placed at the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is caused by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth pending display position, and the pending icon placed at the fourth pending display position. Visibility is not obstructed.In addition, the sub-variation area may not have a background image; in this case, the sub-variation area becomes a transparent area, so that the sub-variation area has an opaque small size. Only the fluctuation effects (fluctuation display) of the left decorative pattern, the small opaque medium decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is a monochrome color of the background image of the sub-variable area. It is unified to another single color (for example, bright color (yellow or white)) with high contrast, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area and is always in an opaque state, so that it does not become semi-transparent even when variation starts, and furthermore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. do not have. In addition, the small decorative pattern is similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, each of which is reduced in size, instead of using a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may also be shaped like this.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small A variable display (variable display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small All the right decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even when the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The small-sized left decorative pattern, the small-sized medium decorative pattern, and the small-sized right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided at the lower right side of the display screen 7a, but instead of this, The sub-variation area is arranged at the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). ). In this case, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same horizontal line, or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed from top to bottom. A decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern may be arranged and displayed in this order on the same vertical line.

Next, to briefly explain the fluctuating icons and pending icons, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are currently being changed as the second special symbol pending. The variable icon 9C (for example, see FIG. 104(B)) corresponding to the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed (placed) on. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd, a second reservation display area is provided as a second special symbol reservation. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. It is now possible to do so. The four pending display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Bd, a second pending display position 9Bd, a third pending display position 9Bd, and a fourth pending display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Bd. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9B displayed at the pending display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap with the fluctuation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9B, the pending display position 9Bd is arranged so that it is closest to you, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B, and the pending display position 9Bd. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image will not be blocked. is placed behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd may be blocked by other production images. do not have. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other performance images. In addition, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, pending icon 9B, and pending display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific production called battle production, which is a super reach, is displayed and started on the display screen 7a. It is hidden (disappeared) from 7a onwards.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon exists at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three items whose white spherical pending icons are not consumed and are kept in stock. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from then on.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed in a state where the numbers are spaced from each other on the right side (that is, the numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions).

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a (that is, the frontmost side). Since it is displayed at the rear of the left decorative pattern 8L, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates) or when the decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuates). Since visibility is not obstructed by the image, it is always visible even in load application C.

In addition, the number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers), and the number of second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. (red numbers) are placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, but are placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. You can do it like this. In this case, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in blue numbers. The numbers may be displayed in red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line and spaced apart from each other on the left and right), The number of first special pattern reservations based on the ball entering the ball is shown in blue numbers on the upper side, and the number of second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown in red numbers spaced apart from each other on the bottom side. (that is, these numbers may be displayed vertically apart on the same vertical line). In addition, the sub-variable area where the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed) is set to the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2.The number of reserved special drawings (red numbers) and the arrangement of these numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that they do not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area. .

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that the green spherical icon may be replaced by a smiling spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number of first special symbols held (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 described above are displayed. The number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the game ball, and above the arrangement of these numbers, a production mode selection section SEL that can select the production mode is arranged. Is displayed. In the production mode selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels are rotated. By rotating, the effect mode that has reached the specific area SELa is displayed larger than other effect modes. The performance mode located in this specific area SELa becomes the selected performance mode. In this embodiment, A mode is selected, and a theme image of this A mode (here, an image imitating a "sun") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown. It has become.

In addition, the period during which the production mode can be selected is the period in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, as well as the period in which the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 as the decorative patterns start to fluctuate. A message "Change mode with production button" informing the user that the effect can be performed is placed at a predetermined position (for example, above the production mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The period is displayed as follows. The load imparting performance C is performed after a period during which the performance mode can be selected has elapsed. In other words, when the load imparting performance C is performed, the performance mode cannot be selected, but the performance mode that was selected before the load applying performance C is performed continues in the load applying performance C. There is.

In addition, although the production mode selection section SEL overlaps with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( In other words, since it is displayed rearward with respect to the frontmost image, visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, the production mode selection section SEL is displayed even when the variation production (variation display) of the decorative pattern is being performed or when the variation production (variation display) of the decorative pattern is finished, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other Since the visibility is not obstructed by the image, it can be seen even in the load application effect C. The production mode selection section SEL is designed to be hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a specific production called a battle production, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. . Furthermore, if the performance mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore during various performances performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area SELa of the production mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , D mode, which is placed below A mode, will be displayed with the reels rotating from below to above, and B mode, which is placed above A mode, will be displayed from above toward a specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as theme images imitating "clouds." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where B mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , the A mode placed below the B mode will be displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode will be displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "rain." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , B mode, which is placed below C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above C mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reels are displayed as if they were rotating.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a background image and various performance images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "snow." When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 in a state where D mode is located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area SELa of the performance mode selection unit SEL is moved downward. By heading to , C mode, which is placed below D mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from below to above, and A mode, which is placed above D mode, is displayed from above toward a specific area SELa. The reels are then displayed in a rotating manner, and the A mode is again positioned in the specific area SELa.

In addition, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the production mode, in the three production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, the type of load application (mode of load application) ) (hereinafter referred to as a "single load application mode"), and this single load application mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one production mode (single production mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (load application modes) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"). Any one of the plurality of load application modes may be selected and performed. In the load imparting effect C in this embodiment, mode A is selected, and any one of the load imparting modes is selected from a plurality of load imparting modes.

Here, a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes will be briefly described. Among the single load application modes, there is only a normal load application mode in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 in the manner of a "buzz". On the other hand, the plurality of load application modes include a first specific time load application in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the production button 63 in the manner of "bubbu", "bubbu", "bubbu", "bubu" A second specific load application mode in which single tightening vibration is applied three times and triple tightening vibration is applied, 337 beat vibrations are applied such as "bububu", "bububu", and "bububububububu". The third specific time load application mode, vibrations are applied in which the number of vibrations gradually increases in the following manner: "buzz", "bubbu", "bubbubu", "bubbububu", "bubbubububu" (the number of vibrations increases by one) A fourth specific time load application mode in which a long vibration is applied in a "booooooooooooo" manner (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds). There are aspects.

It should be noted that the expected winning degree in the variation is set in advance for a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes. For a single load application mode (one-tightening vibration), a hit expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned white spherical icon is set in advance. Among the plurality of load application modes, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has a hit expectation corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above, and the fourth specific The expected hit level corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon in which the time load application mode (vibration where the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one)) is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration) corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above. The winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned red spherical icon for the three-pin tightening vibration) is set in advance, and the winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned green spherical icon for the first specific load application mode (one-pin tightening vibration) is set in advance. The winning expectation corresponding to the white spherical icon described above is set in advance in the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration). For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest probability of winning, and the fourth specific time load application mode (the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) ) vibration) is expected to be the second hit, the second specific time load application mode (three-tightening vibration) is expected to be third, and the first specific time load application mode (single-tightening vibration) is expected to be the third best. The expectation of winning is the fourth highest, and the fifth specific load application mode (long vibration) and the single load application mode (one-tightening vibration) have the lowest expectation of winning.

Arrangement of a sub-variation area on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the above-mentioned small-sized left decorative pattern, small-sized medium decorative pattern, and small-sized right decorative pattern are variablely produced (variably displayed). A load imparting execution permission selection section FG indicating whether execution of the load imparting effect C is permitted is displayed above. When execution of load application effect C is permitted, the image "Load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection section FG, whereas when execution of load application effect C is not permitted. , an image "Load assignment OFF" is displayed in the load assignment execution permission selection section FG. In this embodiment, execution of the load application effect C is permitted, and an image "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection section FG. The period during which the execution of load imparting effect C can be selected is the same period as the above-mentioned period during which the effect mode can be selected, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. , With the start of the variation of the decorative patterns, the above-mentioned message "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) during which the display is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the performance mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. During this period, each time the select button 68, which is a button different from the performance button 63, is operated, execution of the load-applying performance C is permitted and execution of the load-applying performance C is not permitted (execution of the load-applying performance C is prohibited). You can now choose.

Although the load application execution permission selection section FG overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that the right decorative pattern 8R and other images are located at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is displayed rearward with respect to the side (that is, the frontmost side), visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images. In other words, the load application execution permission selection section FG is displayed even when the decorative pattern variation presentation (variation display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variation presentation (variation display) is finished, and the right decorative pattern 8R Since the visibility is not obstructed by other images, it can be seen even in the load application effect C. When a specific performance called a battle performance that is a super reach is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. ing. Furthermore, if the load application execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in the various effects that are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R. .

In the game state of right-handed hitting, load imparting effect C may be started. As shown in FIG. 104(A), when the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), the right The decorative pattern 8R (number "3" here) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state where the light is turned off.

Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9B placed at the first pending display position 9Bd, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change all at once (at the same time) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position. 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving towards the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position. As a result, the two pending icons are in stock.

Here, the load imparting effect C is started in a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a translucent state and are in a display mode that changes at high speed. In this embodiment, as described above, the A mode is selected. Therefore, as the load application performance C, one load application mode is selected from among the plurality of load application modes that are performed only in the A mode.

When the load application effect C is started, as one of the load application modes among the plurality of load application modes, here, vibrations are made such as "buzz", "bubbu", "bubbu", "bubbububu", and "bubbubububu". The fourth specific time load application mode in which vibrations are applied in which the number of vibrations increases gradually (the number of vibrations increases by one) is selected, and first, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the number of vibrations is displayed on the production button 63. The application of vibrations that gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by 1) starts, and the effect button 63 starts to change from the non-vibration mode to the fourth specific time load application mode, and the effect button 63 changes to "B". The "bu" vibrates just once. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time corresponding to the time it vibrates as a "buzz"), and then, as shown in FIG. “B” vibrates only twice in a row. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time corresponding to the time when the "buzz" vibrates), and then, as shown in FIG. “B” vibrates only three times in a row. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time corresponding to the time when the "buzz" vibrates), and then, as shown in FIG. "B" vibrates only 4 times in a row. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time corresponding to the time when the vibration vibrates), and then, as shown in FIG. "B" vibrates only 5 times in a row. The vibration of the performance button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the top surface of the performance button 63 as a load. In addition, in the load imparting effect C, in FIGS. 104(B) to 104(F), the number of vibrations increases gradually (the number of vibrations increases by one) to the effect button 63 (or the effect button 63 vibrates). The number of vibrations increases gradually (the number of vibrations increases by 1) immediately before or at the same time as applying the vibration), and the production button 63 is activated in a predetermined lighting mode (here, the number of vibrations increases gradually (the number of vibrations increases by 1). ) The light emission mode corresponding to the fourth specific time load application mode in which vibration is applied is purple flashing), and this predetermined light emission mode is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 ends. The reason why the production button 63 uses purple as the light emitting color in the predetermined light emitting mode in FIGS. This is because the winning expectation corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon (vibration, which increases once each time) is set in advance, so it is the same color as the purple color of this spherical icon. When the vibration of the performance button 63 ends, the load imparting performance C ends.

When the load imparting effect C ends, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the left decoration The pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (number "2" here) to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to have a variable effect (fluctuating display), is in a state where no vibration is generated in the effect button 63, and is in a state where the effect button 63 is turned off.

Next, although not shown, a battle performance that is a super reach begins. When the battle effect starts, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It unfolds. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation level of a jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first pending display position 9Bd, the second pending display position 9Bd, and the third pending display position 9Bd. , the fourth pending display position 9Bd, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9B disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the production mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a.

In the battle performance, when the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (confirmed display), and after that it becomes a hit. A winning game (winning performance) is started. When a win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed on the display screen 7a again, Furthermore, the production mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and do not line up and are out of alignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further, The production mode selection section SEL and the load application execution permission selection section FG are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation.

Note that some players like the operation of the performance button 63 and others dislike the operation of the performance button 63, so the player presses the select button 68 during the demonstration performance for waiting for customers or during the game. By doing so, it is possible to set the prohibition of the operation of the effect button 63 or to cancel the prohibition of the operation of the effect button 63.

Further, the load imparting effect C is executed only when the prohibition of operation of the effect button 63 is set to be canceled. In other words, the load imparting effect C is not executed at all when the actuation of the effect button 63 is set to be prohibited. On the other hand, the plurality of full-color LEDs arranged inside the production button 63 and capable of emitting multicolor light are driven in accordance with the progress of the production, regardless of whether or not the inhibition of operation of the production button 63 is set to be canceled. The effect button 63 can be set in a predetermined light emitting mode indicating the degree of expectation of winning. For example, in FIGS. 104(B) to (F), the number of vibrations of the production button 63 gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) regardless of whether the prohibition of the production button 63 is set to be canceled or not. The light blinks in purple as a light emission mode corresponding to the fourth specific time load application mode in which vibration is applied. As a result, although some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and others dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the effect of the effect button 63 in a predetermined light emitting mode can indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, even if the production button 63 is set to be prohibited from operating and the player is prevented from executing the load imparting production C, the production button 63 can be set in a predetermined light emitting mode. is now possible.

The predetermined lighting modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting The expectation of winning increases in the order of → golden color (yellow) lighting → rainbow color lighting (high chance of winning). In addition to lighting in each color, there are also flashes in each color, such as white flashing, blue flashing, green flashing, red flashing, purple flashing, golden (yellow) flashing, and rainbow color flashing, such as white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → The expectation of winning increases in the following order: red flashing → purple flashing → golden color (yellow) flashing → rainbow color flashing (high chance of winning). In addition, the expectation of winning is basically higher when each color blinks compared to when each color lights up. For example, a blinking white color has a higher chance of winning compared to a lit white light, but a blinking white color has a lower chance of winning than a blinking blue light, which has the second highest probability of winning, and a blinking rainbow color is the same as a lit rainbow color. The same holds true for flashing other colors, except that the winning expectation (high probability of winning) is as follows.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the load imparting effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a predetermined load is applied to the player based on the progress of the performance in the load application performance A shown in FIG. 102, the load application performance B shown in FIG. 103, and the load application performance C shown in FIG. 104. Among the production modes (a plurality of production modes) including A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode, B mode excluding A mode (specific production mode), In the three production modes (other production modes), C mode and D mode, the production button 63 (loading means) is actuated to apply a single load (first load) to the player consisting of a single tightening vibration. ) and actuates the production button 63 (loading means) in A mode (specific production mode) to give the player one-pin tightening vibration and three-pin tightening vibration that are different from a single load (first load). , 337 beat vibrations, vibrations that gradually increase the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by 1), and long vibrations. 102(E) can be executed in A, FIG. 103(B) to (D) in load imparting effect B, and FIGS. 104(B) to (F) in load imparting effect C). According to this configuration, unlike a single load (first load) that is applied only in A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode, multiple loads are applied. Since the load (second load) is applied to the player by operating the production button 63 (loading means), the operation of the production button 63 (loading means) in B mode, C mode and D mode However, by providing variations in the operation of the production button 63 (load means) only in A mode, the operation of the production button 63 (load means) in A mode is different from that in B mode, It is possible to have an operation that does not exist at all in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the C mode and the D mode. In other words, the operation of the production button 63 (load means) in the A mode is caused to occur as a so-called "back mode" operation that does not exist in the operation of the production button 63 (load means) in the B mode, C mode, and D mode. This makes it possible to make the player momentarily unaware of what has happened (in other words, an unexpected event occurs), thereby making it possible to surprise and delight the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load imparting effect A in FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C in FIG. There is only one type of load (second load): single-tightening vibration, three-tightening vibration, three-three-seven-beat vibration, vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one), and long vibration. There are multiple types of vibrations. According to this configuration, the plurality of loads (second loads) can have variations in the operation of the production button 63 (load means), unlike a single load (first load). This emphasizes to the player the monotony of the operation of the production button 63 (load means) in B mode, C mode, and D mode where only a single load (first load) exists, and In the A mode where (second load) exists, it is possible to make the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) less likely to feel monotonous. In addition, the A mode in which there are multiple loads (second load) is different from the B mode, C mode, and D mode in which there is only a single load (the first load), so the player can This load (second load) can be enjoyed as a so-called "back mode".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load imparting effect A in FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C in FIG. A single load (first load) or multiple loads (second load) can be applied. According to this configuration, when the performance button 63 (loading means) is operated, the load by the performance button 63 (loading means) is applied to the player's palm, so that the player's fingertip A single load (first load) or a plurality of loads (second load) caused by the performance button 63 (load means) is easily transmitted to the player, compared to the back of the hand.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect in the load imparting effect A in FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C in FIG. It can be executed in a state where the prohibition of operation is set to be canceled. Some players like to operate the effect button 63 (loading means), while others dislike operating the effect button 63 (loading means), so the player is set to prohibit the operation of the effect button 63 (loading means). If the player is allowed to cancel the prohibition of the production button 63 (loading means), the first production will cancel the prohibition of the production button 63 (loading means). It can only be executed in the configured state.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load imparting effect A in FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C in FIG. A second method in which the LED (light emitting means) is set in a predetermined light emitting mode and the display button 63 (loading means) emits light emitting decoration regardless of whether or not the prohibition of operation of the display button 63 (loading means) is set to be canceled by the player. It is now possible to execute the performance. Some players like the operation of the production button 63 (loading means), and some players dislike the operation of the production button 63 (loading means), but since the production button 63 (loading means) is in a predetermined light emission mode, Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning, suppose that the production button 63 (loading means) is set to be prohibited from operating and the player is prevented from executing the first production. Also, the effect button 63 (loading means) can be set in a predetermined light emitting mode.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the load imparting effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
Load application performance A in FIG. 102, load application performance B in FIG. 103, and load application performance C in FIG. 104 are performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, it was performed in a so-called right-handed game state (a specific game state different from the normal game state). However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In other words, the game may be performed in a so-called left-handed game state (normal game state).

[Modification 2]
In the load imparting performance A in FIG. 102, the load imparting performance B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting performance C in FIG. He had been hired. However, the frame movable body 69 may also be used. As mentioned above, the frame movable bodies 69 are normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, and are moved toward each other from the retracted positions toward the handle 60. The handle 60 can be moved (advanced) and stopped at a position where it touches the handle 60. When the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position, it comes into contact with the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60. Therefore, by providing multiple operating modes of the frame movable body 69, the player's right hand It is possible to have a wide variety of ways of touching. Therefore, the same effect as that achieved by operating the production button 63 can be obtained by operating the frame movable body 69.

[Modification 3]
In the load imparting performance A in FIG. 102, the load imparting performance B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting performance C in FIG. He had been hired. However, the wind may be sent forward from the handle 60. For example, a speaker may be provided inside the handle 60, and a paper cone of the speaker may be vibrated to send air to the front of the handle 60 so as to hit the right hand (palm) of the player who operates the handle 60. By providing a plurality of modes in which the cone of the speaker is vibrated, the manner in which the player's right hand (palm) is touched can be varied. Therefore, the same effect as that achieved by operating the effect button 63 can be obtained by blowing air inside the handle 60 by the vibration of the paper cone of the speaker. The cone of the speaker is driven by the audio control board 106 under the control of the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control).

[Modification 4]
In the load imparting performance A in FIG. 102, the load imparting performance B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting performance C in FIG. He had been hired. However, a blower device may be provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53 (for example, at any one of the upper, right, and left positions) to blow air toward the player's face. By providing a plurality of types of wind blown from the blower, it is possible to provide a wide variety of types of wind that hit the player's face. Therefore, the same effect as that achieved by operating the production button 63 can be obtained by blowing air from the blower device provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53. Note that the blowing device may be one in which a propeller fan is rotated to blow wind forward, or may be one in which a cone of a speaker is vibrated to blow wind forward. Further, the blower device is driven by the audio control board 106 under the control of the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control).

[Modification 5]
In the load imparting effect B in FIGS. 103(B) to 103(D), before applying the 337 beat vibration to the effect button 63, the effect button 63 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (here, the 337 beat vibration is applied). The light emitting mode corresponding to the third specific time load application mode is a yellow (gold) blinking) that is maintained until the vibration of the production button 63 ends. This is because the expectation of winning corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon mentioned above is set in advance for the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration), so this star-shaped icon This is because the color is the same as the colored yellow (gold). However, in order to finally make the effect button 63 yellow (gold) in Fig. 103(D), for example, in Fig. 103(B), the effect button 63 is made to blink white, and in Fig. 103(C), the effect button 63 is changed to red. The color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning, such as the effect button 63 flashing yellow (gold) in FIG. 103(D). In 103(B), the effect button 63 flashes in white, in FIG. 103(C), the effect button 63 flashes in white, and in FIG. 103(D), the effect button 63 flashes in yellow (gold). The color of the light emitting mode may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning, or the effect button 63 may be made to blink red in FIG. 103(B), and the effect button 63 may be made to blink red in FIG. 103(C). , the color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning, such that the effect button 63 flashes yellow (gold) in FIG. 103 (D), In B), the effect button 63 is blinking white, in FIG. 103(C), the effect button 63 is blinking yellow (gold), and in FIG. 103(D), the effect button 63 is blinking yellow (gold). The color of the light emission mode 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning.

[Modification 6]
In the load imparting effect C shown in FIGS. 104(B) to (F), before applying vibrations to the effect button 63 whose number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one), the effect button 63 is pressed in a predetermined light emitting mode. (Here, the vibration of the production button 63 ends as the light emission mode corresponds to the fourth specific time load application mode in which vibrations are applied where the number of vibrations increases gradually (the number of vibrations increases by one).) It was maintained until This is because the fourth specific time load application mode (vibration where the number of vibrations increases gradually (the number of vibrations increases by one)) has a preset hit expectation corresponding to the purple spherical icon mentioned above. This is because the color is the same as the purple colored spherical icon. However, in the end, in FIG. 104(F), the effect button 63 blinks in purple, for example, in FIG. 104(B), the effect button 63 blinks in white, and in FIG. 104(C), the effect button 63 blinks in blue. , the effect button 63 is set so that the effect button 63 blinks in green in FIG. 104(D), the effect button 63 blinks in red in FIG. 104(E), and the effect button 63 blinks in purple in FIG. 104(F). The color of the light emitting mode may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning. In FIG. 104(B), the effect button 63 is blinking white, in FIG. 104(C), the effect button 63 is blinking white, in FIG. 104(D), the effect button 63 is blinking green, and in FIG. 104(E), the effect button 63 is blinking white. The color of the light emitting mode of the production button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning, such that the production button 63 is blinking red and the production button 63 is blinking purple in Fig. 104(F). 104(B), the effect button 63 blinks in blue, in FIG. 104(C), the effect button 63 blinks in blue, in FIG. 104(D), the effect button 63 blinks in green, and in FIG. 104(E), the effect button 63 blinks in blue. The color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning, such that the effect button 63 is blinking red and the effect button 63 is blinking purple in FIG. 104(F). In (B), the effect button 63 is blinking white, in Fig. 104 (C), the effect button 63 is blinking blue, in Fig. 104 (D), the effect button 63 is blinking green, and in Fig. 104 (E), the effect button 63 is blinking blue. The color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the expectation of winning, such that the effect button 63 blinks purple in FIG. 104(F).

[Modification 7]
In the load imparting effect A in FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C in FIG. Arrangement of these numbers according to the number of first special figure reservations based on the ball entering (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 (red numbers) A production mode selection section SEL from which a production mode can be selected was arranged and displayed above. However, the production mode selection section SEL is displayed on the display screen 7a only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state until it ends, and only during this predetermined period, the A mode, B mode, and C mode are displayed. , D mode, the player may be able to select one by operating (pressing) the effect button 63. In other words, the production mode may be changed only during a predetermined period from when the jackpot game state occurs until it ends. As mentioned above, the period during which the production mode can be selected is the period during which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, as well as the period during which the production mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the production button 63 as the decorative patterns start to change. A message stating that the mode can be changed is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the production mode selection section SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It was the period in which it was placed and displayed. Therefore, by making the production mode selection possible only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state to the end of the jackpot game state, the production mode selection section SEL can be selected outside of this predetermined period. In addition to the display screen 7a, there is no display on the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R, so in addition to the display screen 7a, the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R are used to Various performances can be performed without the SEL becoming an eyesore at all.

[Modification 8]
Load application performance A in FIG. 102, load application performance B in FIG. 103, and load application performance C in FIG. . In this way, you can increase the variety of performances.

[Modification 9]
The load imparting effect A in FIG. 102, the load imparting effect B in FIG. 103, and the load imparting effect C in FIG. 104 may not include some of the effects described, or may include other effects. .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a load means capable of applying a predetermined load to a player based on the progress of a performance,
Activating the load means to apply a first load to the player in a performance mode other than a specific performance mode among the plurality of performance modes, and activating the load means in the specific performance mode. capable of executing a first effect that applies a second load different from the first load to the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
Only one type of the first load exists,
There are multiple types of the second load,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
The load means applies the first load or the second load to the player's palm;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3,
The first performance is executable in a state where the prohibition of the operation of the load means is set to be canceled by the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
A second effect can be executed in which the light emitting means provided on the load means is set in a predetermined light emitting mode and the light emitting decoration by the load means is performed regardless of whether or not the prohibition of operation of the load means is set to be canceled by the player. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The game state continuation suggestion performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 105 to 107. This game state continuation suggestion performance is executed during the special symbol variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a game state continuation suggestion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).
In the gaming states in the gaming state continuation suggestion performances A to C shown below, the "probability variable state" refers to the "high probability high base state", the "time saving state" refers to the "low probability high base state", "Normal state" refers to "low probability low base state".

[Playing state continuation suggestion production A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion performance A. The game state continuation suggestion performance A is performed when the game state changes from a variable probability state to a normal state, and is a performance performed across a plurality of variations in special symbols. Specifically, the probability variable game state production and the result production A, which will be described later, are performed during the probability variation state, and these productions are performed during one variation of the special symbol. Further, the result performance B and the normal game state performance are performed during the normal state, and these performances are performed during one variation of the special symbols.

In the game state continuation suggestion performance A, as shown in FIG. 105(A), first, a variable probability game state performance is performed. In this variable probability game state production, the background image for variable probability XEA is used as the background image, and the variation production of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and the variable probability state suggestion display XE1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display XE2, and the end of the probability variation state. A suggestion display XE3A is performed. The variable probability state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the gaming state is a variable probability state, and is indicated by the words "variable probability mode" in the figure. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XE2 is a display for urging the player to play right-handed. The variable probability state end suggestion display XE3A is a display suggesting that the variable probability state ends, and the characters "LAST" are shown in the figure. The background image for probability variation XEA is shown by cross hatching in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), result performance A is performed. In this result performance A, a result background image XEB with a door as a motif is used as a background image, and a right-handed play suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display that shows game result information, and shows the number of consecutive wins (number of jackpots during a consecutive game) during a consecutive game in a time-saving state or variable probability state, and the number of balls won during a consecutive game. Information representing the is displayed. In the example shown in the figure, the game result information display XE4 shows that the number of consecutive chances was 10 consecutive chances and the number of acquired balls was 15,000 balls.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), result performance B is performed. In this result presentation B, the result background image XEB and the right-handed play suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and furthermore, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. This advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display that suggests that a gaming state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player will continue, and specifically, it includes a button image representing the production button 63 and the button image shown therein. Contains the words "Continue!" In the figure, the result background image XEB is shown by hatching including a rectangular pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a normal game state effect is performed. In this normal game state presentation, the normal background image XEC is used as a background image, a variable presentation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and furthermore, a normal state suggestion display XE6 is performed. Further, in the normal game state production, a production is performed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. The normal state suggestion display XE6 is a display indicating that the gaming state is the normal state, and is indicated by the words "normal mode" in the figure. The normal background image XEC is indicated by predetermined hatching in the figure.

[Playing state continuation suggestion production B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion performance B. The game state continuation suggestion performance B is performed when the game state changes from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and is a performance that is performed over a plurality of variations in special symbols. Specifically, the time-saving game state performance and the result performance A, which will be described later, are performed during the time-saving state, and these performances are performed during one variation of the special symbol. Further, the result performance B and the normal game state performance are performed during the normal state, and these performances are performed during one variation of the special symbols.

In the game state continuation suggestion performance B, as shown in FIG. 106(A), first, a time-saving game state performance is performed. In this time-saving game state production, the time-saving background image XED is used as the background image, and the variation production of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and the time-saving state suggestion display XE7, the right-handed play suggestion display XE2, and the end of the time-saving state. A suggestion display XE3B is performed. The time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the gaming state is a time-saving state, and is indicated by the words "time-saving mode" in the figure. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XE2 is a display for urging the player to play right-handed. The time-saving state end suggestion display XE3B is a display suggesting that the time-saving state ends, and the characters "LAST" are shown in the figure. The time-saving background image XED is shown with predetermined hatching in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), result performance A is performed. In this result performance A, a result background image XEB with a door as a motif is used as a background image, and a right-handed play suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display that shows game result information, and shows the number of consecutive wins (number of jackpots during a consecutive game) during a consecutive game in a time-saving state or variable probability state, and the number of balls won during a consecutive game. Information representing the is displayed. In the example shown in the figure, the game result information display XE4 shows that the number of consecutive chances was 10 consecutive chances and the number of acquired balls was 15,000 balls.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), result performance B is performed. In this result presentation B, the result background image XEB and the right-handed play suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and furthermore, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. This advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display that suggests that a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player will continue, and specifically, it includes a button image representing the production button 63 and the button image shown therein. Contains the words "Continue!" In the figure, the result background image XEB is shown by hatching including a rectangular pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a normal game state effect is performed. In this normal game state presentation, the normal background image XEC is used as a background image, a variable presentation of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and furthermore, a normal state suggestion display XE6 is performed. Further, in the normal game state production, a production is performed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. The normal state suggestion display XE6 is a display indicating that the gaming state is the normal state, and is indicated by the words "normal mode" in the figure. The normal background image XEC is indicated by predetermined hatching in the figure.

[Game state continuation suggestion production C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion performance C. The game state continuation suggestion performance C is performed when the game state changes from the variable probability game state to the time saving game state, and is a performance that is performed over a plurality of variations in special symbols. Specifically, the probability variable game state production and the result production A, which will be described later, are performed during the probability variation state, and these productions are performed during one variation of the special symbol. Further, the result performance B and the time-saving game state performance are performed during the time-saving state, and these performances are performed during one variation of the special symbol.

In the game state continuation suggestion performance C, as shown in FIG. 107(A), first, a variable probability game state performance is performed. In this variable probability game state production, the background image for variable probability XEA is used as the background image, and the variation production of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and the variable probability state suggestion display XE1, the right-hand hitting suggestion display XE2, and the end of the probability variation state. A suggestion display XE3A is performed. The variable probability state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the gaming state is a variable probability state, and is indicated by the words "variable probability mode" in the figure. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XE2 is a display for urging the player to play right-handed. The variable probability state end suggestion display XE3A is a display suggesting that the variable probability state ends, and the characters "LAST" are shown in the figure. The background image for probability variation XEA is shown by cross hatching in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), result performance A is performed. In this result performance A, a result background image XEB with a door as a motif is used as a background image, and a right-handed play suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display that shows game result information, and shows the number of consecutive wins (number of jackpots during a consecutive game) during a consecutive game in a time-saving state or variable probability state, and the number of balls obtained during a consecutive game. Information representing the is displayed. In the example shown in the figure, the game result information display XE4 shows that the number of consecutive chances was 10 consecutive chances and the number of acquired balls was 15,000 balls.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), result performance B is performed. In this result presentation B, the result background image XEB and the right-handed play suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and furthermore, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. This advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display that suggests that a gaming state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player will continue, and specifically, it includes a button image representing the production button 63 and the button image shown therein. Contains the words "Continue!" In the figure, the result background image XEB is shown by hatching including a rectangular pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a time-saving game state effect is performed. In this time-saving game state performance, the time-saving background image XED is used as a background image, a variation performance of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and furthermore, a time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is performed. Further, in the time-saving game state production, a production is performed in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight, and the right-handed hitting suggestion display XE2 is continuously displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the gaming state is a time-saving state, and is indicated by the words "time-saving mode" in the figure. The time-saving background image XED is indicated by predetermined hatching in the figure.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming state continuation suggestion performances A to C, probability variable state suggestion display XE1, right hit suggestion display XE2, probability variable state end suggestion display XE3A, time saving state end suggestion display XE3B, gaming result information display XE4, advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion The display XE5, the normal state suggestion display XE6, the time saving state suggestion display XE7, the ally character CRA, and the enemy character CRB each have background images (background image for probability change XEA, background image for result XEB, background image for normal use XEC, time saving The background image XED) is displayed on the front side.
In addition, in the game state continuation suggestion performances A and B, when transitioning from result performance B to normal game state performance, the door of the result background image XEB of result performance B opens and the normal background image XEC is displayed. , decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a normal state suggestion display XE6, an ally character CRA, an enemy character CRB, etc. are displayed on the front side thereof.
In the above game state continuation suggestion performance C, when transitioning from result performance B to normal game state performance, the door of the result background image XEB of result performance B opens and the time-saving background image XED is displayed, and the front side thereof , decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a time-saving state suggestion display XE7, an ally character CRA, an enemy character CRB, a right-handed hitting suggestion display XE2, etc. are displayed.

[Modified example]
In the game state continuation suggestion performance A, the variable probability game state production and the result production A are performed when the variable probability state is present, and the result performance B and the normal game state production are performed when the state is normal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable probability game state performance, the result performance A, and the result performance B may be performed in the variable probability state, and the normal game state performance may be performed in the normal state.
In addition, in the game state continuation suggestion performance B, the time-saving game state performance and the result performance A are performed when the time is shortened, and the result performance B and the normal game state performance are performed when the normal game state is in the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state performance, result performance A, and result performance B may be performed during the time-saving state, and the normal game state performance may be performed during the normal state.
Furthermore, in the game state continuation suggestion performance C, the variable probability game state production and the result production A are performed when the variable probability state is present, and the result performance B and the time-saving game state production are performed when the time-saving state is present. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable probability game state performance, the result performance A, and the result performance B may be performed in the variable probability state, and the time-saving game state performance may be performed in the time-saving state.

In the above gaming state continuation suggestion performances A to C, the gaming result information display XE4 is not displayed during the result performance B in which the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion is At the time of result presentation B in which display XE5 is displayed, game result information display XE4 may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the game state continuation suggestion performance A, when the player is in a relatively advantageous probability state, a probability variable game state display is performed in which a probability variable state suggestion display XE1 indicating that the player is in a probability variable state is performed, and then the probability variable state is changed. , a result performance that displays an advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 that suggests that the gaming state (probable variable state) that is advantageous to the player will continue despite the transition to a normal state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. B is performed. According to this configuration, even though the state changes from the variable probability state to the normal state, the display XE5 indicating the continuation of the advantageous gaming state is intentionally performed, so even if the state enters the normal state, the player will not be able to proceed to the next variable state. A sense of expectation can be imparted, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to continue playing the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above game state continuation suggestion performance A, when the probability change state is relatively advantageous to the player, a probability change state suggestion display XE1 indicating that the player is in a probability change state is performed, and after that, game result information is displayed. A result performance A is performed in which game result information display XE4 representing . According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the game result information in the variable probability state, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to aim for the variable probability state. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggestion performance A, the result performance A that displays the game result information display XE4 representing game result information is performed in a variable probability state, and indicates that a gaming state advantageous to the player (probable variable state) will continue. Result performance B that carries out the suggested advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 is performed in the normal state. According to this configuration, by performing the result performance A in which the game result information display XE4 representing the game result information is performed when the player is in the variable probability state, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to aim for the variable probability state, and the player By daringly performing result presentation B during the normal state, which displays an advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 that suggests that a gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player will continue, it gives the player a sense of anticipation for the next probability variation state. This can prevent players from losing their desire to continue playing. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggestion performance A, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 in the result performance B is performed after the game result information display XE4 in the result performance A disappears. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5, and even in the normal state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the next probability-changing state, and the player is encouraged to continue playing. It is possible to suppress the loss of motivation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming state continuation suggestion performance A, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 in the result performance B is configured to include a button image representing the performance button 63. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 to the player, and even in the normal state, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the next probability change state, and the player can be suppressed from impairing the player's desire to continue playing the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a display performance that performs a first gaming state suggestion display indicating that the player is in the first gaming state when the first gaming state is relatively advantageous to the player;
A gaming state where the second display effect is present and which is advantageous to the player even though the first gaming state shifts to a second gaming state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state. This is a display effect that suggests the continuation of an advantageous gaming state, indicating that the
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
A third display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a display performance that displays game result information representing game result information,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the combination performance, the third display performance is performed during the first gaming state, and the second display performance is performed during the second gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
In the combination performance, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display in the second display performance is performed after the game result information display in the third display performance disappears;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
In the combination performance, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display in the second display performance includes an operation means image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 in a low probability state (including a low probability low base state and a normal state). (When the ceiling counter reaches 0), a transition is made to play time (low probability/high base state, time saving state). In other words, after the state becomes low probability after the previous jackpot, when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 500, the game shifts to play time (low probability high base state, time saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the gaming states in the following mid-gaming mode change performances A to C, the "probability change state" refers to the "high probability high base state", and the "time saving state" refers to the "low probability high base state", "Normal state" refers to "low probability low base state".

In-game mode change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 108 to 110. This in-gaming mode change performance is a performance performed when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to change the mode during the game, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) to display images for mode change effects during the game.

[Playing mode change effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining mode change effect A during the game. In the in-game mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display performance, the normal background image XF is used as a background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and displayed in a stopped state. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the gaming state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500, a ceiling reaching effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108(B). In the ceiling reaching effect, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and a ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1, a time-saving state entering suggestion display XF2, a right-handed hitting start suggestion display XF3, and an ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1 is a display suggesting that the number of changes of the special symbol has reached 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is written as "ceiling reached!!" in the figure. Time-saving state entering suggestion display ” is written. The right-handed batting start suggestion display XF3 is a display for prompting the player to start right-handed batting, and is written as "start right-handed batting" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a time-saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display performance, the background image is changed to a time-saving background image XFA, and a time-saving state suggestion display XF4, a right-handed play suggestion display XF5, and a time-saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 are displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is a time-saving state, and is written as "time-saving" in the figure. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XF5 is a display for encouraging the player to play right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed hitting" in the figure. The time saving state duration suggestion display XF6 is a display showing the remaining number of times (corresponding to the number of changes in the special symbol) of the time saving state (play time), and is written as "350 times remaining" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hit suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode suggestion display XF7 will be added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among a plurality of game modes (display modes) during play time (during time saving state). In this mid-game mode change effect, when the player reaches the ceiling and shifts to play time (time saving state), mode A from among a plurality of game modes is automatically selected at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a player mode change image display effect is performed. This player mode change image display performance is a performance performed after the special symbol has changed 50 times from the mode suggestion display performance shown in FIG. 108(D). In this player mode change image display performance, the time saving background image XFA, time saving state suggestion display XF4, right hit suggestion display XF5, time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, mode suggestion display XF7, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed. and the mode change display XF8 is displayed. Since the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6 has changed by 50 since the mode suggestion display performance, it is written as "300 more times" in the figure.
This mode change display XF8 is displayed on the display screen 7a by the player operating the production button 63 and the select button 68 while the special symbols are changing or while waiting for a customer (while the special symbols are stopped changing). It will pop up. The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection promotion display XF8B. Mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the production button 63 and the words "Choose a mode with!!" adjacent to the button image, that is, it encourages the player to select a mode with the button. It is displayed.
By operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63, the player can select one mode display XF8A from among the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects mode display XF8A representing mode B from among three mode displays XF8A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), a mode change completion display effect is performed. In this mode change completion display effect, the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B." In addition, in the mode change completion display effect, the time-saving background image XFA, the time-saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-hand hit suggestion display XF5, the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode change display XF8 will be deleted.

[Playing mode change effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining mode change performance B during the game. In the in-game mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display performance, the normal background image XF is used as a background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and displayed in a stopped state. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the gaming state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500, a ceiling reaching effect is performed as shown in FIG. 109(B). In the ceiling reaching effect, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and a ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1, a time-saving state entering suggestion display XF2, a right-handed hitting start suggestion display XF3, and an ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1 is a display suggesting that the number of changes of the special symbol has reached 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is written as "ceiling reached!!" in the figure. Time-saving state entering suggestion display ” is written. The right-handed batting start suggestion display XF3 is a display for prompting the player to start right-handed batting, and is written as "start right-handed batting" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), a time saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display effect, the background image is changed to a time-saving background image XFA, and a time-saving state suggestion display XF4, a right-handed play suggestion display XF5, and a time-saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 are displayed. The time saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is a time saving state, and is written as "time saving" in the figure. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XF5 is a display for encouraging the player to play right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed hitting" in the figure. The time saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 is a display representing the remaining number of times (corresponding to the number of changes in the special symbol) of the time saving state (play time), and is written as "350 times left" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hit suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode suggestion display XF7 will be added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among a plurality of game modes (display modes) during play time (during time saving state). In this mid-game mode change effect, when the player reaches the ceiling and shifts to play time (time saving state), mode A from among a plurality of game modes is automatically selected at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display performance, the display of the time-saving background image XFA, the time-saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-hand hit suggestion display XF5, the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA continues to be displayed. , the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed as a pop-up. Since the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6 has changed by 50 since the mode suggestion display performance, it is written as "300 more times" in the figure.
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection promotion display XF8B. Mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the production button 63 and the words "Choose a mode with!!" adjacent to the button image. In other words, by combining these, it is possible to select a mode with the button. The display is designed to encourage players to:
By operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63, the player can select one mode display XF8A from among the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects mode display XF8A representing mode B from among three mode displays XF8A.

In this automatic mode change image display performance, the special symbol changes 500 times counting from the previous jackpot and enters the play time (time saving state), and then the special symbol changes 50 times (the mode shown in Figure 109 (D) This is a performance that is performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 50 times from the suggestion display performance. In other words, this automatic mode change image display performance is a performance performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 550 times since the previous jackpot. Further, this automatic mode change image display performance is performed during one variation of the special symbol without spanning over a plurality of variations of the special symbol.
In other words, this automatic mode change image display performance is performed on the condition that the special symbol has changed 550 times counting from the previous jackpot during one change of the special symbol without straddling multiple changes of the special symbol. This is done automatically without any human intervention.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), a mode change completion display effect is performed. In this mode change completion display performance, the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B." In addition, in the mode change completion display effect, the time saving background image XFA, time saving state suggestion display XF4, right hit suggestion display XF5, time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and mode change display XF8 will be deleted.

[Playing mode change effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining mode change effect C during the game. In the in-game mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display performance, the normal background image XF is used as a background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and displayed in a stopped state. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the gaming state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500, a ceiling reaching effect is performed as shown in FIG. 110(B). In the ceiling reaching effect, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and a ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1, a time-saving state entering suggestion display XF2, a right-handed hitting start suggestion display XF3, and an ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling reaching suggestion display XF1 is a display suggesting that the number of changes of the special symbol has reached 500 times (the ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is written as "ceiling reached!!" in the figure. Time-saving state entering suggestion display ” is written. The right-handed batting start suggestion display XF3 is a display for prompting the player to start right-handed batting, and is written as "start right-handed batting" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), a time-saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display performance, the background image is changed to a time-saving background image XFA, and a time-saving state suggestion display XF4, a right-handed play suggestion display XF5, and a time-saving state continuation period suggestion display XF6 are displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is a time-saving state, and is written as "time-saving" in the figure. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XF5 is a display for encouraging the player to play right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed hitting" in the figure. The time saving state duration suggestion display XF6 is a display showing the remaining number of times (corresponding to the number of changes in the special symbol) of the time saving state (play time), and is written as "350 times remaining" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right hit suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode suggestion display XF7 will be added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among a plurality of game modes (display modes) during play time (during time saving state). In this mid-game mode change effect, when the player reaches the ceiling and shifts to play time (time saving state), mode A from among a plurality of game modes is automatically selected at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display performance, the display of the time-saving background image XFA, the time-saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-hand hit suggestion display XF5, the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA continues to be displayed. , the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed as a pop-up. Since the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6 has changed by 50 since the mode suggestion display performance, it is written as "300 more times" in the figure.
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A, a mode selection promotion display XF8B, and a mode selection time suggestion display XF8C. Mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the production button 63 and the words "Choose a mode with!!" adjacent to the button image. In other words, by combining these, it is possible to select a mode with the button. The display is designed to encourage players to: The mode selection time suggestion display XF8C is a display that suggests the time when the mode can be changed, and in the figure, it is written as "5 seconds left". In this example, the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C performs a countdown display and represents the remaining time in which the mode can be changed. Note that the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C is not limited to this, and the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C performs a count-up display until a predetermined number of seconds is reached after the mode selection time suggestion display Good too. Note that the button image of the mode selection promotion display XF8B and the countdown display (timer display) of the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C are displayed in association with each other.
By operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63, the player can select one mode display XF8A from among the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects mode display XF8A representing mode B from among three mode displays XF8A.

In this automatic mode change image display performance, the special symbol changes 500 times counting from the previous jackpot and enters the play time (time saving state), and then the special symbol changes 50 times (the mode shown in Figure 110 (D) This is a performance that is performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 50 times from the suggestion display performance. In other words, this automatic mode change image display performance is a performance performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 550 times since the previous jackpot. Further, this automatic mode change image display performance is performed during one variation of the special symbol without spanning over a plurality of variations of the special symbol.
In other words, this automatic mode change image display performance is performed on the condition that the special symbol has changed 550 times counting from the previous jackpot during one change of the special symbol without straddling multiple changes of the special symbol. This is done automatically without any human intervention.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(F), a mode change completion display effect is performed. In this mode change completion display performance, the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B." In addition, in the mode change completion display effect, the time saving background image XFA, time saving state suggestion display XF4, right hit suggestion display XF5, time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and mode change display XF8 will be deleted.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode change display XF8 is configured to be displayed on the display screen 7a in the immediately preceding change or in the change area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed due to the change. It becomes.
In addition, in the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects B and C, after changing the mode with the automatic mode change image display effect, the mode cannot be changed again until the play time (time saving state) ends or the jackpot is hit. ing. The present invention is not limited to this, but even after changing the mode with the automatic mode change image display effect, if the above-mentioned predetermined conditions (for example, the special symbol has changed 700 times since the previous jackpot) are met. In this case, the automatic mode change image display effect may be performed again.
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects B and C, the automatic mode change image display effect is performed with one variation of the special symbol, but the variation time of the special symbol during the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is The length is configured to be longer than the length of the special symbol variation time in the variation before the automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In addition, the length of the variation time of the special symbol in the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is longer than the length of the variation time of the special symbol in the variation after the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed. It is configured.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects B and C, the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed on the condition that the number of changes in the special symbol has reached 550 times since the last jackpot. The present invention is not limited to this, and the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed on the condition that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number since the last jackpot. Furthermore, even if the number of changes in the special symbol does not reach a predetermined number of times since the last jackpot, the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on other conditions. For example, even if the number of changes in the special symbol does not reach the predetermined number of times since the last jackpot, a predetermined point has been accumulated, or a predetermined effect (premier effect, etc.) has appeared in the change, or The mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on winning a predetermined lottery.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode display XF8A is displayed while the special symbols are changing, and the mode can be selected. A configuration may also be adopted in which a mode display XF8A is displayed and a mode can be selected.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change performances A to C, the mode display XF8A is displayed during one special symbol change without spanning multiple changes of the special symbol, and the mode can be selected. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the mode display XF8A is displayed across a plurality of variations in the special symbol, and the mode can be selected.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned mode change productions A to C during the game, the time saving state suggestion display XF4 indicating that the time saving state is relatively advantageous to the player is displayed, and one game mode among the plurality of game modes to be performed in the time saving state is displayed. A mode A display representing mode A is performed, and then a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol has reached 50 after hitting the ceiling, the special symbol has changed 550 times counting from the previous jackpot). A mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one game mode (for example, mode B) among a plurality of modes is performed based on the game mode (for example, mode B). According to this configuration, when a predetermined condition is met in a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the mode can be changed, so that the player can enjoy the time-saving state in multiple modes, increasing the interest in the time-saving state. can be done. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one game mode (for example, mode B) out of a plurality of modes is a special symbol counting from the previous jackpot. This is performed on the condition that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (550 times).
According to this configuration, even if the player has not hit the jackpot since the previous jackpot, if the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, the mode change display XF8 can be displayed, so the player can see the mode Changes can provide an opportunity for a change of mood. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, while the special symbols are changing, the mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one game mode (for example, mode B) from the previous jackpot This is performed on the condition that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times THX when counted later.
According to this configuration, even if the player has not hit the jackpot since the previous jackpot, if the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times THX, the mode change display XF8 will change even if the special symbol is changing. Since the mode can be displayed, it is possible to appropriately give the player an opportunity to change his mood by changing the mode. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change productions A to C, the game mode changes from mode A to one of the multiple modes (for example, mode B) during one special symbol variation without spanning multiple variations of the special symbol. A mode change display XF8 for changing is performed on the condition that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times THX counting from the previous jackpot.
According to this configuration, even if the player has not hit the jackpot since the previous jackpot, if the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times THX, the player can play the special symbol once without having to go through multiple variations in the special symbol. Since the mode change display XF8 can be displayed while the mode is changing, it is possible to smoothly provide the player with an opportunity to change the mood by changing the mode. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, the game mode changes from mode A to one of the multiple modes (for example, mode B) during one special symbol variation without spanning multiple variations of the special symbol. A mode change display XF8 for changing is automatically performed without the player's operation on the condition that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times THX counting from the previous jackpot.
According to this configuration, even if the player has not hit the jackpot since the previous jackpot, if the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times THX, the player can play the special symbol once without having to go through multiple variations in the special symbol. Since the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed on the display screen 7a while the mode is changing, it is possible to smoothly give the player an opportunity to change the mood by changing the mode, and also to help the player understand the timing of the mode change. can be prevented from missing. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one display effect among the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect that displays a first game state suggestion image representing a first game state that is relatively advantageous to the player;
The second display performance is a display performance that displays a first game mode representing a first game mode that is one game mode among the plurality of game modes performed in the first game state,
The third display effect includes a mode change display for changing from the first game mode to a second game mode, which is one game mode among a plurality of game modes, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is a display performance to be performed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed, and then a third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the mode change display is performed on the condition that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times counting from the previous jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the mode change display is performed on the condition that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times counting from the previous jackpot while the special symbol is changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times counting from the previous jackpot during one special symbol variation without spanning multiple variations in the special symbol. Under the condition that the mode change display is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times counting from the previous jackpot during one special symbol variation without spanning multiple variations in the special symbol. on the condition that the mode change display is automatically performed without any operation by the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Group preview performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 111 to 113. This group preview presentation is executed during the variation presentation of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a group preview effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Group preview performance A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining group preview effect A. In the group preview effect of this embodiment, there are cases in which a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases in which a special image frames in and out of the display screen 7a together with a plurality of specific images. In the group preview performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 111(A), as shown in FIG. 111(B), a plurality of specific images TG representing smiling faces enter the frame from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. A moving performance is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face (smiley face), but may have any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smile marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 111(C), the special image SG may enter the frame mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have any shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(C), there are two cases in which the special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) and a case where the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) and mark) may be in the frame. When the special image SG enters the frame mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation level of a jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, when the special image SG enters the frame together with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation of a jackpot is 50%, and when the special image SG does not enter the frame, the expectation of a jackpot is 30%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from among the plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces), which can improve interest compared to monotonous group previews. Furthermore, even if the special images SG are not mixed and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame, the jackpot due to the fluctuation will be higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not enter the frame. Expectations are high.

FIG. 111(D) shows another embodiment different from FIG. 111(C). Above, the special image SG has been described as an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may represent the same object as the specific image TG, as long as it is different from the specific image TG. In FIG. 111(D), the special image SG is the same smiley face as the specific image TG, but has a different color from the specific image TG. Even in this case, the player can identify the presence or absence of the special image SG from among the plurality of specific images TG.

FIG. 111(E) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG and special images SG are moving out of frame from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG and the special image SG frame out from the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG become visible in a stopped display state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode of "333".

FIGS. 111(G) to (L) are effects during special figure fluctuations that are different from FIGS. 111(A) to (F). In FIG. 111(G), during the special pattern variation, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "3" and are in a ready-to-reach state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(H), the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at "2", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "323" and lose. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(I), an effect is performed in which a plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces) enter the frame from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. The plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the stop display of "323" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and cover the stop displays of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smile marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 111(J), the special image SG may enter the frame mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have any shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(J), there are two cases in which the special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case where the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which the special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) and a case in which the special image SG enters the frame is mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). mark) may be in the frame. When the special image SG enters the frame together with a plurality of specific images TG, the degree of expectation that a revival effect will be executed is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. In other words, the expectation level of a jackpot due to the fluctuation becomes higher. For example, the expected degree of jackpot when the special image SG enters the frame among a plurality of specific images TG is 70%, and the expected degree of jackpot when the special image SG does not enter the frame is 50%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from among the plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), which can improve interest compared to monotonous group previews. In addition, even if the special images SG are not mixed and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame, the revival effect is performed more effectively than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not enter the frame. The expectation level will be higher.

In this embodiment, the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the start timing of the group preview performance. That is, as shown in FIGS. 111(A) to 111(F), when the group preview effect is executed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIGS. 111(G) to 111(L), The degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the case where 8L, 8C, and 8R are lost and the group preview performance is executed while the display is stopped.

FIG. 111(K) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG and special images SG are moving out of frame from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG and the special image SG frame out from the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG change from the stopped display of "323" to "333". The effect displayed is executed while the jackpot mode is switched to a stopped display. Note that the stop display for the losing mode may be displayed instead of switching to the stop display for the winning mode.

[Group preview performance B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining group preview effect B. In the group preview effect of this embodiment, there are cases in which a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases in which a special image frames in and out of the display screen 7a together with a plurality of specific images. In the group preview performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112(A), as shown in FIG. 112(B), a plurality of specific images TG representing smiling faces enter the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left. The effect of moving to is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face (smiley face), but may have any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 112(C), the entire display screen 7a becomes the specific images TG. (covered by a smiley face).

FIG. 112(D) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG are frame-outed from the display screen 7a. When a plurality of specific images TG go out of frame from the display screen 7a, a special image SG may enter the frame following the plurality of specific images TG. Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have any shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112(D), a special image SG enters the frame after a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a special image SG enters a frame after a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). In some cases, the images SG do not continue, and only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces) enter the frame. When a special image SG enters the frame following a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation level of a jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, when a special image SG enters the frame after a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation of a jackpot is 60%, and when the special image SG does not enter the frame, the expectation of a jackpot is 40%. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the special image SG follows the plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces), thereby making it more interesting than the monotonous group preview. In addition, even if the special images SG do not continue and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame, the jackpot due to the fluctuation will be higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not enter the frame. Expectations are high.

When the plurality of specific images TG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG become visible in a stopped display state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode of "333". The special image SG moves at a slower speed to the left than the plurality of specific images TG, moves slowly, and goes out of the frame. Therefore, the plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period even after they are framed out from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(F), the special image SG goes out of frame from the left side of the display screen 7a, and only the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed.

FIGS. 112(G) to (L) are effects during special figure fluctuations that are different from FIGS. 112(A) to (F). In FIG. 112(G), a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. During this variable display, as shown in FIG. 112(H), an effect is performed in which a plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces) enter the frame from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. The plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smile marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112(I), the special image SG may enter the frame mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have any shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112(I), there are two cases in which a special image SG enters the frame while being mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which a special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which a special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which a special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case in which a special image SG is mixed in with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) and mark) may be in the frame. When the special image SG enters the frame mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation level of a jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, when the special image SG enters the frame together with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation of a jackpot is 50%, and when the special image SG does not enter the frame, the expectation of a jackpot is 30%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from among the plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces), which can improve interest compared to monotonous group previews. Furthermore, even if the special images SG are not mixed and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame, the jackpot due to the fluctuation will be higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not enter the frame. Expectations are high.

In this embodiment, the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the movement direction of the group preview performance. That is, when multiple specific images TG and special images SG move to the left as shown in FIGS. 112(A) to (F), and when multiple specific images TG and special images SG move to the left as shown in FIGS. 112(G) to (L), The degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the case where the special image SG moves downward.

FIG. 112(J) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG and special images SG are moving out of frame from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific images TG and the special image SG go out of frame from the display screen 7a, nothing is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 112(K). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a stopped state as shown in FIG. 112(L). Here, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R suddenly appear in the form of a jackpot of "333".

[Group preview performance C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining group preview effect C. In the group preview effect of this embodiment, there are cases in which a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases in which a special image frames in and out of the display screen 7a together with a plurality of specific images. In the group preview performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (variation), and the special drawing lottery result is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113(A), as shown in FIG. 113(B), a plurality of specific images TG representing smiling faces enter the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left. The effect of moving to is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face (smiley face), but may have any shape representing a specific object. The specific object here is not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. When a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smile marks).

FIG. 113(C) shows a state in which a plurality of specific images TG are frame-outed from the display screen 7a. When a plurality of specific images TG frame out from the display screen 7a, when a plurality of specific images TG frame out from the display screen 7a, a special image SG may enter the frame following the plurality of specific images TG. Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have any shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a special image SG enters the frame after a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a special image SG enters a frame after a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). In some cases, the images SG do not continue and only a plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces) enter the frame. When a special image SG enters the frame following a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation level of a jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, when a special image SG enters the frame after a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation of a jackpot is 60%, and when the special image SG does not enter the frame, the expectation of a jackpot is 40%. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the special image SG follows the plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces), thereby making it more interesting than the monotonous group preview. In addition, even if the special images SG do not continue and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame, the jackpot due to the fluctuation will be higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not enter the frame. Expectations are high.

When the plurality of specific images TG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG become visible in a stopped display state. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner of "323". The special image SG goes out of frame after the plurality of specific images TG. After that, as shown in FIG. 113(D), the plurality of specific images TG and special images SG go out of frame, and only the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a are displayed. After that, a pseudo-association suggestion image consisting of a character image of "One more time!!" is displayed. By displaying this pseudo-connection suggestion image, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped and displayed as losing symbols, will change again. In this way, when a plurality of specific images TG frame in the display screen 7a, the degree of expectation increases, and when a plurality of specific images TG frame out from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. 112(D) to (F), When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, if the losing symbol is stopped and displayed and then the pseudo consecutive changes again as shown in FIG. 113(D), the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed and the game ends.

After the pseudo-connection suggestion image is displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again, as shown in FIG. 113(E). During the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. 113(F), an effect is performed in which a plurality of specific images TG enter the frame from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. That is, in one variation, the second group preview effect is executed. This further increases the probability of hitting the jackpot. Here, the expectation level is 60% due to the first group preview performance (with special image SG) shown in Figures 113(B) to (C), and the second group preview performance (with special image SG) shown in Figures 113(F) to (G). With special image SG), the expectation level increases to 80%. The plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smile marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 113(G), the special image SG may enter the frame mixed with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). The special image SG here is the same as the special image SG displayed in the first group preview performance in FIG. 113(C), but it may be an image with different content.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(G), in the second group preview performance, there is a case where the special image SG is mixed into the frame with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), and a case where the special image SG is mixed into the frame. In some cases, only a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) are included in the frame. When the special image SG enters the frame mixed with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation level of a jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. For example, the expected degree of jackpot when the special image SG enters the frame among a plurality of specific images TG is 80%, and the expected degree of jackpot when the special image SG does not enter the frame is 70%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from among the plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces), which can improve interest compared to monotonous group previews. In addition, even if the special images SG are not mixed and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame, the expectation level of the jackpot due to the fluctuation will be higher than when the second group preview effect is not executed. It gets expensive.

As shown in FIG. 113(H), when the plurality of specific images TG frame out from the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG can be visually recognized in a stopped display state. become. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner of "565". When a plurality of specific images TG enter the frame on the display screen 7a for the second time, the expectation level increases, and when a plurality of specific images TG frame out from the display screen 7a, a hit occurs as shown in FIGS. 112(D) to 112(F). When the symbols are displayed in a stopped state, if the losing symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in Figure 113(D) and then change again in a pseudo-continuous manner, the losing symbols are stopped as shown in Figures 113(H) to (L), which will be described later. If a revival effect is executed after being displayed, the losing symbol may stop being displayed and end.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113(I), an effect is performed in which a plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces) enter the frame from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. That is, in one variation, the third group preview effect is executed. This further increases the probability of hitting the jackpot. Here, the expectation level is 60% due to the first group preview performance (with special image SG) shown in Figures 113(B) to (C), and the second group preview performance (with special image SG) shown in Figures 113(F) to (G). With the special image SG), the expectation level increases to 80%, and with the third group preview performance (without the special image SG) in FIGS. 113(I) to (K), the expectation level increases to 90%. Note that when the third group preview performance includes a special image SG, the expectation level increases to 99%. The plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the front side of the stop display of "565" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and cover the stop displays of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks) enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smile marks). At this time, the special image SG may be mixed into the frame with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks), but in this case, the special image SG is not mixed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113(I) to (K), in the third group preview performance, the special image SG is not mixed with the multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and the multiple specific images TG (smile marks) There are cases where only the special image TG (smile mark) is included in the frame, and cases where the special image SG is included in the frame together with a plurality of specific images TG (smile marks). When the special image SG enters the frame together with a plurality of specific images TG, the degree of expectation that a revival effect will be executed is higher than when the special image SG does not enter the frame. In other words, the expectation level of a jackpot due to the fluctuation increases. For example, when the special image SG enters the frame together with a plurality of specific images TG, the expectation of a jackpot is 99%, and when the special image SG does not enter the frame, the expectation of a jackpot is 90%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from among the plurality of specific images TG (smiley faces), which can improve interest compared to monotonous group previews. Furthermore, even if the special images SG are not mixed and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) are in the frame, the expectation level for the revival effect to be executed is higher than in the case where the third group preview effect is not executed. becomes higher.

As shown in FIGS. 113(K) and 113(K), when the plurality of specific images TG go out of frame from the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific images TG are stopped and displayed. becomes visible. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode of "555".

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the group preview effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the first effect is such that the special image SG does not come in the frame during the special figure fluctuation, and after a plurality of specific images TG come in the frame, the special image TG goes out of the frame. and a second effect in which a special image SG in addition to a plurality of specific images TG enters the frame and then goes out of the frame during the special figure variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of winning is higher when a mixed effect) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the second effect (effect in which special images SG are mixed), the special image SG is inserted into the frame after a plurality of specific images TG have entered the frame. However, the frame-out occurs after the plurality of specific images TG are out-of-frame. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111(A) to 111(F), in the second effect (the effect in which the special image SG is mixed), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIGS. 111(G) to 111(L), the second effect may be executed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing state. When executed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may change to a stopped display in a winning mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the second effect (the effect in which the special images SG are mixed) is such that the plurality of specific images TG and the special image SG are aligned in the first direction. There are cases in which the object moves in the frame from one side and out from the other side, and cases in which it moves in the frame from one side in the second direction and out from the other side. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a right sub-display screen 64R, and a left sub-display screen 64L, and in the second performance, the plurality of specific images TG are After being displayed on one of the display screens, it is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after being displayed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed on the other sub-display screen. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the group preview presentation is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In group preview presentations A to C, only one special image SG is mixed in among the plurality of specific images TG. However, a plurality of special images SG may be mixed in a plurality of specific images TG. Furthermore, in the group preview performances A to C, the special image SG is assumed to be one type of image. However, the special image SG may be different for each group preview effect, and the degree of expectation may be different depending on the content of the image. In the group preview effects A to C, the special image SG was represented as an image of the same size as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may have a different size from the specific image TG. For example, the special image SG may be larger or smaller than the specific image TG. The special image SG may move at the same speed as the plurality of specific images TG, or may move at different speeds. That is, the special image SG may move at a slower or faster speed than the plurality of specific images TG. In the group preview effects A to C, the special image SG was moved in the same direction as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may move in a direction different from that of the specific image TG. After entering the frame, the special image SG may stop while moving while the specific image TG is moving. The special image SG may be inserted into the frame later at a different timing when a plurality of specific images TG are moving in the frame.

[Modification 2]
In the group preview performances shown in group preview performances A to C, a performance in which a special image SG is mixed in a plurality of specific images TG is a performance in which a special image SG is not mixed in a plurality of specific images TG. Sometimes it is executed. Whether or not to execute the group preview effect and whether to mix the special image SG into the plurality of specific images TG are assigned so that each of them appears with a predetermined probability.

[Modification 3]
In the group preview performances A to C, the performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a stopped display state after the group preview performance may be another performance. For example, after the group preview performance, a variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed, and then the display may be stopped. Alternatively, after the group preview presentation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be in a state where they are not displayed, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed may appear.

[Modification 4]
It is assumed that the expectation level of a jackpot in FIGS. 111(A) to (F) and the expectation level of a jackpot in FIGS. 111(G) to (L) are different. In other words, the expectation level of a jackpot was assumed to change depending on the timing of the appearance of the group preview performance. However, the level of expectation due to the appearance of the group preview effect may be constant regardless of the timing.

[Modification 5]
The group preview performances A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, after the effects shown in FIGS. 111(G) to (L), the effects shown in FIGS. 112(G) to (L) may be executed.

[Modification 6]
In the group preview effects A to C, only the effects on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 were shown. However, the group preview performances A to C are displayed on the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) in addition to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It may also be displayed. For example, in the effects shown in FIGS. 111(B) to (D) and (I) to (K), the plurality of specific images TG are framed into the upper sub-display screen 64U before entering the frame from above the display screen 7a. , after frame-out from the upper sub-display screen 64U, it may be frame-in from above the display screen 7a. Furthermore, when the plurality of specific images TG are framed from above on the display screen 7a, they may also be framed from above on each of the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113. Furthermore, in the effects shown in FIGS. 112(B) to 112(D) and FIGS. 113(B) to 113(C), a plurality of specific images TG enter the frame from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R, then frame out from the left side, Thereafter, the frame may be entered from the right side of the display screen 7a and taken out from the left side, and then the frame may be entered from the right side of the left sub-display screen 64L and taken out from the left side. Further, the plurality of specific images TG may be moved from the right sub-display screen 64R to the upper sub-display screen 64U, and then may be moved to the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
A first effect in which the plurality of first images enter the frame and then frame out during the special figure fluctuation;
During the special figure variation, a second effect in which the second image in addition to the plurality of first images enters the frame and then goes out of the frame;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The expectation of winning is higher when the second effect is executed than when the first effect is executed during the special figure fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the second effect, the second image enters the frame after the plurality of first images enter the frame, and frames out after the plurality of first images frame out.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether the image is correct or not;
The second performance may be executed when the set of decorative symbols is being displayed in a variable manner, or may be executed after the set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a losing manner;
When the second performance is executed after the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a losing mode, the set of decorative symbols may change to a stopped display in a winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The second effect includes a case where a plurality of first images and a plurality of second images move into the frame from one side in the first direction and out from the other side, and a case where the plurality of first images and the second image move in the second direction. There are times when the frame moves in from one side and out from the other side.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The display means includes a main display means and two sub display means,
In the second effect, the plurality of first images are displayed on one of the sub display means and then displayed on the main display means, and after being displayed on the main display means, the first images are displayed on one of the sub display means. displayed on the other side of
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as the operation parts to be operated by the player, but is not limited to these, and the operation parts to be operated by the player include a lever, , a trigger, etc. may also be used. Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, out of the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, although the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 5...Board lamp 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending image (pending icon)
9C...The relevant pending image (pending icon)
14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 17...Big winning opening opening starting opening 20...First starting opening (first ball entrance)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64...Sub display screen 69...Frame movable accessory 66...Frame lamp 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for performance control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

Equipped with a display screen that displays images,
A gaming machine capable of executing a symbol variation effect in which a plurality of symbol rows vary in a specific direction on the display screen,
After the symbols in a predetermined row of the plurality of symbol rows are temporarily stopped, a symbol movement display effect is executed in which the temporarily stopped symbols, which are the temporarily stopped symbols in the predetermined row, are moved and displayed in a direction different from the specific direction. It is possible and
At the same time that all the symbols including the temporarily stopped symbol are framed out of the display screen by the symbol movement display performance and no symbols are displayed on the display screen, the symbol change performance is executed again to change the symbol row. executing a pseudo-continuous effect that varies in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images